Konica Minolta bizhub C203/C253/C353 Short Guide Poster - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

bizhub C253

Title

bizhub C203/C253/C353 Short Guide Poster

Type of Manual

Abrégé d'utilisation

Applicable for

bizhub C203, bizhub C253, bizhub C353

Languages

Français

Version

1-0-1

Release Date

2009-09-02

ID

DLEU0916953EN00

Files:

• bizhub-c203-c253-c353_poster_fr_1-0-1.pdf (1188 Kbytes)

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC550UserGuideBoxOper.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Short-Guide-Poster-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePro-1300W-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-302-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bihub-423-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-203-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-211-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-1600f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-164-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC452_C552_C552DS_C652_C652DSCopyOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

• [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]).bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings] * Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security] * Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies] * Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache] * Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy] * Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information] * Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log] * Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-18 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-20 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse...] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-22 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts.5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function)bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-2 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-2. - To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The PageScope Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.2 Screen components 5 5.2 Screen components The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta.com/). 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying PageScope Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 5.4 Using the User Box function To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-6 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-7. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-8 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents)] check box to select all documents.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-10 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted.6 Image Panelbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-2 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. d Reference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel 6 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. d Reference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-16. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-7. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-10. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-11. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-14. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-15. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List]bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-16. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-17.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixedbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-8 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-10 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. d Reference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-17. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNGbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-12 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-14 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-16 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. d Reference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytesbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-20 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. d Reference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-22 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted.7 PDF Processing Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-2 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-3). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-4). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-7). d Reference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties 7 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level.bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-6 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-2. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.4 Direct Print 7 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. d Reference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations].8 Searchable PDF functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-2 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. d Reference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-4. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 ptbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted.bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. d Reference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-4. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. - Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to be disabled. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized.9 My Panel Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 9-2 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. d Reference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information d Reference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-2. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. d Reference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-21. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-12. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. d Reference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-13. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-6. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-6. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-7. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-9. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-11. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-12. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-12. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-13.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-6 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal]) In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2]. As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-8 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color]) Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick Settings 4]. As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. d Reference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. d Reference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-10 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-12 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing].bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description10 My Address functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 10-2 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. d Reference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the PageScope My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. d Reference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-6 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. d Reference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-8 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search].11 Indexbizhub 423/363/283/223 11-2 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing ....................................................................5-2 Acquiring my panel ......................................................9-3 Address book ............................................................10-4 Application key ....................................................3-2, 3-4 Application menu ........................................................3-3 C Cache ..........................................................................5-2 Cellular phone/PDA .........................................6-10, 6-17 Customizing ..............................................3-4, 6-21, 9-5 D Deleting .......................................................................5-9 Display mode of web browser ...................................4-10 Displaying ..................................................................4-19 E Entering text in web browser ....................................4-10 External memory .......................................................6-15 F Flash player .................................................................4-3 G Group ........................................................................10-5 I Image panel ...................................... 2-3, 6-2, 6-3, 6-21 Image panel operation ................................................6-5 J Just-fit rendering .......................................................4-10 L Logging in ....................................................................5-4 Logging out .................................................................5-4 M Main menu ...................................................................9-4 My address ........................................................2-3, 10-2 My address book ............................................10-2, 10-9 My address book acquisition ....................................10-3 My panel ......................................................2-3, 9-2, 9-4 My panel settings ........................................................9-5 O OCR .............................................................................8-3 Opening user boxes ....................................................5-5 Operating web browser ...............................................4-9 P PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-2 PDF processing .................................................. 2-3, 7-2 Photo .........................................................................6-18 PIN code ....................................................................6-17 Print ...........................................................................6-14 Printing ............................................................. 4-18, 5-7 Public address book ..................................................10-2 R Restriction of web browser .........................................4-5 Restrictions on my address .......................................10-3 Restrictions on my panel .............................................9-3 S Saving ........................................................................4-20 Scanning ......................................................................6-7 Screen components of image panel ...........................6-4 Screen components of PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-3 Screen components of web browser ..........................4-8 Searchable PDF .......................................... 2-3, 8-2, 8-4 Send tray ...................................................................6-16 Smart-fit rendering ....................................................4-10 Speaker .....................................................................4-11 Specifications ................................................... 4-2, 6-18 Specifications for web browser ...................................4-2 T Toolbar ......................................................................4-12 U Upload .......................................................................4-21 User box ............................................................. 5-5, 6-8 W Web browser .............................................. 2-3, 4-2, 4-4 Web browser information ..........................................4-17 Web browser settings ................................................4-16bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.2 Index by button 11 11.2 Index by button A Access log .................................................................4-17 Access to the Web browser contents .........................4-7 Address Book (Personal) ...........................................10-4 Address Book Index Default .......................................9-9 Application key 1 .........................................................3-2 Application key 2 .........................................................3-3 Application Key Settings .............................................3-4 Application menu ........................................................3-3 Application menu key ..................................................3-2 Authentication information ........................................4-17 C Cache ........................................................................4-17 Cellular Phone ...........................................................6-10 Color Selection Settings ............................................9-12 Combine Documents ................................................6-12 Cookie .......................................................................4-17 Copier Settings ............................................................9-7 Copy to Personal Addr ..............................................10-7 Copy to Shared Addr ................................................10-8 D Default Address Book ...............................................9-10 Default Address Type ................................................9-10 Default Tab ................................................9-7, 9-9, 9-11 Default Tab Density Settings .......................................9-8 Destination List ..........................................................6-15 Digital ID ......................................................................7-5 Direct Print ..................................................................7-7 Document Settings ....................................................6-13 Document Source List .................................................6-8 Document/Page ....................................6-11, 6-12, 6-13 E Easy Setting ................................................................9-8 Edit Document ...........................................................6-11 Encryption ...................................................................7-4 External memory ...............................................6-9, 6-15 F Favorites (Add) ..........................................................4-13 Favorites (View) .........................................................4-13 Function Permission ....................................................4-6 G Group ........................................................................10-5 H History .......................................................................4-14 I Initial Screen Settings ................................................9-13 Input Address ............................................................4-14 L Language Setting ........................................................9-6 M Main Menu Settings ...................................................9-12 Manage windows ......................................................4-17 Measurement Unit Settings .........................................9-6 Menu ..........................................................................4-16 My Panel Settings ........................................................9-5 O OCR operation setting .................................................8-3 P Page Operation .........................................................4-16 Password .....................................................................7-4 PDF Document Properties ...........................................7-3 Photo/Icon .................................................................6-19 Preview ......................................................................6-11 Print ...........................................................................4-15 Print Settings .............................................................6-14 Proxy .........................................................................4-17 R Return to Scan Dest ..................................................6-13 S Scan ............................................................................6-7 Scan/Fax Settings .......................................................9-9 Security ......................................................................4-17 Settings .....................................................................4-17 Shortcut key ........................................... 9-7, 9-10, 9-11 U User Box Settings ......................................................9-11 V View ...........................................................................4-16 W Web browser setting ...................................................4-5Copyright A1UD-9586AF-00 2010 2010. 1 http://konicaminolta.com magicolor 1650EN User’s Guide A034-9571-03Ax-1 Thank You Thank you for purchasing a magicolor 1650EN. You have made an excellent choice. Your magicolor 1650EN is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows, Macintosh and Linux environments. Trademarks KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. magicolor and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright Notice Copyright © 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.x-2 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. 2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. 3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. 4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. 6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor. 8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. 9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above. 10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.x-3 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. 12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries. About Adobe Color Profile ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS CONTRACT CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE. 1. DEFINITIONS In this Agreement, “Adobe” means Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110. “Software” means the software and related items with which this Agreement is provided. 2. LICENSE Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Adobe hereby grants you the worldwide, non-exclusive, nontransferable, royalty-free license to use, reproduce and publicly display the Software. Adobe also grants you the rights to distribute the Software only (a) as embedded within digital image files and (b) on a standalone basis. No other distribution of the Software is allowed; including, without limitation, distribution of the Software when incorporated into or bundled with any application software. All individual profiles must be referenced by their ICC Profile description string. You may not modify the Software. Adobe is under no obligation to provide any support under this Agreement, including upgrades or future versions of the Software or other items. No title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you under the terms of this Agreement. You do not acquire any rights to the Software except as expressly set forth in this Agreement. 3. DISTRIBUTION If you choose to distribute the Software, you do so with the understanding that you agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Adobe against any losses, damages or costs arising from any claims, lawsuits or other legal actions arising out of such distribution, including without limitation, your failure to comply with this Section 3. If you distribute the Software on a standalone basis, you will do so under the terms of this Agreement or your own license agreement which (a) complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement; (b) effectively disclaims all warranties and conditions, express or implied, on behalf of Adobe; (c) effectively excludes all liability for damages on behalf of Adobe; (d) states that any provisions that differ from this Agreement are offered by you alone and not Adobe and (e) states that the Software is available from you or Adobe and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange. Any distributed Software will include the Adobe copyright notices as included in the Software provided to you by Adobe.x-4 4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Adobe licenses the Software to you on an “AS IS” basis. Adobe makes no representation as to the adequacy of the Software for any particular purpose or to produce any particular result. Adobe shall not be liable for loss or damage arising out of this Agreement or from the distribution or use of the Software or any other materials. ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE, EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTY, CONDITION, REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION, ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW, CUSTOM, USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, INTEGRATION, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. The provisions of Sections 4, 5 and 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement, howsoever caused, but this shall not imply or create any continued right to use the Software after termination of this Agreement. 5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL ADOBE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS WHATSOEVER OR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS, EVEN IF AN ADOBE REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS, DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS APPLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN YOUR JURISDICTION. ADOBE’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE. Nothing contained in this Agreement limits Adobe’s liability to you in the event of death or personal injury resulting from Adobe’s negligence or for the tort of deceit (fraud). Adobe is acting on behalf of its suppliers for the purpose of disclaiming, excluding and/or limiting obligations, warranties and liability as provided in this Agreement, but in no other respects and for no other purpose. 6. TRADEMARKS Adobe and the Adobe logo are the registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States and other countries. With the exception of referential use, you will not use such trademarks or any other Adobe trademark or logo without separate prior written permission granted by Adobe. 7. TERM This Agreement is effective until terminated. Adobe has the right to terminate this Agreement immediately if you fail to comply with any term hereof. Upon any such termination, you must return to Adobe all full and partial copies of the Software in your possession or control. 8. GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS If any part of the Software is identified as an export controlled item under the United States Export Administration Act or any other export law, restriction or regulation (the “Export Laws”), you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen, or otherwise located within, an embargoed nation (including without limitation Iran, Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the Software. All rights to use the Software are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement.x-5 9. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws in force in the State of California as such laws are applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California between California residents. This Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. All disputes arising out of, under or related to this Agreement will be brought exclusively in the state Santa Clara County, California, USA. 10. GENERAL You may not assign your rights or obligations granted under this Agreement without the prior written consent of Adobe. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of Adobe, its agents, or employees, but only by an instrument in writing signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. When conflicting language exists between this Agreement and any other agreement included in the Software, the terms of such included agreement shall apply. If either you or Adobe employs attorneys to enforce any rights arising out of or relating to this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys’ fees. You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the complete and exclusive statement of your agreement with Adobe which supersedes any prior agreement, oral or written, between Adobe and you with respect to the licensing to you of the Software. No variation of the terms of this Agreement will be enforceable against Adobe unless Adobe gives its express consent, in writing, signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. ICC Profile for TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) This ICC Profile (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) characterizes Japanese offset press on Coated paper and is fully compatible with ICC profile format. About “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” This is the standard for color reproduction of sheet-fed offset press on Coated paper made by TOYO INK MFG.CO., LTD. (“TOYO INK”). This standard is made from printing test with using TOYO INK’s sheet-fed offset printing inks and TOYO INK’s own printing conditions. “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” is compatible with “JAPAN COLOR”. Agreement 1. The reproduction of images on a printer or a monitor using this ICC Profile do not completely match the TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper. 2. Any and all copyrights of this ICC Profile shall remain in TOYO INK; therefore you shall not transfer, provide, rent, distribute, disclose, or grant any rights in this ICC Profile to any third party without the prior written consent of TOYO INK. 3. In no event will TOYO INK its directors, officers, employees or agents be liable to you for any consequential or incidential, either direct or indirect, damages(including damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, and the like) arising out of the use or inability to use this ICC Profile. 4. TOYO INK shall not be responsible for answering any question related to this ICC Profile.x-6 5. All company names and product names used in this document is the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holder. This ICC Profile made by GretagMacbeth ProfileMaker and granted TOYO INK certain license to distribute by GretagMacbeth AG. TOYO Offset Coated 2.1 © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. 2004 DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("LICENSE AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE, INCLUDING THE DIC STANDARD SFC_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFM_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFU_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFC_FM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_AM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_FM2.0, DIC ABILIO SFC_AM1.0, DIC HY-BRYTE SFC_AM1.0, DIC STANDARD WEBC_AM2.1, DIC STANDARD WEBC_FM2.1, DIC NEWSCOLOR_AM1.0, DIC NEWSCOLOR_FM1.0, PROVIDED BY DIC HEREWITH, AND ANY CORRESPONDIMG ONLINE OR ELECTRONC DOCUMENTATION AND ALL UPDATES OR UPGRADES OF THE ABOVE THAT ARE PROVIDED TO YOU (COLLECTIVELY, THE "PROFILE"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR, IF ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY, AN ENTITY) AND DIC CORPORATION, A JAPANESE COMPANY ("DIC"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PROVIDES A LICENSE TO USE THE PROFILE AND CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMATION AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMERS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF THESE TERMS, YOU MAY NOT USE THE PROFILE. 1. License Grant DIC grants you a gratis non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use the Profile and to allow your employees and authorized agents, if any, to use the Profile, solely in connection with their work for you, subject to all of the limitations and restrictions in this License Agreement. 2. Ownership The foregoing license gives you limited license to use the Profile. You will own the rights in the media containing the recorded Profile, but DIC retains all right, title and interest, including all copyright and intellectual property rights, in and to, the Profile and all copies thereof. All rights not specifically granted in this License Agreement, including all copyrights, are reserved by DIC. 3. Term a. This License Agreement is effective until terminated. b. You may terminate this License Agreement by notifying DIC in writing of your intention to terminate this License Agreement and by destroying, all copies of the Profile in your possession or control. c. DIC may terminate this License Agreement without prior notice to you if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement (either directly or through your employees or agents), retroactive to the time of such failure to comply. In such event, you must immediately stop using the Profile and destroy all copies of the Profile in your possession or control. d. All provisions in this License Agreement relating to warranty disclaimers (Section 5) and the limitation of liability (Section 6) shall survive any termination of this License Agreement.x-7 4. License Method and Restrictions a. You may install and use the Profile on a single desktop computer; provided, however, that, notwithstanding anything contrary contained herein, you may not use the Profile on any network system or share, install or use the Profile concurrently on different computers, or electronically transfer the Profile from one computer to another or over a network. b. You may not make or distribute copies, fix, alter, merge, modify, adapt, sublicense, transfer, sell, rent, lease, gift or distribute all or a portion of the Profile, or modify the Profile or create derivative works based upon the Profile. c. You acknowledge that the Profile is not intended for any usage which may cause death or physical injury or environmental damage and agree not to use the Profile for such usage. d. You shall not use the Profile to develop any software or other technology having the same primary function as the Profile, including but not limited to using the Profile in any development or test procedure that seeks to develop like software or other technology, or to determine if such software or other technology performs in a similar manner as the Profile. e. DIC and other trademarks contained in the Profile are trademarks or registered trademarks of DIC in Japan and/or other countries. You may not remove or alter any trademark, trade names, product names, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Profile. This License Agreement does not authorize you to use DIC’s or its licensors’ names or any of their respective trademarks. 5. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER a. THE PROFILE IS PROVIDED TO YOU FREE OF CHARGE, AND ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND COONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. DIC PROVIDES NO TECHNICAL SUPPORT, WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES FOR THE PROFILE. b. DIC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, TITLE AND QUIET ENJOYMENT. YOU SHALL ASSUME AND BE FULLY LIABLE AND RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL RISKS IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THE PROFILE. DIC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROFILE IS FREE OF DEFECTS OR FLAWS OR WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION, AND IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FORCORRECTING OR REPAIRING ANY DEFECTS OR FLAWS, FOR FEE OR GRATIS. NO RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WILL BE CONFERRED ON YOU UNLESS EXPRESSLY GRANTED HEREIN. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY DIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, COVER OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE PROFILE AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY INCLUDING BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF DIC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO ALL ASPECTS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 7. General a. This License Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan, without giving effect to principles of conflict of laws. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible, and the remaining provisions of x-8 this License Agreement will remain in full force and effect. You hereby consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of Tokyo District Court to resolve any disputes arising under this License Agreement. b. This License Agreement contains the complete agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings, whether oral or written. You agree that any varying or additional terms contained in any written notification or document issued by you in relation to the Profile licensed hereunder shall be of no effect. c. The failure or delay of DIC to exercise any of its rights under this License Agreement or upon any breach of this License Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or of the breach. For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents Contents x-9 1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer .......................................................... 1-2 Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2 Printer Parts ................................................................................................ 1-4 Front View............................................................................................. 1-4 Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-5 Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6 Rear View with Options......................................................................... 1-7 Printer Driver CD/DVD ................................................................................... 1-8 PostScript Drivers ....................................................................................... 1-8 PCL Drivers................................................................................................. 1-8 PPD Files .................................................................................................... 1-8 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD .......................................................... 1-9 Utilities......................................................................................................... 1-9 Documentation.................................................................................... 1-10 System Requirements ................................................................................. 1-11x-10 Contents 2 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 2-1 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 2-2 Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-2 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 2-4 Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-4 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 2-5 Windows Server 2008/Vista.................................................................. 2-5 Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 2-5 Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 2-5 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver .............................................. 2-6 Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 2-6 OK......................................................................................................... 2-6 Cancel................................................................................................... 2-6 Apply ..................................................................................................... 2-6 Help....................................................................................................... 2-6 Favorite Setting..................................................................................... 2-6 Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)........................................... 2-7 Basic Tab .................................................................................................... 2-8 Layout Tab .................................................................................................. 2-8 Cover Page Tab.......................................................................................... 2-8 Watermark/Overlay Tab.............................................................................. 2-8 Quality Tab.................................................................................................. 2-9 Other Tab.................................................................................................... 2-9 Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 2-10 3 Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only) .................................................. 3-1 Working with the Status Monitor .................................................................. 3-2 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3-2 Operating Environment ............................................................................... 3-2 Opening the Status Monitor ........................................................................ 3-2 Using the Status Monitor............................................................................. 3-2 Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts .............................................................. 3-3 Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert ...................................................... 3-3 Closing the Status Monitor ........................................................................... 3-3 4 Printer Control Panel and Configuration Menu .......................................... 4-1 About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 4-2 Control Panel Indicators and Keys.............................................................. 4-2 Toner Supply Indicators .............................................................................. 4-4 Configuration Menu Overview ...................................................................... 4-5 Menu ........................................................................................................... 4-5 MAIN MENU................................................................................................ 4-6Contents x-11 PRINT MENU........................................................................................ 4-6 PAPER MENU ...................................................................................... 4-8 QUALITY MENU ................................................................................. 4-13 INTERFACE MENU ............................................................................ 4-17 SYSTEM DEFAULT............................................................................ 4-22 SERVICE MENU................................................................................. 4-26 LANGUAGE MENU................................................................................... 4-27 5 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 5-1 Print Media ..................................................................................................... 5-2 Media Types ................................................................................................... 5-3 Plain Paper.................................................................................................. 5-3 Thick Stock.................................................................................................. 5-4 Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-5 Labels.......................................................................................................... 5-6 Letterhead................................................................................................... 5-7 Postcards .................................................................................................... 5-7 Printable Area ................................................................................................ 5-8 Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-9 Page Margins.............................................................................................. 5-9 Loading Media .............................................................................................. 5-10 Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray)........................................................................ 5-10 Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-10 Other Media ........................................................................................ 5-13 Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 5-13 Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead........................ 5-16 Tray 2........................................................................................................ 5-18 Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-18 Duplexing ..................................................................................................... 5-21 Output Tray .................................................................................................. 5-22 Media Storage .............................................................................................. 5-23 6 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-1 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-2 About Toner Cartridges............................................................................... 6-2 Replacing a Toner Cartridge................................................................. 6-5 Removing All Toner Cartridges........................................................... 6-12 Replacing the Imaging Cartridge............................................................... 6-16 Replacing the Fuser Unit........................................................................... 6-19 7 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-1 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-2 Cleaning the Printer ....................................................................................... 7-4 Exterior........................................................................................................ 7-4 Interior......................................................................................................... 7-5 Cleaning the Media Feed Roller ........................................................... 7-5x-12 Contents Cleaning the Print Head Window .......................................................... 7-9 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 ....................................... 7-18 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment.......................... 7-20 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers ...................................................... 7-22 8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 8-2 Printing a Configuration Page ...................................................................... 8-2 Preventing Media Misfeeds ........................................................................... 8-4 Understanding the Media Path ..................................................................... 8-5 Clearing Media Misfeeds .............................................................................. 8-5 Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures................................... 8-6 Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer................................................ 8-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1............................................... 8-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2............................................... 8-14 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option ............................. 8-17 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ..................................................... 8-19 Solving Other Problems .............................................................................. 8-21 Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................... 8-25 Status, Error, and Service Messages ......................................................... 8-31 Standard Status Messages....................................................................... 8-31 Error Messages (Warning)........................................................................ 8-32 Error Messages (Operator Call)................................................................ 8-34 Service Messages..................................................................................... 8-36 9 Installing Accessories ................................................................................... 9-1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-2 Tray 2 .............................................................................................................. 9-3 Installing Tray 2........................................................................................... 9-3 Duplex Option ................................................................................................ 9-6 Installing Attachment................................................................................... 9-6 Installing the Duplex Option ........................................................................ 9-8 A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1 Technical Specifications ...............................................................................A-2 Printer..........................................................................................................A-2 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-5 Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-6 What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-6Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Space Requirements To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. Front View 496 mm (19.5") 100 mm (3.9") 396 mm (15.6") 707 mm (27.8") 100 mm (3.9") 380 mm (14.9") 520 mm (20.5") 127 mm (5.0") 245 mm (9.6") 275 mm (10.8") 100 mm (3.9") Side ViewGetting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-3 " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. Side View with Options 922 mm (36.3") 100 mm (3.9") 435 mm (17.1") 637 mm (25.0") 157 mm (6.2") 130 mm (5.1") 245 mm (9.6") 392 mm (15.4") (when Tray 2 and the duplex option are installed) 100 mm (3.9") Side View with Options 919 mm (36.2") 100 mm (3.9") 435 mm (17.1") 582 mm (22.9") 157 mm (6.2") 127 mm (5.0") 245 mm (9.6") 337 mm (13.3") (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 100 mm (3.9")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Printer Parts The following drawings illustrate the parts of your printer referred to throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with them. Front View 1—Output tray 2—Control panel 3—Front cover 4—Dust cover 5—Tray 1 (Multipurpose tray) 6—Top cover 7—Fuser unit 8—Fuser separator levers 9—Fuser cover lever 10—Imaging cartridge 11—Toner cartridge 1 2 3 4 6 5 8 8 7 10 11 9 7 11 10Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-5 Rear View 1—Power switch 2—Power connection 3—USB port 4—10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet Interface port 3 4 2 11-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Front View with Options (when Tray 2 is installed) 1—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when Tray 2 and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Attachment 1 1 2 1 2Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-7 Rear View with Options (when Tray 2 and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Attachment 1 2 1 21-8 Printer Driver CD/DVD Printer Driver CD/DVD PostScript Drivers PCL Drivers PPD Files " For details on the installation of the Windows printer drivers, refer to the Installation Guide. Operating System Use/Benefit Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Macintosh OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/ 10.5) These files are required in order to use the printer driver for each operating system. For details of the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. Macintosh OS X Server (10.2/10.3/ 10.4/10.5) Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD 1-9 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD Utilities Utility Use/Benefit Status Monitor (Windows only) The current status of the printer in addition to the status of consumables and error information can be viewed. For details, refer to chapter 3 “Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only)” . PageScope Net Care Device Manager Printer management functions such as status monitoring and network settings can be accessed. For details, refer to the PageScope Net Care Device Manager User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Network Setup Using the TCP/IP and IPX protocols, basic network printer settings can be specified. For details, refer to the PageScope Network Setup User Manual on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Plug and Print This utility automatically detects a new printer connected to the network and creates a print object on the Windows print server. For details, refer to the PageScope Plug and Print Quick Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope NDPS Gateway This network utility enables printers and KONICA MINOLTA multifunctional products to be used in an NDPS environment. For details, refer to the PageScope NDPS Gateway User Manual on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for sending PDF and TIFF files directly to a printer to be printed. For details, refer to the PageScope Direct Print User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-10 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD Documentation Documentation Use/Benefit Installation Guide This manual provides details on the initial operations that must be performed in order to use this printer, such as setting up the printer and installing the drivers. User’s Guide (this manual) This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using the drivers and control panel and replacing consumables. Reference Guide This manual provides details on installing the Macintosh and Linux drivers and on specifying settings for the network, and the printer management utility. Service & Support Guide The Need Assistance sheet provides information on product support and servicing.System Requirements 1-11 System Requirements „ Personal computer – Pentium 2: 400 MHz (Pentium 3: 500 MHz or higher is recommended) – PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended) – Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor „ Operating System – Microsoft Windows Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic /Home Premium /Ultimate/Business / Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 1 or later; Service Pack 2 or later is recommended), Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later) – Mac OS X (10.2.8 or later; We recommend installing the newest patch), Mac OS X Server (10.2 or later) – Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2 „ Free hard disk space – Approximately 20 MB of free hard disk space for printer driver and Status Monitor – Approximately 128 MB of free hard disk space for image processing „ RAM 128 MB or more „ CD/DVD-ROM drive „ I/O interface – 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface port – USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port " For details on the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-12 System RequirementsUsing the Printer Driver2-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you should “declare” the options in the driver. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) 1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows: – (Windows Server 2008/Vista) From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Properties. – (Windows XP/Server 2003) From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Properties. – (Windows 2000) From the Start menu, choose Settings and then Printers to display the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Properties. 2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip to step 9. 3 Select the Configure tab. 4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8. 5 Click the Refresh to automatically configure installed options. " The Refresh is available only if bi-directional communication is available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed out. 6 From the Device Options list, select an option, one at a time, and then select Enable or Disable from the Settings menu. 7 Click Apply. 8 Select the General tab. 9 Click Printing Preferences. The Printing Preference dialog box appears.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 2-3 10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, on the appropriate tabs. 11 Click Apply. 12 Click OK to exit from the Print preference dialog box. 13 Click OK to exit from the Properties dialog box.2-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary. " You must have administrator privileges in order to uninstall the printer driver. " If the User Account Control window appears when uninstalling on Windows Server 2008/Vista, click the Allow button or the Continue button. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) 1 Close all applications. 2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows: – (Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003) From the Start menu, choose All programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver. – (Windows 2000) From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver. 3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be deleted, and then click the Uninstall button. 4 Click Uninstall. 5 Click OK, and restart your computer. 6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 2-5 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) Windows Server 2008/Vista 1 From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Printing Preferences. Windows XP/Server 2003 1 From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences. Windows 2000 1 From the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers to display the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences.2-6 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Common Buttons The buttons described below appear on each tab. OK Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made. Cancel Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made. Apply Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box. Help Click to view the help. Favorite Setting This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings, specify the desired settings, and then click Add. Specify the settings described below, and then click OK. „ Name: Type in the name of the settings to be saved. „ Icon: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings. The selected icon appears in the drop-down list. „ Sharing: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by other users logged onto the computer. „ Comment: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved. Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To change the registered setting, click Edit. In addition, predefined settings can be selected. The predefined settings are those for "2-up", "Photo" and "Grayscale". Select Defaults from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all tabs to their default values.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-7 „ Printer View Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Paper View button (when a tab other than the Quality tab is selected) or the Quality View button (when the Quality tab is selected). " This button does not appear on the Advanced tab. „ Paper View Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button. " This button does not appear on the Quality tab. „ Quality View Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the Quality tab. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button. " This button appears only when the Quality tab is selected. „ Default Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults. " This button does not appear on the Advanced tab. " When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed. Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only) The Advanced Tab allows you to „ Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing functions (such as booklet printing) „ Specify the PostScript output method „ Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed „ Print a mirror image „ Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data2-8 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Basic Tab The Basic Tab allows you to „ Specify the orientation of the media „ Specify the size of the original document „ Select the output media size „ Zoom (expand/reduce) documents „ Specify the paper source „ Specify the type of media „ Specify the number of copies Layout Tab The Layout Tab allows you to „ Print several pages of a document on the same page (N-up printing) „ Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify booklet printing (when the duplex option is installed) „ Rotate the print image 180 degrees „ Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify duplex (double-sided) printing (when the duplex option is installed) „ Adjust the binding margin „ Adjust the printing position (PCL printer driver only) Cover Page Tab The Cover Page Tab allows you to „ Print front and back cover pages and separator pages „ Specify the paper tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover pages and separator pages Watermark/Overlay Tab " Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form. In addition, if settings have been specified for “N-up” or “Booklet” in the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the specified settings.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-9 The settings in the "Watermark" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows you to „ Select the watermark to be used „ Create, edit or delete watermarks „ Print a frame around watermarks „ Print transparent (shaded) watermarks „ Print the watermark on only the first page „ Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages The settings in the "Overlay" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows you to „ Select the form to use „ Add or delete overlay files „ Create a form (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL printer driver only) „ Display the form information (PCL printer driver only) „ Print the form on All Pages, First Page, Even Pages and Odd Pages „ Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL printer driver only) Quality Tab The Quality Tab allows you to „ Switch between color and grayscale printing „ Specify the printer color settings (Quick Color) „ Specify the resolution for the printout „ Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only) „ Select whether or not economy printing is used „ Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded „ Print using the printer's fonts Other Tab The Other Tab allows you to „ Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing2-10 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver „ Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not hide overlay files (PCL printer driver only) „ Send a notification by e-mail when printing is finished „ Shows the version information for the printer driver Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions. „ Server and client combinations Server: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista Client: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista „ Functions with limitations applied Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover Page, Back Cover Page, Separator Page, Create Overlay, Print Overlay, WatermarkUsing the Status Monitor (Windows Only)3-2 Working with the Status Monitor Working with the Status Monitor Introduction The Status Monitor shows information about the current status of the printer. The Status Monitor can be installed from the Utilities and Documentation CD/ DVD. For details on the installation, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. Operating Environment The Status Monitor can be used on computers running Windows Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 connected to the printer using the Ethernet connection. Opening the Status Monitor Use one of the following steps to open the Status Monitor: „ Windows Vista/XP/Server 2003—From the Start menu, choose All Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon displayed in the taskbar. „ Windows 2000—From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon displayed in the task bar. Using the Status Monitor Status Tab „ Select Printer—Selects the printer whose status is displayed. In addition, the messages that appear in the message window of the selected printer are displayed. „ Graphic—Normally, the Konica Minolta logo is displayed. When a printer error is detected, a graphic representation of the printer is shown, and the location of the problem is indicated. When the background of the printer graphic is red or yellow, there is an error and the job has been interrupted. „ Advanced Options—Click Advanced Options to display the Advanced Options dialog box. From the Advanced Options dialog box, select whether the Status Monitor automatically starts when the operating system is started and whether error notifications are sent by e-mail. „ Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box.Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts 3-3 „ Printer Alerts—Displays text messages that alert you of conditions such as low toner. „ Recovery Instructions—Provides you with explanations of what you need to do in order to correct problems and recover from error conditions. Consumables Tab Displays the usage status (approximate percentage remaining) of each toner consumables. „ Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box. „ Refresh—Rechecks the supplies and displays their status. " Click Help to display windows containing explanations of the Status Monitor functions. Refer to this help for detailed information. " The percentages remaining for the consumables displayed using the Status Monitor may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts When the Status Monitor detects a printing problem, the icon on the Windows task bar changes from green (normal) to yellow (warning), orange or red (error), depending on the severity of the printer problem. Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert When the Status Monitor notifies you of a printing problem, double-click its icon on the Windows task bar to open the Status Monitor. The Status Monitor identifies what type of error has occurred. Closing the Status Monitor Click Close to close the Status Monitor window. To exit Status Monitor, right-click the Status Monitor icon in the taskbar, and then click Exit.3-4 Closing the Status MonitorPrinter Control Panel and Configuration Menu4-2 About the Control Panel About the Control Panel The control panel, located on the top of the printer, allows you to direct the printer’s operation. In addition, it displays the current status of the printer, including any condition that needs your attention. Control Panel Indicators and Keys No. Indicator Off On 1 The printer is not ready to accept data. The printer is ready to accept data. 2 No problem. The printer requires operator attention (usually accompanied by a status message in the message window.) Ready Error Cancel 8 MESSAGE WINDOW 3 1 2 6 5 4 7 Ready ErrorAbout the Control Panel 4-3 No. Indicator Function 3 „ Moves up in the menu structure „ Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls upward through the available characters 4 „ Moves right in the menu structure „ Moves right through the available menu choices 5 „ Moves down in the menu structure. „ Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls downward through the available characters 6 „ Moves left in the menu structure „ Moves left through the available menu choices 7 „ Cancels the currently displayed menu choice „ Allows you to cancel one or all print jobs that are currently being printed or processed: 1. Press the Cancel key. 2. Press the ) or * keys to select either CANCEL JOB/CURRENT or CANCEL JOB/ALL 3. Press the Menu Select key. The print job(s) is (are) cancelled. 8 „ Enters the menu system „ Moves down in the menu structure „ Selects the displayed menu choice Cancel4-4 About the Control Panel Toner Supply Indicators The indicators shown below will appear, indicating the amount of toner that remains in the yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) toner cartridges. I D L EConfiguration Menu Overview 4-5 Configuration Menu Overview The configuration menu accessible from the control panel is structured as shown below. Menu " If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the user password or administrator password must be entered to display the main menu. The displayed menu is different according to the authority of the entered password. For details on the default passwords, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on page 4-22. PRINT MENU PAPER MENU INTERFACE MENU SYSTEM DEFAULT SERVICE MENU QUALITY MENU IDLE LANGUAGE MAIN MENU4-6 Configuration Menu Overview MAIN MENU PRINT MENU With this menu, printer information, such as the configuration page and the demo page, can be printed. " All factory default values are shown in bold. MENU MAP Settings YES/NO Prints the menu map. CONFIGURATION Settings YES/NO Prints the configuration page. STATISTICS PAGE Settings YES/NO Prints the statistics page such as the number of pages printed. POSTSCRIPT PCL MENU MAP DIRECTORY LIST CONFIGURATION FONT LIST DEMO STATISTICS PAGE PRINT MENUConfiguration Menu Overview 4-7 " The amounts remaining for the supplies status and coverage information displayed using the statistics page may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. FONT LIST POST SCRIPT Settings YES/NO Prints the PostScript font list. PCL Settings YES/NO Prints the PCL font list. DIRECTORY LIST Settings YES/NO Prints the directory list of the flash. DEMO Settings YES/NO Prints the demo page.4-8 Configuration Menu Overview PAPER MENU With this menu, the media used for printing can be managed. " * This menu item appears only if the duplex option is installed. ** These menu items appear only if an optional lower feeder unit is installed. TRAY 1 MODE TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE MEDIA TYPE TRAY2 ** MEDIA SIZE CUSTOM SIZE AUTO CONTINUE INPUT TRAY PAGE RECOVERY DUPLEX * ORIENTATION LENGTH (xx) WIDTH (xx) PAPER MENU TRAY CHAINING ** MAP ** LOGICAL TRAY 0 MODE LOGICAL TRAY 9 ~Configuration Menu Overview 4-9 " All factory default values are shown in bold. INPUT TRAY TRAY 1 MODE Settings AUTO/CASSETTE When printing from Tray 1, select whether the paper size and paper type set from the printer driver or the MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE settings set by selecting MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY 1 in the control panel have priority. If AUTO is selected, the printer driver settings have priority during printing. If CASSETTE is selected, printing is performed when the printer driver settings and the control panel settings are all the same. TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE Settings LETTER/LEGAL/ EXECUTIVE/A4/A5/B5/ B5(ISO)/G LETTER/ STATEMENT/FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/G LEGAL/C6/DL/ J-POSTCARD/KAI 16/ KAI 32/16K/SP FOLIO/ OFICIO/CUSTOM Select the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 1. "The default setting for North America is LETTER. The default setting for all other regions is A4. MEDIA TYPE Settings PLAIN PAPER/LABELS/ LETTERHEAD/ENVELOPE/ POSTCARD/THICK1/ THICK2 Select the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 1. TRAY2 MEDIA SIZE Settings LETTER/A4 Select the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 2. "The default setting for North America is LETTER. The default setting for all other regions is A4.4-10 Configuration Menu Overview CUSTOM SIZE WIDTH (xx) Settings 92-216 mm (3.63-8.50 inch)* * With inch measurements, the decimal point does not appear in the message window. For example, 3.63 inches appears as 363. Specify the width of the custom-sized paper loaded into Tray 1. "On the model for North America, the settings appear in inches and the menu item appears as WIDTH(IN). On the models for all other regions, the settings appear in millimeters and the menu item appears as WIDTH(MM). LENGTH (xx) Settings „ With plain paper 195-356 mm (7.69-14.01 inch)* „ With thick stock 184-297 mm (7.24-11.70 inch)* * With inch measurements, the decimal point does not appear in the message window. For example, 7.69 inches appears as 769. Specify the length of the custom-sized paper loaded into Tray 1. "On the model for North America, the settings appear in inches and the menu item appears as LENGTH(IN). On the models for all other regions, the settings appear in millimeters and the menu item appears as LENGTH(MM).Configuration Menu Overview 4-11 AUTO CONTINUE Settings ON/OFF If OFF is selected, an error occurs if the size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. If ON is selected, no error occurs if the size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. TRAY CHAINING Settings YES/NO If YES is selected and the specified paper tray runs out of paper during printing, a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is automatically selected so printing can continue. If NO is selected and the specified paper tray runs out of paper, printing stops. MAP MODE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the Tray Mapping function is used. LOGICAL TRAY 0-9 Settings PHYSICAL TRAY 1/ PHYSICAL TRAY 2 Specify whether jobs received from another manufacturer’s printer driver are printed using Tray 1 or Tray 2. PHYSICAL TRAY 2 is the default only for LOGICAL TRAY 2. The default for all other logical trays is PHYSICAL TRAY 1. DUPLEX Settings OFF/SHORTEDGE/LONGEDGE If LONGEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for long-edge binding. If SHORTEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for short-edge binding. ORIENTATION Settings PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE Specify the orientation of the media.4-12 Configuration Menu Overview PAGE RECOVERY Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the page is printed again after recovering from a paper misfeed. If ON is selected, the page that was misfed is printed again. If OFF is selected, printing continues with the next page without printing the misfed page.Configuration Menu Overview 4-13 QUALITY MENU With this menu, settings for the print quality can be specified. BLACK CYAN MAGENTA TONER OUT ACTION REPLACE TONER AIDC REQUEST AIDC QUALITY MENU YELLOW P/H CLEAN UP MODE REMOVE ALL IMAGE REFRESH ECONOMY PRINT DUPLEX SPEED4-14 Configuration Menu Overview " All factory default values are shown in bold. REPLACE TONER BLACK Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the black toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. CYAN Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the cyan toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. MAGENTA Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the magenta toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. YELLOW Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the yellow toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. REMOVE ALL Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the printer enters REMOVE ALL mode. This mode is used when removing all toner cartridges. For details on removing all toner cartridges, refer to “Removing All Toner Cartridges” on page 6-12. TONER OUT ACTION Settings STOP/CONTINUE If STOP is selected, printing stops when the toner cartridge is empty. If CONTINUE is selected, printing continues even if the toner cartridge is empty. However, the printing result are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops.Configuration Menu Overview 4-15 AIDC REQUEST AIDC Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, image adjustments are performed. "The AIDC function consumes toner. MODE Settings ON/OFF If ON is selected, the image adjustments are applied. If OFF is selected, image adjustments are not applied. P/H CLEAN UP Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the printer enters P/H CLEAN UP mode. P/H CLEAN UP mode is a mode that allows the user to clean the print head window more easily. The print head window is not cleaned automatically. For details on cleaning the print head window, refer to “Cleaning the Print Head Window” on page 7-9. IMAGE REFRESH Settings YES/NO Use when thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on images. "The IMAGE REFRESH function consumes toner. ECONOMY PRINT Settings ON/OFF Select whether to print graphics with a reduced density by reducing the amount of toner that is used. If ON is selected, the amount of toner used is reduced when printing. If OFF is selected, the amount of toner used is not reduced when printing.4-16 Configuration Menu Overview DUPLEX SPEED Settings AUTOMATIC/SPEED/QUALITY Select the print speed for double-sided printing. If AUTOMATIC is selected, the print speed is automatically selected. If SPEED is selected, the print speed has priority; however, the print quality may decrease. If QUALITY is selected, the print quality has priority; therefore, the print speed will decrease while the print quality may increase.Configuration Menu Overview 4-17 INTERFACE MENU With this menu, interface settings can be specified. The printer must be rebooted after any setting in the ETHERNET menu (for example, the TCP/IP address) is changed. Therefore, the following message appears when the configuration menu is exited (the + key is repeatedly pressed) after a setting has been changed. Select YES, and then press the Menu Select key to reboot the printer. Otherwise, turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again after a few seconds. ETHERNET * INTERFACE MENU TCP/IP ENABLE IPV4 DHCP/BOOTP IPV4 ADDRESS DEFAULT ROUTER SUBNET MASK ENABLE AUTO IP IPV6 ENABLE IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP IDENTIFIER4-18 Configuration Menu Overview " * If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to display this menu. For details on the default administrator password, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on page 4-22. IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE ETHERNET SPEED DISABLE 802.1X PS PROTOCOL ENABLE JOB TIMEOUT USB ENABLE AUTO GLOBAL PREFIX DISABLE FILTERS DISABLE IPSECConfiguration Menu Overview 4-19 " All factory default values are shown in bold. ETHERNET TCP/IP ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, TCP/IP is enabled. If NO is selected, TCP/IP is disabled. IPV4 DHCP/ BOOTP Settings YES/NO Select whether or not the IP address is automatically acquired. If YES is selected, the IP address is automatically acquired. If NO is selected, the IP address is not automatically acquired. IPV4 ADDRESS Settings 192.168.001.002 Set the IPv4 address for this printer on the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value. If the IP address is manually specified, DHCP/BOOTP is automatically set to NO. DEFAULT ROUTER Settings 000.000.000.000 Specify the IPv4 address of the router if one is on the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value. SUBNET MASK Settings 000.000.000.000 Specify the subnet mask for the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value.4-20 Configuration Menu Overview ENABLE AUTO IP Settings YES/NO Select whether or not the IPv4 address is automatically acquired when DHCP/BOOTP and PING, ARP are not functioning or when there is no response. If YES is selected, the IP address is automatically acquired. If NO is selected, the IP address is not automatically acquired. IPV6 ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IPv6 is enabled. If NO is selected, IPv6 is disabled. IDENTIFIER Displays the Link-Local address. ENABLE AUTO Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, auto configuration of IPv6 is enabled. If NO is selected, auto configuration of IPv6 is disabled. GLOBAL PREFIX Displays the global address. IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, HTTP is enabled. If NO is selected, HTTP is disabled. DISABLE FILTERS Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, filter is disabled. DISABLE IPSEC Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IPsec is disabled.Configuration Menu Overview 4-21 IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE Settings AUTO/802.2/802.3/ETHER II/SNAP Specify the protocol used with NetWare. ETHERNET SPEED Settings AUTO/100 FULL DUPLEX/100 HALF DUPLEX/10 FULL DUPLEX/10 HALF DUPLEX Specify the transmission speed for the network and the transmission method for bi-directional transmission. DISABLE 802.1X Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IEEE802.1x function is disabled. PS PROTOCOL Settings BINARY/QUOTED BINARY Select whether PostScript jobs are received in the binary format or the quoted format. USB ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, USB is enabled. If NO is selected, USB is disabled. JOB TIMEOUT Settings 0-60-999 Specify the length of time (in seconds) until the print job being received is timed out when USB is being used.4-22 Configuration Menu Overview SYSTEM DEFAULT With this menu, settings can be specified to adjust the operation of the printer, such as the time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode. " If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to display this menu. PRINT QUALITY EMULATIONS DEFAULT AUTO DEFAULT ERROR PAGE PCL LINE TERMINATION FONT PITCH SIZE FONT NUMBER POINT SIZE SYMBOL SET STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE DATE & TIME ENERGY SAVER SYSTEM DEFAULT COLOR MODE POSTSCRIPTConfiguration Menu Overview 4-23 " All factory default values are shown in bold. PRINT QUALITY Settings HIGH/STANDARD Select the image quality for prints. COLOR MODE Settings COLOR/GRAYSCALE Specify whether printing is in full color or grayscale. "The color mode setting specified from the printer driver has priority over the setting specified for this menu item. FORMAT ERASE FLASH RESTORE/SAVE RESTORE FACTORY SAVE CUSTOM RESTORE CUSTOM SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE SET ADMIN PASSWD SET USER PASSWD4-24 Configuration Menu Overview EMULATIONS DEFAULT Settings AUTOMATIC/POSTSCRIPT/PCL5/ PCL XL/HEX DUMP Specify the printer control language. If AUTOMATIC is selected, the printer automatically selects the printer control language from the data stream. AUTO DEFAULT Settings PCL5/POSTSCRIPT Select the printer description language when it cannot be identified from the data. POSTSCRIPT ERROR PAGE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not an error page is printed when a PostScript error occurs. PCL LINE TERMINATION Settings CR=CR LF=CRLF/ CR=CR LF=LF/ CR=CRLF LF=LF/ CR=CRLF LF=CRLF Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the PCL language. FONT PITCH SIZE Settings 44-1000-9999 Specify the bitmap font size in the PCL language. FONT NUMBER Settings 0-32767 Specify the font used with the PCL language. The font numbers that appear correspond to the PCL font list. For details on printing the font list, refer to “PRINT MENU” on page 4-6. POINT SIZE Settings 400-1200- 99975 Specify the outline font size in the PCL language. SYMBOL SET Specify the symbol set used with the PCL language. The default setting is PC8.Configuration Menu Overview 4-25 STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE Settings YES/NO Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the printer is turned on. If YES is selected, the startup page is printed when the printer is turned on. If NO is selected, the startup page is not printed. DATE & TIME Settings yyyymmdd:hhmmss Set the date and time on the time-of-day (TOD) clock. The settings appear in the following order: year, month, day:hour, minutes, seconds. ENERGY SAVER Settings 15 MINUTES/30 MINUTES/1 HOUR/ 2 HOURS Specify the length of time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode. "2 HOURS is displayed only on 120 V units. SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the menus are protected with a password. If ON is selected, all menus are protected with a password. SET USER PASSWD Settings: 1 Specify the user password for displaying the user menus. The specified password is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECRITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON. The password can contain a maximum of 16 characters. "Empty passwords are not allowed.4-26 Configuration Menu Overview SERVICE MENU With this menu, the service representative can adjust the printer and perform maintenance operations. This menu cannot be used by the user. SET ADMIN PASSWD Settings: the last four digits of the printer serial number Specify the administrator password for displaying the administrator menus. The specified password is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/ SECRITY/CONFIG/ENABLE is set to ON. The password can contain a maximum of 16 characters. "Empty passwords are not allowed. FORMAT ERASE FLASH Settings YES/NO Select whether or not to initialize the flash RAM. If YES is selected, the flash RAM is initialized. RESTORE /SAVE RESTORE FACTORY Settings YES/NO Select whether or not all menu items are reset to their initial settings. If YES is selected, all menu items are reset to their initial settings. SAVE CUSTOM Settings YES/NO Select whether or not all changed menu settings are saved. If YES is selected, all changes are saved. RESTORE CUSTOM Settings YES/NO Select whether or not menu items are reverted to the previously saved settings. If YES is selected, the menu items revert to the previously saved settings.Configuration Menu Overview 4-27 LANGUAGE MENU ENGLISH/FRENCH/ GERMAN/SPANISH/ ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/DUTCH/CZECH/ JAPANESE/POLISH The display language of the message window can be changed to the required language. The default setting is English. The language selections appear in the message window in the corresponding language. For example, GERMAN appears as DEUTSCH.4-28 Configuration Menu OverviewMedia Handling5-2 Print Media Print Media Specifications " For custom sizes, use the printer driver to specify the settings within the ranges shown in the above table. Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Inch Millimeter Letter 8.5 x 11.0 215.9 x 279.4 1/2 Yes Legal 8.5 x 14.0 215.9 x 355.6 1 No Statement 5.5 x 8.5 140.0 x 216.0 1 No Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184.0 x 267.0 1 No A4 8.2 x 11.7 210.0 x 297.0 1/2 Yes A5 5.9 x 8.3 148.0 x 210.0 1 No B5 (JIS) 7.2 x 10.1 182.0 x 257.0 1 No B5 (ISO) 6.9 x 9.8 176.0 x 250.0 1 No Folio 8.3 x 13.0 210.0 x 330.0 1 No SP Folio 8.5 x 12.69 215.9 x 322.3 1 No Foolscap 8.0 x 13.0 203.2 x 330.2 1 No UK Quarto 8.0 x 10.0 203.2 x 254.0 1 No Government Letter 8.0 x 10.5 203.2 x 266.7 1 No Government Legal 8.5 x 13.0 216.0 x 330.0 1 No Envelope DL 4.3 x 8.7 110.0 x 220.0 1 No Envelope C6 4.5 x 6.4 114.0 x 162.0 1 No Japanese Postcard 3.9 x 5.8 100.0 x 148.0 1 No 16K 7.7 x 10.6 195.0 x 270.0 1 No Kai 16 7.3 x 10.2 185.0 x 260.0 1 No Kai 32 5.1 x 7.3 130.0 x 185.0 1 No Oficio Mexico 8.5 x 13.5 215.9 x 342.9 1 No Custom Size, Minimum** 3.6 x 7.7 92.0 x 195.0 1 No Custom Size, Maximum** 8.5 x 14.0 216.0 x 356.0 1 No Notes: * Tray 1 = Multipurpose Tray 2 = Plain paper only ** With thick stock The minimum size is 3.6 x 7.25 inch (92.0 x 184.0 mm). The maximum size is 8.5 x 11.7 inch (216.0 x 297.0 mm).Media Types 5-3 Media Types Before purchasing a large quantity of special media, do a trial print with the same media and check the print quality. Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. For a list of approved media, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com. Plain Paper Use plain paper that is „ Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office paper. Note Do not use the media types listed below. These could cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, or damage to the printer. DO NOT use media that is „ Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper, digitally gloss- coated media, and colored paper that has been treated) „ Carbon backed „ Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-sensitive paper, heat-pressure paper, and heat-press transfer paper) „ Cold-water-transfer paper „ Pressure sensitive „ Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy film, and postcards) „ Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine „ Dusty „ Wet (or damp) Capacity Tray 1 Up to 200 sheets, depending on the paper weight Tray 2 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper weight Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Plain paper Weight 60 to 90 g/m² (16 to 24 lb bond) Duplexing Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed.5-4 Media Types " Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does not adhere well to moist or wet paper. „ Layered „ Adhesive „ Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled „ Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn „ Too slick, too coarse, or too textured „ Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back „ Too thin or too thick „ Stuck together with static electricity „ Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous „ Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C [356°F]) „ Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles) „ Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons „ Acidic „ Any other media that is not approved Thick Stock Paper thicker than 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock. Test all thick stock to ensure acceptable performance and to ensure that the image does not shift. Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 thick stock sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Thick 1 (91 to163 g/m2 ) Thick 2 (164 to 209 g/m2 ) Weight 91 to 209 g/m² (25 to 55.9 lb) Duplexing Not supportedMedia Types 5-5 DO NOT use thick stock that is „ Mixed with any other media in Tray 1 (as this will cause printer misfeeding) Envelopes Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded. Use envelopes that are „ Envelope C6 or Envelope DL (Other envelope sizes are not supported.) „ Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints, sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps " Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based glue avoids this problem. „ Approved for laser printing „ Dry DO NOT use envelopes that have „ Sticky flaps „ Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing „ Transparent windows „ Too rough of a surface „ Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes „ Been presealed Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 envelopes, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Envelope Duplexing Not supported5-6 Media Types Labels A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and a carrier sheet: „ The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification. „ The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface. You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels. Use label sheets that are „ Recommended for laser printers DO NOT use label sheets that „ Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed „ Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive " Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media misfeeds to occur. „ Are precut or perforated Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 label sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Labels Duplexing Not supported Full-page labels (uncut) Do not use OK to use Shiny backed paperMedia Types 5-7 Letterhead Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Postcards Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 sheets, depending on their size and thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Letterhead Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 postcards, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Postcard Duplexing Not supported5-8 Printable Area Use postcards that are „ Approved for laser printers DO NOT use postcards that are „ Coated „ Designed for inkjet printers „ Precut or perforated „ Preprinted or multicolored „ Folded or wrinkled " If the postcard is warped, press on the warped area before putting it in Tray 1. Printable Area The printable area on all media sizes is up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges of the media. Each media size has a specific printable area (the maximum area on which the machine can print clearly and without distortion). This area is subject to both hardware limits (the physical media size and the margins required by the machine) and software constraints (the amount of memory available for the full-page frame buffer). The printable area for all media sizes is the page size minus 4.2 mm (0.165") from all edges of the media. " When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations apply. z The printable area is 339.6 (13.4") mm from the leading edge of the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the leading edge.) z The bottom margin is 16.0 mm (0.63"). a a a a Printable Area a=4.2 mm (0.165")Printable Area 5-9 Envelopes Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs depending on the envelope type. " The envelope print orientation is determined by your application. " With the Envelope DL size (long edge feeding), the nonprintable areas on the left and right sides are 6 mm. Page Margins Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may lose part of your image (due to printable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the printable area for optimum results. a=4.2 mm (0.165") Non-printable area Non-guaranteed printable area Guaranteed printable area Front side (can be printed) Back side (cannot be printed) a a a a5-10 Loading Media Loading Media How do I load media? Take off the top and bottom sheets of a ream of paper. Holding a stack of approximately 200 sheets at a time, fan the stack to prevent static buildup before inserting it in a tray. Note Although this printer was designed for printing on a wide range of media types, it is not intended to print exclusively on a single media type except plain paper. Continuous printing on media other than plain paper (such as envelopes, labels, or thick stock) may adversely affect print quality or reduce engine life. When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it with the new media, even the edges, then reload it. Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media misfeeds. Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray) For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1, refer to “Print Media” on page 5-2. Loading Plain Paper 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.Loading Media 5-11 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 3 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load paper above the ▼ mark. Up to 200 sheets (80 g/m2 [21 lb]) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time.5-12 Loading Media 4 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 5 Reattach the dust cover. 6 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.Loading Media 5-13 Other Media When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (for example, Envelope, Label, or Thick Stock) in the driver for optimum print quality. Loading Envelopes 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Remove any media from the tray. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.5-14 Loading Media 4 Load the envelopes flap side down in the tray. " Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a media misfeed may occur. " Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time. " For envelopes with the flap (Envelope C6 or Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap side inserted first. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the envelopes. 6 Reattach the dust cover.Loading Media 5-15 7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.5-16 Loading Media Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Remove any media from the tray. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 4 Load the media face up in the tray. " Up to 50 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time.Loading Media 5-17 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the media. 6 Reattach the dust cover. 7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.5-18 Loading Media Tray 2 Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be loaded in Tray 2. Loading Plain Paper 1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible. 2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it. 3 Remove the lid from Tray 2.Loading Media 5-19 4 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 5 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load above the 100% line. Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2 [21 lb]) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time. 6 Reattach the lid to Tray 2. 100% 75 505-20 Loading Media 7 Reinsert Tray 2 into the printer.Duplexing 5-21 Duplexing Select paper with high opacity for duplex (double sided) printing. Opacity refers to how effectively paper blocks out what is written on the opposite side of the page. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed data from one side of the page will show through to the other side. Check your application for margin information. For best results, print a small quantity to make sure the opacity is acceptable. Duplex (Double sided) printing can be done automatically with the duplex option installed and selected. Note Only Letter/A4 plain paper, 60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb bond) can be autoduplexed. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Duplexing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterhead is not supported. How do I autoduplex? You should verify that the duplex option is physically installed on the printer to successfully duplex the job. Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex printing. The following Binding Position settings are available. If “Short Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the top. If “Long Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the sides. 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 35-22 Output Tray In addition, if “N-up” has been set to “Booklet”, autoduplex printing is performed. The following Order settings are available when “Booklet” is selected. 1 Load plain paper into the tray. 2 From the printer driver, specify the layout for duplex printing. 3 Click OK. " With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front side is printed. Output Tray All printed media is output to the face-down output tray on top of the printer. This tray has a capacity of approximately 100 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2 (21 lb) paper. " If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your printer may experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup. If “Left Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a left-bound booklet. If “Right Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a right-bound booklet. 1 1 2 3 3 3 1 1 2Media Storage 5-23 Media Storage How do I store media? „ Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up too much and cause misfeeding. „ If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface. „ Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat (above 35°C [95°F]), and dust. „ Avoid media leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position. Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 5-24 Media StorageReplacing Consumables6-2 Replacing Consumables Replacing Consumables Note Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in voiding your warranty. About Toner Cartridges Your printer uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan. Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the printer or on yourself. " Install only new toner cartridges in your printer. If a used toner cartridge is installed, then toner remaining amount may not be accurate. " The toner is nontoxic. If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. If you get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. " Refer to the following URL for recycling information. US: printer.konicaminolta.com/products/recycle/index.asp Europe: www.konicaminolta.eu/printing-solutions/more-information/ clean-planet.html Other regions: printer.konicaminolta.com Note Do not use refilled toner cartridges or unapproved toner cartridges. Any damage to the printer or quality problems caused by a refilled toner cartridge or unapproved toner cartridge will void your warranty. No technical support is provided to recover from these problems.Replacing Consumables 6-3 When replacing a toner cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can find your machine type and the toner cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine. " For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges. Printer Type Printer Part Number Toner Cartridge Type Toner Cartridge Part Number AM A034 012 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05F Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AF Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GF High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01F High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06F High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CF High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HF EU A034 022 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05H Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AH Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GH High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01H High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06H High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CH High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HH AP A034 042 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05K Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AK Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GK High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01K High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06K High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CK High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HK GC A034 082 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05N Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AN Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GN High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01N High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06N High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CN High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HN6-4 Replacing Consumables Keep toner cartridges: „ In their packaging until you’re ready to install them. „ In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat). The maximum storage temperature is 35° C (95° F) and the maximum storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur, degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for about one hour before use. „ Level during handling and storage. Do not hold, stand or store cartridges on their ends or turn them upside down; the toner inside the cartridges may become caked or unequally distributed. „ Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.Replacing Consumables 6-5 Replacing a Toner Cartridge Note Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP, the message X TONER OUT/ REPLACE XXXX (where “X” and “XXXX” represent the color of the toner) appears when a toner cartridge becomes empty. Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge. " If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, the printing can continue even after the message "X TONER OUT" has appeared; however, the printing quality cannot be guaranteed. If printing is continued and the toner becomes empty, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops. For details on the setting, refer to “QUALITY MENU” on page 4-13. 1 Check the message window to see which color toner cartridge needs replacing. " If the machine detects that a toner cartridge is empty (X TONER OUT or X TONER LIFE END appears), the empty toner cartridge is automatically moved so that it can be replaced. If you wish to change the toner cartridge, use ether operation described below to switch the printer to REPLACE TONER. Press Key Until Display Reads X TONER OUT REPLACE XXXX or X TONER LIFE END MENU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU6-6 Replacing Consumables × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER REPLACE TONER BLACK Press until appropriate color (X) is displayed. REPLACE TONER X X *YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR AND REPLACE X TONER Press Key Until Display ReadsReplacing Consumables 6-7 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. 3 Check that the toner cartridge to be replaced has been moved to the front. " You can identify the toner cartridge by the color of the handle. 4 Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " Do not manually rotate the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not rotate the carousel with force, otherwise it may be damaged.6-8 Replacing Consumables Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. Note Dispose of the empty toner cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the toner cartridge. For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 6-2. 5 Prepare a new toner cartridge. 6 Shake the cartridge a few times to distribute the toner. " Make sure that the toner roller cover is securely attached before shaking the toner cartridge.Replacing Consumables 6-9 7 Remove the cover from the toner roller. " Do not touch or scratch the toner roller. 8 Align the shaft on each end of the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge. " Before inserting the toner cartridge, make sure that the color of the toner cartridge to be installed is the same as the label on the toner cartridge carousel.6-10 Replacing Consumables Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. 9 Press in the toner cartridge until it locks into place. 10 Close the front cover.Replacing Consumables 6-11 " The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the toner cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top or front cover before the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.6-12 Replacing Consumables Removing All Toner Cartridges Note Be careful not to spill toner while removing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. By using the REMOVE ALL mode, all toner cartridges can be removed. Follow the procedure described below to use the REMOVE ALL mode. 1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the REMOVE ALL mode. Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MANU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER REPLACE TONER BLACK REPLACE TONER REMOVE ALLReplacing Consumables 6-13 " It is not possible to exit REMOVE ALL mode before the operation is finished (even if the Cancel key is pressed). If the printer has incorrectly been switched to REMOVE ALL mode, open, then close the front cover four times to exit REMOVE ALL mode. 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. REMOVE ALL *NO REMOVE ALL YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR AND REMOVE M TONER Press Key Until Display Reads6-14 Replacing Consumables 3 Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " Do not manually rotate the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not rotate the carousel with force, otherwise it may be damaged. Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration.Replacing Consumables 6-15 4 Close the front cover. 5 Follow the same procedure to remove the cartridges for the cyan, black, then yellow toners.6-16 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Imaging Cartridge When replacing an imaging cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can find your machine type and the imaging cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine. " For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge. 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically. Printer Type Printer Part Number Part Name Imaging Cartridge Part Number AM A034 012 Imaging Cartridge A0VU 011 EU A034 022 A0VU 0Y1 AP A034 042 A0VU 0Y1 GC A034 082 A0VU 0Y1Replacing Consumables 6-17 Note Dispose of the used imaging cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the imaging cartridge. 3 Prepare the new imaging cartridge. Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. 4 Slowly insert the new imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish installing the imaging cartridge.6-18 Replacing Consumables 5 Carefully close the top cover. " The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the imaging cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top cover before the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.Replacing Consumables 6-19 Replacing the Fuser Unit For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA fuser unit for your specific printer type. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord. Note There are extremely hot parts within the printer. Before replacing the fuser unit, wait about 20 minutes after turning off the printer, and then check that the fusing section has reached room temperature, otherwise, you may get burnt. 2 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover.6-20 Replacing Consumables 3 Push the blue handles back as far as possible. 4 Grab the blue handles and lift the fuser unit to remove it. Note Do not touch the matching connectors of the fuser unit and the machine.Replacing Consumables 6-21 5 Prepare a new fuser unit. 6 Pull the fuser separator levers forward as far as possible.6-22 Replacing Consumables 7 Remove the fuser separator material, and then return the fuser separator levers to their original positions. Note Be careful not to touch the paper exit sensor and the surface of the fuser roller in the fuser unit. 8 While lifting the fuser unit with the blue handles (one on each side), vertically insert the fuser unit.Replacing Consumables 6-23 Note Do not touch the paper exit sensor on the fuser unit. Note Do not touch the matching connectors of the fuser unit and the machine. M6-24 Replacing Consumables 9 After the fuser unit is firmly installed, flip the blue handles down toward you. 10 Carefully close the top cover. 11 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer.Maintaining the Printer7-2 Maintaining the Printer Maintaining the Printer CAUTION Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure to follow any instructions contained in them. These labels are located on the inside of the printer’s covers and the interior of the printer body. Handle the printer with care to preserve its life. Abuse handling may cause damage and void your warranty. If dust and paper scraps remain on the inside or outside of the printer, printer performance and print quality will suffer, so the printer should be cleaned periodically. Keep the following guidelines in mind. WARNING! Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer; otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. CAUTION The fuser unit is hot. When the top cover is opened, the fuser unit temperature drops gradually (one hour wait time). „ Be careful when cleaning the inside of the printer or removing media misfeeds, as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot. „ Do not place anything on top of the printer. „ Use a soft cloth to clean the printer. „ Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits. „ Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain solvents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the printer. „ Always test any cleaning solution (such as mild detergent) on a small inconspicuous area of your printer to check the solution’s performance. „ Never use sharp or rough implements, such as wire or plastic cleaning pads. „ Always close the printer’s covers gently. Never subject the printer to vibration. „ Do not cover the printer immediately after using it. Turn it off and wait until it cools down.Maintaining the Printer 7-3 „ Do not leave the printer’s covers open for any length of time, especially in well-lit places; light may damage the imaging cartridge. „ Do not open the printer during printing. „ Do not tap media stacks on the printer. „ Do not lubricate or disassemble the printer. „ Do not tilt the printer. „ Do not touch the electrical contacts, gears, or laser devices. Doing so may damage the printer and cause the print quality to deteriorate. „ Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level. If the media is stocked too high, your printer may experience media misfeeds and excessive media curl. „ Keep the printer level to avoid toner spillage. „ When lifting the printer, grasp the areas shown in the figure. „ Before moving the printer, remove the dust cover, and fold up Tray 1. „ If the optional lower feeder unit, attachment and duplex option are installed, remove them and move them separately. „ If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. „ Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you plug in the printer. 15.1 kg 33.3 lbs7-4 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Printer CAUTION Be sure to turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning. However, be sure to turn on the printer when cleaning the print head window. Exterior Ready Error Cancel Control Panel Ventilation Grill Printer ExteriorCleaning the Printer 7-5 Interior Cleaning the Media Feed Roller 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically.7-6 Cleaning the Printer Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge horizontally as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight). 3 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. BOTTOM VIEWCleaning the Printer 7-7 CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller.7-8 Cleaning the Printer 4 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge. 5 Carefully close the top cover.Cleaning the Printer 7-9 Cleaning the Print Head Window 1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the P/H CLEAN UP mode. Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MENU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER × 3 QUALITY MENU P/H CLEAN UP P/H CLEAN UP *YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR REMOVE TONER7-10 Cleaning the Printer " To exit P/H CLEAN UP mode, press the Cancel key. 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. 3 The magenta toner cartridge has been moved to the position from where it can be replaced. Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " When the magenta toner cartridge is removed, a gap is created within the printer so that the print head window can easily be cleaned.Cleaning the Printer 7-11 Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. 4 Close the front cover. " The toner cartridge rotate within the printer. 5 After the toner cartridges have finished rotating, open the top cover.7-12 Cleaning the Printer 6 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically. Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge horizontally as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight).Cleaning the Printer 7-13 7 Clean the print head window by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. BOTTOM VIEW7-14 Cleaning the Printer Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller. 8 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.Cleaning the Printer 7-15 9 Close the top cover. 10 After the toner cartridges have finished rotating, open the front cover.7-16 Cleaning the Printer 11 Align the shaft on each end of the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge. Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration.Cleaning the Printer 7-17 12 Press in the magenta toner cartridge until it locks into place. 13 Close the front cover.7-18 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers for Tray 2. 1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Lift the printer off of Tray 2 and temporarily place it on a sturdy flat surface. 4 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-19 5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on top of Tray 2. 6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-20 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers for the attachment. 1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Lift the printer off of the attachment and temporarily place it on a sturdy flat surface. 4 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-21 5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on top of the attachment. 6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-22 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers 1 Open the duplex cover. 2 Clean the feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 3 Carefully close the duplex cover.Troubleshooting8-2 Introduction Introduction This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving printer problems you may encounter, or at least guide you to the proper sources for help. Printing a Configuration Page Print a configuration page to verify the printer is configured correctly. Printing the configuration page page 8-2 Preventing media misfeeds page 8-4 Understanding the media path page 8-5 Clearing media misfeeds page 8-5 Solving problems with media misfeeds page 8-19 Solving other problems page 8-21 Solving problems with printing quality page 8-25 Status, error, and service messages page 8-31 Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MENU MAIN MENU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU PRINT MENU MENU MAP PRINT MENU CONFIGURATIONPrinting a Configuration Page 8-3 CONFIGURATION YES The configuration page prints and the printer goes back to IDLE. Press Key Until Display Reads8-4 Preventing Media Misfeeds Preventing Media Misfeeds Make sure that... Media matches the printer specifications. Media is flat, especially on the leading edge. The printer is on a hard, flat, level surface. You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity. You always adjust the media guides in Tray 1 after inserting the media (a guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, and printer damage). You load the media printing-side up in the tray (many manufacturers place an arrow on the end of the wrapper to indicate the printing side). Avoid... Media that is folded, wrinkled, or excessively curled. Double feeding (remove the media and fan the sheets—they may be sticking together). Loading more than one type/size/weight of media in a tray at the same time. Overfilling the trays. Allowing the output tray to overfill (the output tray has a 100-sheet capacity— misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 100 sheets of media to accumulate at one time).Understanding the Media Path 8-5 Understanding the Media Path Understanding the printer’s media path will help you locate media misfeeds. 1 Output tray 2 Imaging cartridge 3 Toner cartridge carousel 4 Tray 1 5 Tray 2 (optional) 6 Fuser unit 7 Duplex option Clearing Media Misfeeds To avoid damage, always remove misfed media gently, without tearing it. Any piece of media left in the printer, whether large or small, can obstruct the media path and cause further misfeeds. Do not reload media that has misfed. Note The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process. If you touch the printed surface, the toner may stick to your hands, so be careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media. Make sure not to spill any toner inside the printer. CAUTION Unfused toner can dirty your hands, clothes, or anything else it gets on. If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off. If toner gets on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. If, after clearing the media misfeed, the misfeed message in the control panel window persists, open and close the printer’s top cover. This should clear the misfeed message. 1 6 7 2 3 4 58-6 Clearing Media Misfeeds Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures Media Misfeed Message Page Reference CHECK TRAY1 PAPER (Displaying alternately) PRESS MENU/SELECT This message appears in the following cases. z When no media is loaded in Tray 1 z When a misfeed has occurred in Tray 1 With the first case, load media into the tray, and then press the Menu Select key. With the second case, refer to page 8-13. PAPER JAM FUSER page 8-7 PAPER JAM EXIT page 8-7 PAPER JAM TRANSFER page 8-7 PAPER JAM TRAY2 OPEN TOP COVER page 8-14 PAPER JAM DUPLEX page 8-17Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically.8-8 Clearing Media Misfeeds Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontally horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight).Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-9 3 Push the fuser separator levers back as far as possible. CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention.8-10 Clearing Media Misfeeds 4 Remove any misfed media. " If a media misfeed occurs near the fuser unit, pull out the media from below the fuser unit, as shown in the illustration at the right. " If the media cannot be removed from below the fuser unit, raise the fuser unit cover, and then remove the media from above the fuser unit. " Remove the dust cover from Tray 1 and remove the media. M MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-11 Note Do not touch the paper exit sensor on the fuser unit. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller. M8-12 Clearing Media Misfeeds 5 Return the fuser separator levers to their original positions. 6 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge. 7 Carefully close the top cover. MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. " If the media cannot be removed, instead of pulling it with extreme force, clear the media misfeed according to the procedure described in “Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer” on page 8-7. 3 Reattach the dust cover. 4 Press the Menu Select key.8-14 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2 1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible. 2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it. 3 Remove any misfed paper. " If necessary, remove the dust cover from Tray 1 and close the tray.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-15 4 Remove the lid from Tray 2, and then remove all paper from the tray. 5 Fan the paper, and align its edges. 6 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 7 Load the media in Tray 2, and attach the lid.8-16 Clearing Media Misfeeds 8 Reinsert Tray 2. 9 Open and close the top cover to clear the misfeed message.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-17 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option 1 Open the duplex cover. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. " Always remove the misfed media in the feed direction as shown only. " If the media misfeed occurs at the bottom feed slot and the media does not stick out enough to be removed, turn the dial at the right in the direction of the arrow until the media can be pulled out.8-18 Clearing Media Misfeeds 3 Close the duplex cover.Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 8-19 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds " Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked, repaired, or cleaned. Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you’re using unsupported print media. Symptom Cause Solution Several sheets go through the printer together. The front edges of the media are not even. Remove the media and even up the front edges, then reload it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Media misfeed message stays on. Top cover needs to be opened and closed again to reset the printer. Open and close the top cover again. Some media remains misfed in the printer. Recheck the media path and make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media. Duplex option misfeeds. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. Only Letter/A4 plain paper and recycled paper can be autoduplexed if the duplex option is installed and the media type is set properly in the driver. Make sure that you have not mixed media types in Tray 1. Do not duplex envelopes, labels, thick stock, postcard, or letterheads. Media is still being misfed. Recheck the media path inside the duplex option and make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media.8-20 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds Media is misfeeding. The media is not correctly positioned in the tray. Remove the misfed media and reposition the media properly in the tray. The number of sheets in the tray exceeds the maximum allowed. Remove the excess media and reload the correct number of sheets in the tray. The media guides are not correctly adjusted to the media size. Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1 to match the size of the media. Warped or wrinkled media is loaded in the tray. Remove the media, smooth it out, and reload it. If it still misfeeds, do not use that media. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Custom-sized media, envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads are loaded in Tray 2. Special media must be loaded in Tray 1 only. The recommended label sheet is facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the label sheets according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Envelopes are facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the flaps facing down. If the flaps are on the long edge (Envelope C6 and Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap edge toward the printer and the flap side facing down. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. The media feed roller is dirty. Clean the media feed roller. For more details, refer to “Cleaning the Media Feed Roller” on page 7-5. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-21 Solving Other Problems " To order KONICA MINOLTA consumables, go to www.q-shop.com. Symptom Cause Solution Printer power is not on. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the printer, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the printer. Something is wrong with the outlet connected to the printer. Plug another electrical appliance into the outlet and see whether it operates properly. The power switch is not correctly turned on (I position). Turn the power switch off (O position), then turn it back to the on (I position). The printer is connected to an outlet with a voltage or frequency that does not match the printer specifications. Use a power source with the specifications listed in appendix A, “Technical Specifications”. The control panel displays X TONER LOW much sooner than expected. One of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. You printed with heavy toner coverage. See specifications in appendix A, “Technical Specifications”. You can’t print the configuration page. The tray is empty. Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded with media, in place, and secure. There is a media misfeed. Clear the media misfeed.8-22 Solving Other Problems Printing takes too much time. The printer is set to a slow printing mode (for example, thick stock). It takes more time to print with special media. When using regular paper, make sure that the media type is set properly in the driver. The printer is set to power saving mode. It takes time for printing to start in power saving mode. The job is very complex. Wait. No action needed. A toner cartridge for a different region is installed (X INCORRECT is displayed in the message window). Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridge approved for your specific printer. Blank pages are printed. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or empty. Check the toner cartridges. The image will not print correctly or not at all, if a cartridge is empty. The wrong media is being used. Check that the media type set in the driver matches the media loaded in the printer. Printer returned to IDLE before the configuration menu was changed. The printer was in the configuration menu structure without a selection being made within two minutes. When in the configuration menu structure, select your choice within 2 minutes. Not all pages print. The Cancel key was pressed. Make sure no one pressed the Cancel key while your job was printing. The tray is empty. Check that the tray is loaded with media, in place, and secure. A document is printed with an overlay file which has been created by a non-suitable driver. Print the overlay file using a suitable driver. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-23 Printer resets or turns off frequently. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the printer, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the printer. A system error occurred. Contact Technical Support with the error information. You are experiencing duplex problems. Media or settings are not correct. For autoduplexing, make sure that you have a duplex option installed. Make sure that you are using correct media. „ Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed. „ Do not duplex envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, letterheads, or plain paper with a size other than Letter/A4. „ Make sure that you have not mixed media types in Tray 1. Make sure the duplex option is installed and declared in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab). In the printer driver (Layout tab), choose “Double-sided”. You hear unusual noises. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. The tray is not installed correctly. Remove the tray that you are printing from and reinsert it completely into the printer. There is a foreign object stuck inside the printer. Turn off the printer and remove the object. If you cannot remove it, contact Technical Support. The web-based utility cannot be accessed. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator’s password is incorrect. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator password has a 1-character minimum and a 16-character maximum. For details of the PageScope Web Connection administrator password, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/ DVD. Symptom Cause Solution8-24 Solving Other Problems Media is wrinkled. The media is moist from humidity or having water spilled on it. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media feed roller or fuser unit is defective. Check them for damage. If necessary, contact Technical Support with the error information. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. The date and time is not correctly maintained on the printer. The backup battery has reached the end of its service life. Contact Technical Support. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-25 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Symptom Cause Solution Nothing is printed, or there are blank spots on the printed page. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check if any is damaged. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity for media storage. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media set in the printer driver mismatches the media loaded in the printer. Load the correct media in the printer. The power source does not match the printer specifications. Use a power source with the proper specifications. Several sheets are being fed at the same time. Remove the media from the tray and check for static electricity. Fan plain paper or other media, and replace it in the tray. Media is not set properly in the tray(s). Remove the media, tap it to straighten it out, return it into the tray, and realign the media guides. Entire sheet is printed in black or color. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.8-26 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Image is too light; there is low image density. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace with new, dry media. There is not much toner left in the cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Image is too dark. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Image is blurred; background is lightly stained; there is insufficient gloss of the printed image. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-27 The print or color density is uneven. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective or low. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. Irregular print or mottled image appears. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity in the media storage area. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. There is insufficient fusing or the image comes off when rubbed. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Symptom Cause Solution8-28 Solving Problems with Printing Quality There are toner smudges or residual images. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or installed incorrectly. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. There are toner smudges on the back side of the page (whether or not it has been duplexed). The media path is dirty with toner. Print several blank sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Abnormal areas (white, black, or color) appear in a regular pattern. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-29 Image defects. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. A toner cartridge may be leaking. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Lateral lines or bands appear on image. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. The media path is dirty with toner. Print several sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on images. Toner is not evenly adhering to the media. Perform IMAGE REFRESH. (On the control panel menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/IMAGE REFRESH, then select YES.) If the problem persists, contact your vendor or authorized service provider. Colors look drastically wrong. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and verify that the toner is distributed evenly on each cartridge roller, and reinstall the toner cartridges. One or more of the toner cartridges may be low or empty. Check the control panel for an X TONER LOW or X TONER OUT message. If necessary, replace the specified toner cartridge. Symptom Cause Solution8-30 Solving Problems with Printing Quality If the problem is not resolved, even after all of the above have been performed, contact Technical Support with the error information. For contact information, refer to the Need Assistance Sheet. Colors are not registering properly; colors are mixed or have pageto-page variation. The imaging cartridge is not correctly seated. Remove the imaging cartridge and reinstall it. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The color has a poor reproduction or has poor color density. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Perform AIDC. (On the control panel menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/AIDC/REQUEST AIDC, then select YES.) Symptom Cause SolutionStatus, Error, and Service Messages 8-31 Status, Error, and Service Messages Status, error, and service messages are displayed in the control panel message window. They provide information about your printer and help you locate many problems. When the condition associated with a displayed message has changed, the message is cleared from the window. Standard Status Messages This message... means... do this... CALIBRATING Whenever you replace a toner cartridge or reboot the printer after making environmental changes, the printer automatically pauses to do an Auto-Image Density Control (AIDC) cycle. This process is provided to make reliable printer operation with optimum output quality possible. No action needed. CANCELLING JOB The job is being cancelled. ENERGY SAVER The printer is in Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption during periods of inactivity. In addition, the machine will return to its normal operating condition when any key on the control panel is pressed. IDLE The printer is on and ready to receive data. INITIALIZING The printer is being initialized. PRINTING The printer is printing.8-32 Status, Error, and Service Messages Error Messages (Warning) PROCESSING The printer is processing data. No action needed. magicolor 1650 STARTING PRINTER The printer is being started up. PORT AUTH ACTIVE The IEEE802.1x port is being authorized. WARMING UP The printer is warming up. REFRESHING The printer is adjusting the toner distribution. This message... means... do this... CHECK TRAY1 PAPER (Displaying alternately) PRESS MENU/SELECT Tray 1 is empty. Load the media into Tray 1, and then press the Menu Select key. Media has misfed in Tray 1. Remove the misfed media. I/C END The imaging cartridge has reached the end of its life. Replace the imaging cartridge. "Printing can continue, however, the printing result are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "I/C LIFE END" appears and printing stops. I/C LOW The imaging cartridge is near the end of its life. Prepare a new imaging cartridge. TRAY 2 IS EMPTY Tray 2 is empty. Load the media into Tray 2. This message... means... do this...Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-33 TRAY 2 OPEN Tray 2 cassette is not installed or is not fully closed. Close Tray 2 or print from another tray. VIDEO I/F ERROR A video interface error occurred in the printer. Turn off the printer. After a few seconds, turn on the printer. X INCORRECT The X toner cartridge is an unapproved type. Install a KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridge of the appropriate type (AM, EU, AP or GC). See page 6-3. X MEMORY ERROR A memory error occurred in the toner cartridge. Re-install the specified toner cartridge. X TONER LOW The X toner cartridge is nearly empty. Prepare the specified color toner cartridge. X TONER OUT (Ready Indicator: On. Error Indicator: Off) The X toner cartridge is empty. (If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE.) Replace the toner cartridge. "Printing can continue, however, the printing results are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops. This message... means... do this...8-34 Status, Error, and Service Messages Error Messages (Operator Call) This message... means... do this... AUTH TIMEOUT The user is automatically logged off due to IEEE802.1x port authorization. Reauthorize the IEEE802.1x port, and then log on. AIDC ERROR AIDC sensor error. Open and close front cover to automatically clean AIDC parts. BELT ERROR The printer detected incorrect image position on the image transfer belt. Check the cyan and black toner cartridges and replace them if they have run out. If the error has not been recovered by this procedure, please call Technical Support. DUPLEX UNIT PANEL OPEN Duplex cover is open. Close the duplex cover. DOWNLOAD IMAGE INVALID While updating code, an error has occurred. The user should attempt the upgrade process again. I/C LIFE END The imaging cartridge is reached the end of its life. Replace the imaging cartridge. PAPER JAM DUPLEX Media has misfed in the duplex option. Locate and remove the misfeed. PAPER JAM EXIT Media has misfed in the fuser area. PAPER JAM FUSER PAPER JAM TRANSFER Media has misfed in the transfer roller area. This type of misfeed means that the media did not make it to the paper exit area. PAPER JAM TRAY 2 Media has misfed while being pulled from Tray 2. Locate and remove the misfeed.Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-35 PUT "SIZE" "TYPE" IN TRAY 1 The size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. Load the correct paper on Tray1, and press the Menu Select key, then specify the size and type of the paper. PUT “SIZE” “TYPE” IN TRAY 2 The paper size set from the printer driver is different from the size of paper loaded into Tray 2. „ Open Tray 2 and keep correct paper size. Then close Tray 2. „ Specify the correct paper size in the MAIN MENU/ PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY2/MEDIA SIZE menu. TOP COVER OPEN The printer’s top cover is open. Close the top cover. The imaging cartridge is not installed. Install the imaging cartridge. A imaging cartridge incompatible with the machine is installed. Replace the imaging cartridge with a correct one. X TONER LIFE END The X toner cartridge has reached the end of its life. Replace the toner cartridge. "If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE. X TONER MISSING The X toner cartridge is not installed. Install a X toner cartridge. X TONER OUT REPLACE XXXX (Ready Indicator: Off. Error Indicator: On) The X toner cartridge is empty. (If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP.) Replace the toner cartridge. "If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, printing can continue. However, the printing results are not guaranteed. This message... means... do this...8-36 Status, Error, and Service Messages Service Messages These messages indicate a more serious error that can only be corrected by a customer service engineer. If one of these messages appears, turn the printer off, then turn it on again. If the problem persists, contact your local vendor or authorized service provider. This service message... means... do this... SERVICE CALL XXXX An error has been detected with the item indicated “XXXX” in the service message. Reboot the printer. This often clears the service message, and printer operation can resume. If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.Installing Accessories9-2 Introduction Introduction Note Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty. This chapter provides information about the following accessories. Note Installing accessories always requires that the printer and accessories are turned off and unplugged during installation. " For details on the available options, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com. Tray 2 500-sheet tray Duplex Option Auto duplexing "In order for the duplex option to be installed, Tray 2 must be installed on the printer. Duplex Option and Attachment Auto duplexing "The attachment is an interface unit for installing the duplex option on the machine. "During installation, install the attachment before installing the duplex option.Tray 2 9-3 Tray 2 If Tray 2 is installed, up to 500 additional sheets of A4/Letter-size paper can be loaded. Installing Tray 2 Note Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.9-4 Tray 2 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Prepare Tray 2. " Be sure to place Tray 2 on a level surface. 4 Lift the printer and place it on top of Tray 2, making sure that the positioning pins on Tray 2 correctly fit into the holes in the bottom of the printer. 5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 6 Load paper into Tray 2. For details on loading paper, refer to “Tray 2” in “Loading Plain Paper” on page 5-18. 7 Insert Tray 2 into the printer. 8 Reconnect all interface cables.Tray 2 9-5 9 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer. 10 Declare the Tray 2 in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab, see page 2-2).9-6 Duplex Option Duplex Option Duplex (Double Sided) printing can be performed automatically with the duplex option installed. See “Duplexing” on page 5-21. In order for the duplex option to be installed, either of the following must be installed on the printer. z Tray 2 z Attachment " If Tray 2 is installed, it is not necessary to install the attachment. In this case, skip “Installing the Attachment”, and continue with “Installing the Duplex Option” on page 9-8. Installing Attachment If the attachment is installed, the duplex option can be installed. (The attachment cannot be used by itself; it must be used together with the duplex option.) Note Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills. Duplex option AttachmentDuplex Option 9-7 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Prepare the attachment. " Be sure to place the attachment on a level surface. 4 Lift the printer and place it on top the attachment, making sure that the positioning pins on the attachment correctly fit into the holes on the bottom of the printer. 5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. Next, install the duplex option.9-8 Duplex Option Installing the Duplex Option " The illustrations in the following installation procedure show the printer with Tray 2 installed; however, the installation procedure would be the same if the attachment was installed. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Remove the tape affixed to the rear cover. 3 Prepare the duplex option.Duplex Option 9-9 4 Install the duplex option. Align the duplex option with its installation position, and then push down on the bottom of the duplex option until it locks into place. Note When attaching the duplex option, attach the bottom of the option first. If the duplex option is attached incorrectly, it may be damaged. 5 Open the duplex cover. While holding the duplex option against the printer, tighten the screws inside the cover to complete the installation of the duplex option.9-10 Duplex Option 6 Reconnect all interface cables. 7 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer. 8 Declare the duplex in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab, see page 2-2).AppendixA-2 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Printer Type Desktop full color laser beam printer Printing system Dual laser diode with polygon mirror Developing system Mono component development system Fusing system Heat roller system Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 4 bits or 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 1 bit First print Simplex „ Monochrome: 13.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 22.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) Duplex „ Monochrome: 26.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 35.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) Print speed Simplex „ Monochrome: 20.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Duplex „ Monochrome: Tray 1: 8.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Tray 2: 13.2 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Warm-up time Avg. 45 secondsTechnical Specifications A-3 Media sizes Tray 1 „ Paper width:92 to 216 mm (3.6 to 8.5") „ Paper length: Plain paper: 195 to 356 mm (7.7 to 14.0") Thick stock 1/2: 184 to 297 mm (7.25 to 11.7") Tray 2 (Optional) A4/Letter Paper/Media Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 ; 16 to 24 lb bond) Envelope Thick stock 1 (91 to 163 g/m2 ) Thick stock 2 (164 to 209 g/m2 ) Postcard Letterhead Label sheet Input capacity Tray 1 „ Plain paper: 200 sheets „ Envelope: 10 envelopes „ Label/Letterhead/Postcard/Thick Stock: 50 sheets Tray 2 (Optional) Plain paper: 500 sheets Output capacity Output tray: 100 sheets (A4, Letter) Operating temperature 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) Operating humidity 15 to 85% Power supply 120 V, 60 Hz 220 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz Power consumption 120 V: 1000 W or less 220 to 240 V: 1060 W or less Energy Saver Mode: 18.5 W or less Amperage 120 V: 8.4 A or less 220 to 240 V: 4.4 A or less A-4 Technical Specifications Acoustic Noise Printing: 50 dB or less (monochrome) 49 dB or less (color) Standby: 29 dB or less External dimensions Height: 275 mm (10.8") Width: 396 mm (15.6") Depth: 380 mm (14.9") Weights 11.9 kg (without consumables) 15.1 kg (with consumables) Interface USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant, 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX Ethernet Standard memory 256 MBTechnical Specifications A-5 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart User-Replaceable Service-Replaceable " The values listed in the above table indicate the number of pages for simplex printing using A4/Letter-size media with 5% coverage. The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.), differences in the printing method, such as continuous printing or intermittent printing (when print jobs of one page are often printed), or the type of paper used, for example, thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and humidity of the operating environment. Item Average Life Expectancy (in Simplex Pages) Toner cartridge Starter Cartridge = 500 pages (Y, M, C) 1,000 pages (K) Replacement Cartridge = Standard-capacity: 1,500 pages (Y, M, C) High-capacity: 2,500 pages (Y, M, C, K) Imaging cartridge Monochrome: 45,000 pages (Continuous) 10,000 pages (1 page per job) Full color: 11,250 pages (Continuous) 7,500 pages (1 page per job) Fuser unit 50,000 pages Item Average Life Expectancy Transfer roller 50,000 pagesA-6 Our Concern for Environmental Protection Our Concern for Environmental Protection As an ENERGY STAR ® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR product? An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment.Index Index A-7 A Accessories Duplex option ..............................9-6 Tray 2 ..........................................9-3 C Configuration menu .....................4-5 Consumables Fuser Unit .................................6-19 Imaging Cartridge .....................6-16 Toner cartridge ...........................6-2 Control panel ................................4-2 D Duplexing ....................................5-21 Duplex option ..............................9-6 E Envelope ....................................... 5-5 Error messages .......................... 8-32 L Labels ........................................... 5-6 Letterhead .................................... 5-7 Loading media ........................... 5-10 M Maintenance ................................. 7-2 Media Clearing misfeeds ...................... 8-5 Loading .................................... 5-10 Path ............................................ 8-5 Preventing misfeeds ................... 8-4 Printable area ............................. 5-8 Media misfeed Duplex option ........................... 8-17A-8 Index Interior .........................................8-5 Tray 2 ........................................8-14 Media path .....................................8-5 Media storage .............................5-23 Media type Envelope .....................................5-5 Labels .........................................5-6 Letterhead ...................................5-7 Plain paper ..................................5-3 Postcard ......................................5-7 Thick stock ..................................5-4 Message window ..........................4-2 Messages ....................................8-31 Misfeed problems .......................8-19 Clearing ......................................8-5 Media path ..................................8-5 Preventing ...................................8-4 O Output tray ..................................5-22 P Page margins ................................5-9 Plain paper ....................................5-3 Postcard ........................................5-7 Preventing media misfeeds .........8-4 Print quality .................................8-25 Printable Area ...............................5-8 Printer Parts ...........................................1-4 Printer driver .................................2-6 Advanced tab ..............................2-7 Basic tab .....................................2-8 Cover page tab ...........................2-8 Displaying ...................................2-5 Layout tab ...................................2-8 Other Tab ....................................2-9 Quality Tab .................................2-9 Uninstalling .................................2-4 Watermark/Overlay Tab ..............2-8 S Service messages ......................8-36 Status Monitor ..............................3-2 Closing ....................................... 3-3 Opening ...................................... 3-2 Using .......................................... 3-2 T Thick stock ................................... 5-4 Tray 2 ............................................ 9-3 Troubleshooting .......................... 8-1 User’s Guide [Copy Operations]bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-4 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-4 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 2 Part names and their functions 2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS................................................................................................ 2-2 2.1.2 bizhub C452....................................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.2 Main Body........................................................................................................................................ 2-7 2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) ........................................................................................................ 2-7 2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) ......................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.3 Main bodyInside............................................................................................................................... 2-11 bizhub C652/C552/C452 ................................................................................................................. 2-11 bizhub C652DS/C552DS ................................................................................................................. 2-13 2.2.4 Control panel.................................................................................................................................... 2-14 Adjusting the angle of the control panel .......................................................................................... 2-15 2.2.5 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 2-18 2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516............................................................ 2-18 2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 ...................................................................................................................... 2-20 2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 ..................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 ......................................................................................................................... 2-22 2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603................... 2-23 2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504...................................................................................................................... 2-25 2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 ................................................................................................ 2-26 3 Using this machine 3.1 Turning on or off the machine ....................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Basic copy operations.................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Placing originals................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-4 Placing the original on the original glass ........................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.2 Basic copy operations ....................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions ......................................................................................... 3-6 Functions that cannot be combined .................................................................................................. 3-8 4 Control Panel Keys Control panel and functions............................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key..................................................... 4-4 The [Start] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4 The [Stop] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-2 The [Interrupt] key .............................................................................................................................. 4-4 The [Reset] key .................................................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key ........................................... 4-5 The [Copy] key ................................................................................................................................... 4-5 The [Fax/Scan] key ............................................................................................................................ 4-5 The [User Box] key............................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key ................................................................................................................ 4-6 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key................................................................................................................. 4-7 4.5 The [Access] key............................................................................................................................. 4-8 Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track)................. 4-8 Using the machine during non-scheduled hours............................................................................. 4-10 4.6 The [Power Save] key ................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.7 The [Accessibility] key.................................................................................................................. 4-12 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key............................................................................................................. 4-14 4.9 The [Guidance] key ....................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key ........................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key .................................................................................................................... 4-18 Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) ................................................................... 4-18 Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) ............................................ 4-19 5 Copy Function 5.1 Basic................................................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Color .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.1.2 Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 Configuring a custom size ................................................................................................................. 5-6 Configuring wide paper...................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.1.3 Zoom.................................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.1.4 Duplex/Combine ................................................................................................................................ 5-8 5.1.5 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.1.6 Post Inserter..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 Keys on control panel ...................................................................................................................... 5-12 Finishing using Post Inserter............................................................................................................ 5-13 5.1.7 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 5-13 5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF .............................................................................................................................. 5-14 5.2 Original Setting.............................................................................................................................. 5-15 Copying mixed originals .................................................................................................................. 5-16 Copying Z-folded originals............................................................................................................... 5-17 5.3 Quality/Density .............................................................................................................................. 5-18 5.4 Application..................................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert............................................................................................................. 5-21 OHP Interleave................................................................................................................................. 5-21 Cover Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 5-22 Insert Sheet...................................................................................................................................... 5-23 Insert Image ..................................................................................................................................... 5-24 Chapters .......................................................................................................................................... 5-26 Program Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 5-27 5.4.2 Edit Color ......................................................................................................................................... 5-29 Neg./Pos. Reverse ........................................................................................................................... 5-29 Mirror Image..................................................................................................................................... 5-30 Background Color............................................................................................................................ 5-31 Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 5-31 5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat .......................................................................................................................... 5-33 Book Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 5-33 Image Repeat................................................................................................................................... 5-34 Poster Mode .................................................................................................................................... 5-35 Booklet Original................................................................................................................................ 5-36 5.4.4 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 5-37 5.4.5 Image Adjust .................................................................................................................................... 5-39bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-3 5.4.6 Booklet............................................................................................................................................. 5-40 5.4.7 Erase ................................................................................................................................................ 5-41 Frame Erase..................................................................................................................................... 5-41 Non-Image Area Erase..................................................................................................................... 5-42 5.4.8 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 5-43 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 5-44 Page Number................................................................................................................................... 5-45 Stamp............................................................................................................................................... 5-47 Copy Protect.................................................................................................................................... 5-48 Copy Guard...................................................................................................................................... 5-49 Password Copy................................................................................................................................ 5-50 Stamp Repeat .................................................................................................................................. 5-51 Header/Footer.................................................................................................................................. 5-53 Watermark........................................................................................................................................ 5-54 Overlay............................................................................................................................................. 5-55 Registered Overlay........................................................................................................................... 5-56 5.4.9 Card Copy........................................................................................................................................ 5-59 5.4.10 Save in User Box ............................................................................................................................. 5-60 5.5 Left panel display .......................................................................................................................... 5-61 5.5.1 Job List ............................................................................................................................................ 5-62 5.5.2 Check Job........................................................................................................................................ 5-64 6 User Settings 6.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Custom Display Settings ................................................................................................................ 6-6 6.3 Copier Settings................................................................................................................................ 6-8 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings......................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.5 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.6 Change Password......................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................ 6-14 6.8 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 6-15 6.9 Register Authentication Information........................................................................................... 6-16 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................................................................................... 6-18 7 Administrator Settings 7.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Power Save Settings.......................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Output Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.1.3 Date/Time Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time ......................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.1.6 Restrict User Access.......................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.1.7 Expert Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 7-9 Leading Edge Adjustment................................................................................................................ 7-13 Centering.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 Media Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 7-14 Center Staple Position ..................................................................................................................... 7-14 Half-Fold Position ............................................................................................................................ 7-15 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 7-15 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment................................................................................................. 7-16 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ............................................................................................ 7-16 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 7-17 Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment...................................................................................................... 7-17 Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-17 Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment............................................................................... 7-18 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 7-18 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 7-19 Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor........................................................................................................ 7-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-4 Color Registration Adjust................................................................................................................. 7-20 Gradation Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.1.8 List/Counter ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22 7.1.9 Reset Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-23 7.1.10 User Box Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-24 7.1.11 Standard Size Setting ...................................................................................................................... 7-24 7.1.12 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings ................................................................................................................ 7-26 7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings............................................................................................................ 7-26 7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ................................................................................................. 7-27 7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting............................................................................................................... 7-27 7.1.17 Page Number Print Position............................................................................................................. 7-28 7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings.................................................................................................. 7-29 7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration.............................................................................................. 7-30 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................ 7-31 7.4.1 General Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-32 7.4.2 User Authentication Settings ........................................................................................................... 7-34 7.4.3 Account Track Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-37 7.4.4 Print without Authentication............................................................................................................. 7-38 7.4.5 Print Counter List ............................................................................................................................. 7-38 7.4.6 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations....................................................................................................... 7-39 7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting....................................................................................................... 7-41 7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ................................................................................................. 7-41 7.5 Network Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6 Copier Settings.............................................................................................................................. 7-43 7.7 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 7-45 7.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.9 System Connection....................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.10 Security Settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.1 Administrator Password................................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels .......................................................................................................... 7-50 7.10.4 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 7-51 7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode................................................................................................................. 7-54 Required settings............................................................................................................................. 7-54 Settings to forcibly changed ............................................................................................................ 7-54 7.10.6 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.10.7 Function Management Settings....................................................................................................... 7-56 7.10.8 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-57 7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting ................................................................................................ 7-57 7.11 License Settings............................................................................................................................ 7-58 7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........................................................................ 7-59 8 Maintenance 8.1 Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.1 Checking the paper............................................................................................................................ 8-2 Replenishment message.................................................................................................................... 8-2 Precautions regarding the use of paper ............................................................................................ 8-2 Paper storage..................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Loading paper.................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Loading paper into trays 1 and 2....................................................................................................... 8-3 Loading paper into trays 3 and 4....................................................................................................... 8-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-5 Loading paper into the bypass tray ................................................................................................... 8-5 Loading paper into the LCT ............................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2 Consumables................................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.2.1 Checking comsumables .................................................................................................................... 8-8 Replacement message ...................................................................................................................... 8-8 Checking consumables status......................................................................................................... 8-10 Viewing counters.............................................................................................................................. 8-10 Checking the total number of pages printed ................................................................................... 8-11 8.3 Cleaning procedure ...................................................................................................................... 8-12 Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452)................................................................................................ 8-12 Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)...................................................................................... 8-12 Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) ..................................................................................... 8-13 Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller........................................................................... 8-13 Housing, document pad .................................................................................................................. 8-14 9 Troubleshooting 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)...................................... 9-2 Problems that cannot be corrected by the user ................................................................................ 9-2 9.2 Troubleshooting table..................................................................................................................... 9-4 Simple troubleshooting...................................................................................................................... 9-4 Main messages and their remedies ................................................................................................... 9-8 Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen ................................................................................... 9-10 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated....................................................................................................... 9-12 Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire ........................................................................................... 9-12 Cleaning the print head.................................................................................................................... 9-13 10 Authentication unit (biometric type) 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................................ 10-2 10.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 10-5 Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 10-5 Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 10-6 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 10-7 Setup................................................................................................................................................ 10-7 User registration............................................................................................................................. 10-11 10.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 10-17 When 1-to-many authentication has been specified ..................................................................... 10-17 When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified............................................................................ 10-18 11 Authentication unit (IC card type) 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) ..................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 11-2 11.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 11-4 Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 11-4 Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 11-6 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 11-6 Setup................................................................................................................................................ 11-7 User registration............................................................................................................................. 11-11 11.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 11-15 When IC card authentication is enabled........................................................................................ 11-15 When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled ............................................ 11-16 12 Specifications 12.1 Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 12-2 Paper types and paper capacities ................................................................................................... 12-2 12.2 Machine specifications................................................................................................................. 12-4 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452.................................................................................... 12-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-6 Automatic duplex unit...................................................................................................................... 12-7 Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452).................................................... 12-7 Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS).................................................... 12-7 12.3 Options........................................................................................................................................... 12-8 Large capacity unit LU-301.............................................................................................................. 12-8 Large capacity unit LU-204.............................................................................................................. 12-8 Finisher FS-526................................................................................................................................ 12-9 Saddle stitcher SD-508.................................................................................................................. 12-10 Punch kit PK-516........................................................................................................................... 12-11 Job Separator JS-602.................................................................................................................... 12-12 Z-Folding Unit ZU-606................................................................................................................... 12-12 Post Inserter PI-505 ....................................................................................................................... 12-13 Finisher FS-527.............................................................................................................................. 12-13 Saddle stitcher SD-509.................................................................................................................. 12-14 Punch Kit PK-517 .......................................................................................................................... 12-15 Job Separator JS-504.................................................................................................................... 12-15 Job Separator JS-603.................................................................................................................... 12-16 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101.................................................................................. 12-16 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102.................................................................................. 12-17 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 ..................................................................................... 12-17 13 Appendix 13.1 Colors............................................................................................................................................. 13-2 Hue, brightness, and saturation....................................................................................................... 13-2 Red, green, and blue........................................................................................................................ 13-4 13.2 Image quality ................................................................................................................................. 13-5 Contrast, copy density, and sharpness ........................................................................................... 13-5 Color balance (CMYK) ..................................................................................................................... 13-6 13.3 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 13-7 14 Index 14.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 14-2 14.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 14-61 Introductionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-2 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. User's guide CD manuals Overview Copy Operations This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting Enlarge Display Operations This manual describes details on operating procedures of enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function Print Operations This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Configuring the printer driver Box Operations This manual describes details on the boxed functions using the hard disk. • Saving data in User Boxes • Retrieving data from User Boxes • Printing and transferring data from User Boxes Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • Scan to E-Mail, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV and Web Service • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax Fax Driver Operations This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX Network Administrator This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connectionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for a wide range of users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. Advanced Function Operations This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image Panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address function Trademarks/Copyrights This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide CD manuals Overviewbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. dReference This symbol indicates a reference. A procedural operation is illustrated.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] This symbol represents a key name on the control panel, touch panel or the computer screen, power switch, etc. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y).2 Part names and their functionsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-2 2.1 Options 2 2 Part names and their functions 2.1 Options 2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS No. Name Description 1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS" throughout the manual. 2 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 3 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 4 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 5 6 2 3 1 4 10 8 9 7 15 16 18 19 20 17 12 11 13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-3 2.1 Options 2 6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages. 8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled color printer. 10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11- size (A4 -size) paper. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size (A3-size) paper. To change the paper size, contact your service representative. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual. 13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes. 15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. 16 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 Installed onto the finisher to allow Z folding or punching. 17 Saddle stitcher SD-508 Installed onto the finisher to allow Fold/Bind. Referred to as the saddle stitcher throughout the manual. 18 Finisher FS-526 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 19 Punch kit PK-516 Installed onto the finisher to punch holes. 20 Post Inserter PI-505 Installed onto the finisher to enable insertion of a cover sheet into copied sheets. This unit also allows you to manually operate the finisher (only the lower tray is available). 21 Job Separator JS-602 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body. 22 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected. 23 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned. 24 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit. 25 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit. 26 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit contains a speaker. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 27 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-4 2.1 Options 2 28 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine. 29 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy. This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying. 30 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to be used on the control panel. 31 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings when distributing a PDF document using the scan or User Box function. 32 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 33 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function. 34 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of this machine. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-5 2.1 Options 2 2.1.2 bizhub C452 No. Name Description 1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C452" throughout the manual. 2 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 3 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 4 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages. 8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled color printer. 10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11-size (A4 -size) paper. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 2 3 1 4 16 11 9 10 8 13 12 14 15 5 6 7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-6 2.1 Options 2 11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size (A3-size) paper. To change the paper size, contact your service representative. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual. 13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes. 15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. 16 Job Separator JS-504 Install this unit onto the Output Tray of the main unit to offset the printed papers. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Job Separator through the manual. No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body. 17 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected. 18 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned. 19 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit. 20 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit. 21 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit contains a speaker. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 22 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 23 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine. 24 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy. This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying. 25 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to be used on the control panel. 26 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings when distributing a PDF document using the scan or User Box function. 27 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 28 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function. 29 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of this machine. 30 Heater HT-508 Install this unit into the tray to dehumidify the paper. Dehumidifying prevents paper in the tray from absorbing moisture. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-7 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2 Main Body 2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) No. Name 1 Control panel 2 Left-side cover release lever 3 Left-side cover 4 Lateral guide 5 ADF 6 Original tray 7 Original output tray 8 Sub power switch 9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 10 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 (For compact keyboard) 11 Automatic duplex unit release lever 12 Automatic duplex unit 5 9 10 16 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1 4 6 7 8 11 14 13 12 15 17 18 19 22 20 21 30 2 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-8 2.2 Main Body 2 13 Upper right-side door 14 Upper right-side door release lever 15 Bypass tray door 16 Bypass Tray 17 Bypass tray door release lever 18 Lower right-side door 19 Lower right-side door release lever 20 Paper-empty indicator 21 Total counter 22 Main power switch 23 Tray 4 24 Tray 3 25 Tray 2 26 Tray 1 27 Lower front door 28 Upper front door 29 Output tray 30 Status indicator No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-9 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) The illustration above shows the main unit with an optional video interface kit, fax kit, and mount kit. No. Name 1 Finisher connector 2 Filter 3 Power cord 4 Power switch for dehumidifying heater 5 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) 6 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) 1 2 13 10 11 12 9 8 4 3 7 5 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-10 2.2 Main Body 2 7 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) 8 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) 9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 10 RS-232C port 11 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 12 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T) 13 Ozone filter No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-11 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.3 Main bodyInside bizhub C652/C552/C452 No. Name 1 Original glass 2 Fusing unit 3 Fusing unit cover lever 4 Print head glass cleaning tool 1 8 2 3 4 5 9 7 10 11 12 13 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-12 2.2 Main Body 2 5 Waste toner box 6 Imaging unit 7 Charger-cleaning tool 8 Imaging unit release lever 9 Toner cartridges 10 Slit glass 11 Original scales 12 Jam removal dial 13 Slit glass cleaner No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-13 2.2 Main Body 2 bizhub C652DS/C552DS No. Name 1 Original glass 2 Fusing unit 3 Fusing unit cover lever 4 Print head glass cleaning tool 1 8 2 3 4 5 9 7 10 11 12 13 14 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-14 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.4 Control panel 5 Waste toner box 6 Imaging unit 7 Charger-cleaning tool 8 Imaging unit release lever 9 Toner cartridges 10 Slit glass (front) 11 Original scales 12 Opening and closing guide 13 Slit glass cleaner 14 Slit glass (back) No. Name No. Name 1 Stylus pen 2 Touch panel 3 Main power indicator 4 Sub power switch 5 Function key 6 Data indicator 1 2 3 5 4 8 7 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-15 2.2 Main Body 2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel You can adjust the angle of the control panel of this machine among three levels. You can also tilt the control panel to the left. Use the control panel at an angle convenient to use. NOTICE When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel. 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then pull the control panel up or down. You can tilt the angle of the control panel to one of the three positions. 2 To tilt the control panel to the left or right, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left or right. 7 Keypad 8 Brightness adjustment dial No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-16 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.5 Touch panel When the machine has been turned on and is ready to begin the copy operation, the basic settings screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly press the desired button appearing in the screen. The basic settings screen can be switched between the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab. The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab; however, the functions that can be set are the same. This manual describes procedures for configuring settings from the Basic tab. The Quick Copy tab displays the setting items of the Basic tab on one screen, which is useful for configuring multiple settings. NOTICE Do not apply excessive pressure on the touch panel. Such impact may leave a flaw on the panel, inviting damage to the touch panel. When operating in the touch panel, never press down on the touch panel with force or with a pointed object such as a mechanical pencil. Basic tab Quick Copy tab No. Name 1 Message display area 2 Functions/settings display area 3 Icon/shortcut key display area 4 Toner supply indicators 5 Left panel 6 Check Job 7 Job List 8 Copier setting button (arrow) 3 2 5 7 6 4 1 3 2 5 7 8 4 1 9bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-17 2.2 Main Body 2 dReference To switch the basic settings screen: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Tab]. To configure color selection settings for buttons and tabs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Color Selection Settings] . 9 Color settings No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-18 2.3 Option 2 2.3 Option 2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516 No. Name 1 Output tray 2 2 Output tray 1 3 Front door 1 26 20 19 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 22 23 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 25 24bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-19 2.3 Option 2 * Press the output tray switch to move folded and center stapled paper to the end of the folding output tray. 4 Horizontal transport unit cover 5 Jam removal dial [FN8] 6 Guide lever [FN7] 7 Guide lever [FN9] 8 Jam removal dial [FN6] 9 Jam removal dial [FN5] 10 Guide lever [FN3] 11 Guide lever [FN4] 12 Punch kit 13 Punch scrap box 14 Guide lever [FN10] 15 Recessed pull 16 Jam removal dial [FN11] 17 Saddle stitcher 18 Output belt 19 Output tray switch * 20 Folding output tray 21 Jam removal dial [FN2] 22 Guide lever [FN1] 23 Staple replacement door 24 Guide lever [FN13] 25 Guide lever [FN14] 26 Exit cover No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-20 2.3 Option 2 2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 No. Name 1 Finishing tray 2 Job separator cover 1 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-21 2.3 Option 2 2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 No. Name 1 Z folding/conveyance unit 2 Guide lever [FN1] 3 Punch scrap box 4 Front door 5 Guide lever [FN6] 6 Guide lever [FN7] 7 Guide lever [FN8] 8 Recessed pull [FN2] 9 Jam removal dial [FN5] 1 2 4 3 5 8 9 7 11 10 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-22 2.3 Option 2 2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 10 Guide lever [FN3] 11 Jam removal dial [FN4] No. Name No. Name 1 Post inserter control panel 2 Lower tray paper guide 3 Lower Tray 4 Upper Tray 5 Upper Tray paper guide 6 Upper unit release lever 6 1 3 4 5 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-23 2.3 Option 2 2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-24 2.3 Option 2 No, Name 1 Output tray 2 2 Output tray 1 3 Front door 4 Horizontal transport unit cover 5 Stapler 6 Guide lever [FN3] 7 Jam removal dial [FN2] 8 Guide lever [FN1] 9 Guide lever [FN4] 10 Staple holder 11 Punch scrap box 12 Saddle stitcher 20 17 18 19 15 16bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-25 2.3 Option 2 2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504 13 Jam removal dial [FN6] 14 Recessed pull [FN5] 15 Transport unit 16 Punch kit 17 Job separator 18 Staple cartridge 19 Recessed pull [FN7] 20 Folding output tray No, Name No. Name 1 Jam removal dial 2 Eject assist lever 3 Output tray 2 4 Tray extension 5 Output tray 1 1 2 3 4 5bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-26 2.3 Option 2 2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 No. Name 1 Jam removal cover 2 Upper door 3 Paper take-up roller 4 Paper-empty indicator 5 Release lever 1 3 2 5 4 1 3 2 5 43 Using this machinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-2 3.1 Turning on or off the machine 3 3 Using this machine 3.1 Turning on or off the machine This machine has two power controls: the [main power switch] and [sub power switch]. The [main power switch] turns on or off all functions of the machine. Normally, keep the [main power switch] on. The [sub power switch] turns on and off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. Turning [sub power switch] off causes the machine to enter power-saving mode. 0 When the [sub power switch] is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen appears to indicate that the machine is starting up. After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears in the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued. 0 A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [sub power switch] is turned on. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. 0 The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on and before any settings are configured from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings configured from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed. The jobs yet to be printed will be deleted. 0 Settings that have not been registered and jobs in the printing queue are cleared when the [main power switch] and [sub power switch] are turned off. 0 To turn the [main power switch] on immediately after turning it off, wait for 10 or more seconds before turning it on again. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] while images are being scanned, transmitted, or received. Data being scanned or communicated will be deleted. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] during the copying or printing process. If you turn it off, a paper jam may occur. 0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable of the compact keyboard while this machine is turned on. Do not also connect another medium to the USB port for the compact keyboard. 1 To turn the power on, open the main power switch cover, and then press n on the [main power switch]. 2 Close the main power switch cover. 3 Press the [sub power switch]. Check that the touch panel is turned on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-3 3.1 Turning on or off the machine 3 4 To turn the power off, press the [sub power switch], then the [main power switch]. dReference To change the default settings for Copy: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Copy Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-4 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 3.2 Basic copy operations The following procedures describe how to set the original and the basic copy operations. 3.2.1 Placing originals Place the original in the ADF or on the original glass. Select the optimal position for setting the original according to the type of the original to be copied. - Using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed and scanned automatically, one page at a time from the top. The ADF can also be used to automatically scan 2-sided originals. - When using the original glass, place the original directly on the original glass for scanning. This method is suited for originals in the form of a book and the like that cannot be fed through the ADF. Load the original, and configure settings for relevant functions as needed. Loading the original into the ADF The following types of originals should not be loaded into the ADF. If loaded, paper may be jammed or the original may be damaged. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn originals - Highly translucent or transparent originals , such as OHP transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper - Coated originals such as carbon-backed paper - Originals printed on paper thicker than 55-7/8 lb (210 g/m2 ) - Originals printed on paper thicker than 34-1/16 lb (128 g/m2 ) for 2-sided printing - Originals that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Originals that are bound in a book or booklet form - Originals with pages bound together with glue - Originals with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Originals with binder holes - Originals that have just been printed with this machine 1 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of the original. 2 Load the original face up in the original tray and arrange according to the scanning order. Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back side of the machine. % Do not load more than 100 sheets or up to the point where the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Such an action may cause an original paper jam or damage to the original. It may also invite machine failure. However, an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. % If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight, causing it to jam or become damaged. % If the document is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the document toward the back of the machine, be sure to select the document orientation. 3 Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-5 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 Placing the original on the original glass 0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 15°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 15°, the correct document size may not be detected. 0 Do not place an original weighing more than 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) on the original glass. Furthermore, do not use a strong force to press down on a book or any other form of original that must be spread on the original glass. Otherwise, the machine may be damaged or a failure may occur. 0 For thick books or large objects, perform scanning without closing the ADF. When a document is being scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the original glass surface where light may be emitted through. Note, however, that the light coming through the original glass is not a laser beam, and will not expose the user to the related hazards. 0 When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, you do not have to close the ADF to copy the original. Place the original anywhere on the original glass. The area surrounding the original text will be excluded from the copy. For details, refer to page 5-42. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Place the original face down on the original glass. % Load the original by placing it so that its top side faces the back side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. % For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the original. % For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a book or a magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. % When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, the original can be placed anywhere on the original glass. 4 Close the ADF. 3.2.2 Basic copy operations The following procedure describes the basic copy operations. 1 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and load them face up in the ADF. % The original should be placed face down on the original glass. 2 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire. % If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number. 3 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and copied. % To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. % A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that the next original can be scanned.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-6 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 % If an original with copy guard patterns embedded is scanned, the copy operation is stopped and the job is discarded. % If an original with a password embedded by the password copy function is scanned, the copy operation starts after you enter the password. % If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned at the same time, you will need to enter a password for each original. 3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions This section describes copy operations using combination of functions. 1 Load the original. 2 Press [Original Setting]. % For details on original setting, refer to page 5-15. 3 Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. % For details on the Duplex/Combine settings, refer to page 5-8.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-7 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 4 Press [Basic] and then configure settings for respective functions. % For details on color setting, refer to page 5-4. % For details on paper size setting, refer to page 5-5. % For details on magnification setting, refer to page 5-7. % For details on image quality of originals, refer to page 5-18. % For details on copy density setting, refer to page 5-18. % For details on the setting not to rotate images, refer to page 5-14. 5 Press [Application] and then configure settings for respective functions. % For setting for the application functions, refer to page 5-20. 6 Press [Basic] ö [Finishing]. % For details on copy finishing and folding/binding, refer to page 5-10.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-8 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 7 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details]. % For details on checking job settings, refer to page 5-64. 8 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire. % If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number. 9 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and copied. % To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. % A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that the next original can be scanned. Functions that cannot be combined Some settings cannot be combined with each other. If they are combined improperly, the settings will be given priorities in either of the two ways described below. - The setting configured last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting configured first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)4 Control Panel Keysbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-2 4 4 Control Panel Keys This section describes the functions of the keys on the operation panel. Control panel and functions Press the keys on the operation panel to use the Copy, Fax/Scan, User Box or other functions. No. Name Description Page 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. You can configure various settings by directly touching the touch panel. - 2 Power indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the [main power switch]. - 3 [Sub power switch] Turns on or off machine operations. When turned off, the machine is in the power-saving mode. - 4 [Power Save] Enters Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. p. 4-11 5 [Mode Memory] Allows you to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. p. 4-7 6 [Utility/Counter] Switches to the Utility screen or the Meter Count screen. p. 4-6 7 [Reset] Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel. p. 4-4 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-3 4 8 [Interrupt] Switches to Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode" appears in the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. p. 4-4 9 [Stop] Temporarily stops the operation while copying, scanning or printing. p. 4-4 10 [Proof Copy] Allows you to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel. p. 4-18 11 [Start] Starts the copy, scan or fax operation. p. 4-4 12 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. Lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data. - 13 [C] (Clear) Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad. p. 4-17 14 Keypad Allows you to enter the number of copies to be produced, the zoom ratio, and various other setting values. - 15 [Guidance] Switches to the Guidance screen. You can display descriptions of the functions and operating procedures. p. 4-15 16 [Enlarge Display] Enters Enlarge Display mode. If you are using PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen will not be available. p. 4-14 17 [Accessibility] Switches to the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. p. 4-12 18 [Access] If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the [Access] key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. p. 4-8 19 [Brightness] dial Allows you to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. - 20 [User Box] Enters User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". p. 4-5 21 [Fax/Scan] Enters Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". p. 4-5 22 [Copy] Enters Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode. ) While the machine is copying, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. p. 4-5 No. Name Description Pagebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-4 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key 4 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key The [Start] key % Start the copy, scan or fax operation. Press this key again to restart a suspended job. % When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the copy operation cannot begin. (Check that no warning or message is displayed in the touch panel.) The [Stop] key % Press the [Stop] key while copying to temporarily stop the scanning or printing operation. % To resume a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key. % To delete a temporarily stopped job, select a job in the suspended job list in the screen, and press the [Delete] key. The [Interrupt] key Press this key to start a new copy job with different copy settings by suspending the current job in process. This is convenient when you need to make copies urgently. 0 The [Interrupt] key cannot be operated while an original is being scanned. 0 Pressing the [Interrupt] key restores the default settings. 1 Load the original. 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and printing of the current job is suspended. 3 Configure the copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. 5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The Interrupt indicator goes off and the interrupting copy settings are canceled. The copy settings return to those specified before the interrupting copying job. The [Reset] key Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel. % Press the [Reset] key. The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-5 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key 4 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key This machine operates in Copy, Fax/Scan and User Box modes, from which the user can select a desired function. The indicator on the selected key lights up in green. The [Copy] key % Enters Copy mode. The basic settings screen appears. The [Fax/Scan] key % Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". The [User Box] key % Enters User Box mode. For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-6 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key 4 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key Press the [Utility/Counter] key to display the Utility screen. You can configure the machine settings and check its use status in the Utility menu screen. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key. Settings One-Touch/User Box Registration Allows you to register items related to the fax/scanner and User Boxes operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]". User Settings Provides setting items that can be operated by the user. Administrator Settings Provides setting items that can only be operated by the administrator of the machine. Check Consumable Life Allows you to check the status (usage level) of consumables. Banner Printing Allows you to select whether to enable or disable printing on long sheets of paper. This menu item appears when the optional finisher is not installed. For details on long paper print, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Device Information Displays information about this machine. Function Version: Allows you to check the function version of the currently installed firmware. Check the function version of this machine and of the printer driver. Ensure that they match before using this machine. IPv4 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv4 address. IPv6 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv6 address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-7 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key 4 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key Combine frequently used copy settings into programs and register them with this machine. These programs can easily be recalled as programs. 0 Up to 30 programs can be registered. 0 To register a program, configure the copy settings to be registered before pressing the [Mode Memory] key. % Press the [Mode Memory] key. dReference To prohibit modification and deletion of copy programs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Copy Program Lock Settings]. To delete a copy program: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Delete Saved Copy Program]. Settings Recall Copy Program Select the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. Register Program • From the copy program buttons displayed in the screen, press the button you want to register copy settings with, and then press [Register Program]. • Enter the registration name, and then press [OK]. Check Program settings Press this button to check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program button. Edit Name Press this button to rename the registration name of the selected copy program button. After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Edit Name] will not be displayed. Delete Press this button to delete the selected program button. After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Delete] will not be displayed.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-8 4.5 The [Access] key 4 4.5 The [Access] key If the administrator has configured user authentication settings/account track settings, only the users who have been registered or the users whose accounts have been registered can use this machine. If the administrator has configured a usage schedule, a user can use the machine by entering a password for non-business hours. Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track) 0 With the user authentication/account track functions enabled, only the users who enter passwords for users or for accounts can use this machine. 0 Thus, the number of copies among others can be managed by user/account. 0 Contact the administrator for information on the user name, account name, password and server name. 0 The login page that appears may vary depending on the user authentication/account track settings. 0 The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the User Authentication/Account Track is set to [Do Not Synchronize], complete user authentication, and then log in by using the Account Track screen. 0 If MFP authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 0 After copying is completed, press the [Access] key to log out from the machine. 0 To get permission to use the machine, you can use an authentication unit (biometrics type/IC card type) for authentication. 0 The account, which sets the use of this machine to suspend in Account Track Settings, cannot log in to this machine. The users, who belong to the suspended account, cannot also log in to this machine. 0 If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, check with your server administrator for information on the login procedure. % Press the [Access] key. Screen for user authentication Screen for account trackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-9 4.5 The [Access] key 4 dReference To configure user authentication/account track: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track]. Settings User Authentication Performs the user authentication procedure to use this machine. Public User Access Allows users who have no access to the user name or password to use this machine. This item is not displayed when [Public User Access] is set to [Restrict] in the General Settings of Administrator Settings. If enhanced security mode has been enabled, [Public User Access] is not displayed. User Name Enter the user name. User Name List Select a user name from a displayed list. • If enhanced security mode has been enabled, [User Name List] is not displayed. • The user, who has set the use of this machine to suspend in User Authentication Settings, is not displayed in the [User Name List]. Password Enter the password. Server Name Indicates the name of the default server. Press [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers. Select the desired server. Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you to use this machine. Account Track Performs the account track procedure to use this machine. Account Name Enter the account name. Password Enter the password. When the account track input method is set to [Password Only] in Administrator Settings, the login screen displays only [Password]. The user can directly enter the password in the login screen from the keypad. For an all-number password, the user can log in without displaying the keyboard screen, simply by pressing [Login], or the [Access] key. • For a password containing alphabets, numbers and/or symbol characters, press [Password] and then enter the password. • After entering numbers from the keypad, press [Password] to enter alphabets and symbols in succession. Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you to use this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-10 4.5 The [Access] key 4 Using the machine during non-scheduled hours The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator so the use of the machine can be limited. This is referred to as Weekly Timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used. 0 From the [Password for Non-Business Hours] screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 Enter the password for non-business hours. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Using the keypad, enter the length of time to elapse before the machine enters Sleep mode again. 5 Press [OK]. The basic settings screen appears. dReference To configure Weekly Timer: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-11 4.6 The [Power Save] key 4 4.6 The [Power Save] key If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is referred to as Low Power or Sleep mode. The following describes the procedure for returning from Low Power or Sleep mode. 0 Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the warm-up process for returning to ready-for-copy state from Sleep mode is more time-consuming. 0 As the factory default, Low Power mode is set to restart after 15 minutes and Sleep mode after 30 minutes. In other words, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes. Likewise, it enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes has elapsed. 0 The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. % Press the [Power Save] key. The machine returns from Low Power mode when any other key on the control panel or the touch panel surface is pressed. dReference To enable Low Power mode: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-12 4.7 The [Accessibility] key 4 4.7 The [Accessibility] key This section describes the procedures for configuring settings for the control panel and adjusting the touch panel. 0 To return to the basic settings screen from the Accessibility Setting screen, press the [Accessibility] key, the [Reset] key or [Close]. 0 In the Enlarge Display screen, [Default Enlarge Display Settings] appears, enabling you to configure default settings for use in the Enlarge Display mode using the copy or fax/scan functions. % Press the [Accessibility] key. Page 1/2 Page 2/2 Settings Touch Panel Adjustment Adjust the position of touch panel buttons when they do not respond correctly because they may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor. • The touch sensors are not aligned in the touch panel if pressing [Touch Panel Adjustment] does not activate any action. Press the [1] key on the keypad. • Press the four check point buttons ([+]) on the touch panel adjustment screen while listening on a buzzer sound each time. When the checking by pressing the check point buttons is completed successfully, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. Press the [Start] key. • The check point buttons ([+]) can be pressed in any order. • To perform adjustment again, press the [C] (Clear) key, and then press the four check point buttons ([+]) again. • To cancel the touch panel adjustment process, press the [Stop] or [Reset] key. • If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact your service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-13 4.7 The [Accessibility] key 4 Key Repeat Start/Interval Time Specify the length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down, and also specify the length of time for the value to change to the next number. The settings specified for Key Repeat Start/Interval Time are only applied in Enlarge Display mode. System Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge Display mode and return to the basic settings screen. Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen. Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings. Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen. Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. Message Display Time Specify the duration of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. Sound Setting Configure the settings for sounding associated with key operations. The following sound setting functions are available. To produce a sound, press [Yes], and then select the volume from [Low], [Medium] and [High]. To not produce a sound, press [No]. [Operation Confirmation Sound] • [Input Confirmation Sound]: A sound produced when a key in the control panel or a button in the touch panel is pressed for an entry • [Invalid Input Sound]: A sound produced for invalid button operation in the control panel or the touch panel • [Basic Sound]: A sound produced when the default value item is selected for an option subject to rotational switching [Successful Completion Sound] • [Completed Operation Sound]: A sound produced when the operation has completed normally • [Completed Transmission Sound]: A sound produced when a communications-related operation is completed normally [Completed Preparation Sound]: A sound produced when a device is ready [Caution Sound] • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 1)]: A sound produced when the replacement time is nearing for supplies or a replaceable part and a message appears in the touch panel • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 2)]: A sound produced for a user error • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 3)]: A sound produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appears or the User's Guide • [Severe Caution Sound]: A sound produced when an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires action by a service representative Default Enlarge Display Settings For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-14 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key 4 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode and enable machine operation using a screen with a layout with larger-size characters. For details on the Enlarge Display screen, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". 0 Press the [Enlarge Display] key to return to normal display. 0 If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, the login screen cannot be switched to the enlarged display mode. % Press the [Enlarge Display] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-15 4.9 The [Guidance] key 4 4.9 The [Guidance] key Press this key to view and check descriptions of various functions and operating procedures. When the [Guidance] key is pressed, the Guidance screen for the displayed screen appears. 0 From the Help main menu screen, you can find the target Guidance screen based on the function or purpose. 0 Refer to the left panel of the Guidance screen to check the position of the displayed Guidance screen in the menu structure. 0 Press [Close] in the Guidance screen to move up one level in the menu structure. Press [Exit] to exit Guidance mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Guidance] key was pressed. Press [To Menu] to display the Help main menu. 0 In the Main Menu and Guidance Menu screens, select items by pressing the button or by pressing the key in the keypad. 0 The Guidance screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed: Scanning, printing a proof copy, preview of a finished copy, operating in Enlarge Display mode, or operating in Accessibility mode 0 While the Guidance screen is displayed, the following keys on the operation panel are disabled: [Start], [C], [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], and [Enlarge Display] % Press the [Guidance] key. Settings Function Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by function type and name. Search by Operation Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by operation type. • With [Go to function] displayed, the function for the selected operation can be set. However, when the fax/scan function is used, for example, [Go to function] displayed on a Guidance screen for the copy function, for example, cannot be selected as it is a different function from the one in use. • Select [Copy] and press [Scan special original]; instructions and animation guidance are displayed to enable the user to view the procedure for placing an original. However, Start Guidance is not displayed in the animation guidance for placing an original. Function Map Check descriptions from a navigation destination of the current screen or the menu structure it belongs to. Other Functions Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function. Name and Function of Parts Check the description of the main unit and its options. Service/Admin. Information Check the name, extension number and E-mail address of the administrator.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-16 4.9 The [Guidance] key 4 Consumables Replace/ Processing Procedure Check procedures for replacing the toner cartridge, imaging unit or waste toner box, adding staples or discarding punch-hole scraps by viewing animations. Press the target button, and then press [Start Guidance]. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-17 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key 4 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad. % Press the [C] key. The value is deleted. Enter the correct value.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-18 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) Print a single proof copy for checking before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 0 When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 1 Load the original. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 4 Press [Print] and then select the original direction. 5 Press the [Start] key. This prints one copy when the original has been loaded in the ADF. 6 When it has been loaded on the original glass, press the [Finish], then the [Start] key. A single proof copy is printed. 7 Check the proof copy. % If the proof copy is found all right, go to Step 10. To change the copy settings, go to Step 8. 8 Press [Change Setting] in the proof copy screen. After changing the copy settings in the Change Settings screen, press [OK] % "Number of Sets" in the proof copy screen indicates "the number of sets printed in the proof copy mode/the number of sets specified to be printed", and "Total # of Pages Printed" indicates "the number of sheets printed in the proof copy mode/the total number of sheets to be printed". % To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then press [Delete]. % If no operation is performed for the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy job for which proof copy has been completed is registered as a stored job and the basic settings screen appears again. Stored job registration is performed when the System Auto Reset function is activated or one minute after (if System Auto Reset is set to "OFF"). 9 Press the [Proof Copy] key to repeat proof copy. 10 Press [Print]. The number of copies yet to be printed is registered as a copy job.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-19 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) Check the finishing image of a copy in the touch panel before printing. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 0 When you scan the original using the Program Jobs function, scan all originals, press [Finish], and then preview the finishing state. 0 When you attempt to scan the original with an insert page specified, the machine scans the original first, and then the insert original. When this process is complete, you can preview the finishing state. 0 To use the Book Copy or Booklet function, no preview is available. Check the finishing state after printing. 0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527. 0 Fold and Center Staple & Fold is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher. 0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526. 1 Load the original. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 4 Press [Preview on Screen] for the proof copy method and then select the original direction. 5 Press the [Start] key. The Preview (View Status) screen appears. 6 Check the preview image. % To change the settings, press [View Pages]. Go to Step 7. % To start printing, press the [Start] key. % To scan another original, press [Finish], load the original, and then press the [Start] key. 7 Change the settings, and then press [View Status]. Settings Prev. Page/ Next Page Switch from the current screen to either the previous or the next screen. Zoom Enlarge the preview image and check the details. Press [+] and [-] to change the zoom ratio from full size to 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. To select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the right and at the bottom side of the image. The finishing state cannot be displayed if you change the display size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-20 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 8 Press the [Start] key. Select this menu to start printing. Rotate Image Rotate the preview image 180 degrees in order to correct the orientation of the original if necessary. Pressing rotates the currently displayed page. Pressing [Rotate Pages] displays the Scanned Page List. Select the page to be rotated. Up to six scanned pages can be displayed. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the selection. View Finishing View the finishing settings using icons or in text on the preview screen, and check the finishing state. Change Setting Change the settings for the next original to be scanned. View Pages/View Status Switch between the View Status and View Pages tab in the Preview screen. Perform image rotation and setting changes on [View Pages] and stop scanning on [View Status]. Settings5 Copy Functionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-2 5 5 Copy Function You can configure the settings for multiple copy features by pressing buttons on the operation or touch panel. This chapter describes the functions that can be configured by pressing the buttons in the touch panel. Item Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. p. 5-3 Original Setting Configure the type and size of the original. p. 5-15 Quality/Density Configure the quality or density for the original to optimize copy quality. p. 5-18 Application Configure the application settings for making copies. p. 5-20 Left panel Job List Check jobs currently being performed and jobs waiting to be performed. p. 5-62 Check Job Check the current settings and the result of the settings. p. 5-64bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-3 5.1 Basic 5 5.1 Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. Item Color Specify the print color for making copies. p. 5-4 Paper Select the paper type to be printed on and paper tray. p. 5-5 Zoom Select the zoom ratio of the image to be copied. p. 5-7 Duplex/Combine Configure the 2-sided copy and combined copy settings. p. 5-8 Finishing program button Configure frequently used offset and finishing settings in advance. You can activate preferred finishing functions by simply pressing this button. p. 6-8 Finishing Press this button to select the settings for offsetting and finishing copies. p. 5-10 Separate Scan Select this item to divide a large original and scan it in a number of batches. p. 5-13 Auto Rotate OFF Select this item to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image. p. 5-14 Language Selection Display the Language Selection screen to specify the language to be displayed on the touch panel. This item is not displayed when two shortcut keys are configured. - Shortcut Key Allows you to arrange shortcut keys for the frequently used Application functions on the Basic screen. -bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-4 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.1 Color Select the print color for making copies. For the print color, you can select one from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [2 Color], [Black] and [Single Color]. % Press [Basic] ö [Color]. Settings Auto Color Automatically detects whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white, and selects the appropriate color setting (full color or black). Full Color Makes copies in full color, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white. 2 Color Prints all areas of the scanned original determined to be in color with the specified color, and prints all areas determined to be black in black. Black Prints the copy in black and white, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white. Single Color Prints the copy in the specified single color, regardless of the color of the scanned original. When you specify a single color, the original is copied by converting the color differences (apparent color densities) and the gradation levels into density differences of the single color. Average Density Copies the original by only converting the gradation levels into density differences of the single color, regardless of the color differences in the original, bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-5 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.2 Paper Select the paper type and size to be printed, or to change the paper size and paper type settings specified for each paper tray. The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. 0 If you select [Transparency], specify [Black] for [Color] in advance. 0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time. 0 If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the Auto Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to Single Side Only is given priority to be selected with 1-sided printing.) When setting special paper in the paper tray, be sure to set the paper type. For details on special paper, refer to page 12-2. % Press [Basic] ö [Paper]. Settings Auto Automatically selects the paper size according to the original size. 1-4 Trays Allows you to specify the paper manually. # (Bypass Tray) L Large capacity unit (Optional) Change Tray Settings Specify the paper type and paper size for the selected paper tray. Paper Type Specify the paper type for the selected paper tray. Paper Size Specify the paper size for the selected paper tray. [Auto Detect]: Automatically detects the paper size. [12-1/4 e 18 w] (Only for Tray 1 and Tray 2): Enables 12-1/4 e 18 w to be selected. [Standard Size] (only for Bypass Tray): Specify a paper size to use the bypass tray as a paper tray dedicated to the paper size. [Custom Size] (only for Bypass Tray): Enter the paper size. [Wide Paper]: Select a paper size larger than the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-6 5.1 Basic 5 Configuring a custom size % [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Custom Size]. Configuring wide paper % [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Wide Paper]. Settings X/Y • North American model (inch): Configure the length [X] and width [Y] with pressing [+] or [-]. • European model (cm): Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper. Store Register custom paper sizes. memory 1 to 5 Select the memory button where the paper size is to be stored. Change Custom Size Name Rename memory button names. Settings Wide Paper Select the size of the paper to be loaded. Change Size X/Y Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper. Preset Paper Sizes Enables 12 e 18 w to be selected.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-7 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.3 Zoom The original image size in the original can be enlarged or reduced. 0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time. 0 If the auto zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original, load the original with the same orientation as the paper. % Press [Basic] ö [Zoom]. dReference To set image rotation: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Enlargement Rotation]. Settings Auto Automatically selects the most appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. Full Size Copies the original image in the size identical to the original (100%). Manual • Enter the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy. • Under "Set Individual Zoom", you can enter different zoom ratios for the X and Y directions. Set Zoom Enter the desired zoom and select the button to register the value with. "User Preset Zoom" indicates the registered zoom. Minimal Copies an original image slightly smaller than the original size or the specified size. The image in the original is centered on the paper without any cutoff. Select this setting when you want to copy the entire scope of the original within the paper used. -/+ Configure the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy without changing the aspect ratio. Fixed Zoom Select a preset zoom when copying from a fixed size original onto a fixed size paper. User Preset Zoom Select a registered copy zoom value. To change the registered zoom values, use [Set Zoom].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-8 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.4 Duplex/Combine Configure whether to scan one side or both sides of the originals and whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper. Multiple (2, 4 or 8) pages of original images can be reduced in size and printed on a single page. Using the Duplex/Combine function, you can save paper sheets for copying. % Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings 1-Sided > 1-Sided 2-Sided > 1-Sided 1-Sided > 2-Sided 2-Sided > 2-Sided Binding Position Configure the binding position of the original and copies to be output. Without setting the Binding Position, the resulting copy may not be what you intended. When [1- Sided > 1- Sided] is selected, the binding position cannot be set. Original Binding Position Select the original binding position from [LeftBind], [Right-Bind], [Top] and [Auto]. • If the binding position for the original is set to [Auto], the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. If the original length is more than 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. • If [Auto] is selected for the original binding position, the binding margin is set at the top or on the left.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-9 5.1 Basic 5 Binding Position Output Binding Position Select the output binding position from [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top] and [Auto]. • If the binding position for the copy is set to [Auto], the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. • If Output Binding Position is set to [Auto], the binding position is set at the top or on the left. Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass. Without setting original direction, the resulting copy may not be what you intended. No Disables combined copy. 2in1 Copies images on two original pages on one sheet of paper. Portrait original pages Landscape original pages 4in1/8in1 4in1 Copies images of four original pages on one sheet of paper. 8in1 Copies images of eight original pages on one sheet of paper. Horizontal Specify the combine order of the original (Numbering Direction setting). Vertical Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-10 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.5 Finishing Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray. 0 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. 0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527. 0 The Fold/Bind is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher. 0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526. 0 "Staple" cannot be used together with "Offset". 0 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold or Tri-Fold function cannot be used together with any of "Offset", "Staple" or "Punch". % Press [Basic] ö [Finishing]. Settings Sort Prints the copied sets separately when a multi-page original is copied. Group Makes multiple copies of each page when you make multiple copies of a multipage original. 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-11 5.1 Basic 5 Offset Yes/No Specify whether to separate each set of copies from another set in the output tray when copying multiple sets of multi-page originals. When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is not installed: If the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. • 8-1/2 e 11, A4 or B5 paper is used • Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray • Auto paper selection is specified for the paper size setting When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed: The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Fold/Bind When the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed on the Finisher FS-526: Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Z-Fold To configure the Z folding setting, install the Z Folding Unit ZU-606. When the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed on the Finisher FS-527: Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Staple Staples copies in corner or at two points before they are output. Punch Punches holes in copies before they are output. Settings 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-12 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.6 Post Inserter When the Post Inserter PI-505 is installed on the Finisher FS-526, you can manually operate the Finisher FS-526 using the post inserter control panel. Reference - Only the lower tray can be used as the output tray. The upper tray is not available. Keys on control panel Position Setting Configure desired staple or hole-punch positions. Select Auto, and the machine automatically judges the staple or punch positions for the paper relative to the original direction loaded. • A staple or hole-punch position is set along the long side of the paper if the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. • Staple or hole-punch positions are set along the short side of the paper if the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm). • Staple or punching positions are set on the upper or left-side end. • Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. • If desired, press [Original Direction], and then select the original direction. Settings No. Name 1 Corner staple lamp 2 Center staple & fold lamp 3 [Finishing] key 4 2-hole lamp 5 3-hole lamp 6 [Select punch] key 7 [Start/stop] key 8 4-hole lamp 9 Tri-fold lamp 10 2 position staple lamp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-13 5.1 Basic 5 Finishing using Post Inserter 1 Place paper in the lower tray of the Post Inserter, and align the lateral guide to the paper size. % Set the paper by placing it so that its top side faces the back of the machine. % To use the corner staple or 2-staple option, load the paper face up. % To perform Punch, load the paper face up. % To perform Bind, load the front side of the bound paper face down. % To perform Tri-Fold, load the outside of the tri-folded paper face down. 2 Press [Finishing] key and [Select punch] key, and select the desired finishing. % To configure Finishing settings, press [Finishing] key to turn the LED on. To configure punch settings, press [Select punch] key to turn the LED on. % Punch settings are available together with the corner staple or 2-staple option. 3 Press the [Start/stop] key. % If [Start/stop] key is pressed during operation, the operation will be stopped. 5.1.7 Separate Scan When the original contains pages exceeding the capacity of the ADF, you can divide the original into several batches to handle each lot as a single copy job. You can also use the copy function by switching between the ADF and the original glass for scanning the originals. 0 Do not load original sheets beyond the upper limit for the ADF. It would cause jamming and/or spoiling of the original or failure of the machine. 0 When making 2-sided or combined copies using the original glass, the machine can scan a number of original pages without enabling Separate Scan. 1 Load the original. 2 In the Basic tab, press [Separate Scan]. ABC Front Cover Front Cover ABC ABC ABCbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-14 5.1 Basic 5 3 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned. 4 Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key. % To change the scanning settings, press [Change Setting]. 5 Repeat Step 4 until all pages of the original are scanned. 6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish]. 7 Press the [Start] key. dReference To set the Separate Scan output method: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Separate Scan Output Method]. 5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF Select this setting to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image. 0 For some paper sizes or zoom values, part of the image may be cut off. % Press [Basic] ö [Auto Rotate OFF].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-15 5.2 Original Setting 5 5.2 Original Setting Configure the original status or original direction for outputting desired copies. % Press [Original Setting]. Settings Mixed Original Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time. Z-Folded Original Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Binding Position Specify the original binding position (page margin) to prevent the copy from being printed upside-down when scanning a 2-sided original, Auto Automatically configures the binding position of the original. • A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. • If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. Original Direction Specify the original direction to load into the ADF or place on the original glass when copying 2-sided originals or making 2-sided or combined copies. Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon a copy output when loading an original in the ADF.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-16 5.2 Original Setting 5 Copying mixed originals Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time. To copy onto paper of the same size as the original, select [Full Size] in the Zoom tab and select [Auto] on the Paper tab. To copy all original pages on paper of the same size, select [Auto] in the Zoom tab and select the desired paper size on the Paper tab. 0 When [1-Sided > 2-Sided] is selected together with Auto Paper, the back side becomes blank if its paper size is different from that of the front side. For example, if a single-sided original is copied in the order of 11 × 17 (A3) and 8-1/2 × 11 (A4), it results in copying of the front side (11 × 17 (A3)) / back side (blank) and of the front side (8-1/2 × 11 (A4)) / back side (blank). NOTICE Load all of the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest original page. 2 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and load them face up in the ADF. 3 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting]. 4 Press [Mixed Original]. % To cancel the setting, press [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used for the Mixed Original setting. Original Size Maximum Original Width 11 e 17 w (A3 w) 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) 8-1/2 e 14 w (B4 w) 8-1/2 e 11 w (A4 w) 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v (A5 v) 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w (A5 w) (B5 v) (B5 w) 11 e 17 w (A3 w) o o - - - - - - 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) o o - - - - - - 8-1/2 e 14 w (B4 w) o o o - - - o - 8-1/2 e 11 w (A4 w) o o o o o - o - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v (A5 v) - - o o o - o - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w (A5 w) - - - - - o - o (B5 v) o o o - - - o - (B5 w) - - o o o - o o o Possible to combine - Not possible to combinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-17 5.2 Original Setting 5 Copying Z-folded originals Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied. The length of the first page of the original is detected, and the subsequent pages are scanned as pages of the same size. NOTICE Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper jam may occur. 1 Load the original into the ADF. 2 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting]. 3 Press [Z-Folded Original]. % To cancel the setting, press [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-18 5.3 Quality/Density 5 5.3 Quality/Density Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality/density. % Press [Quality/Density]. Settings Original Type Select the original type (text and image type) to obtain better copy quality. Text Copies originals containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo [Photo Paper]: Select this setting to print photos from originals containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced. [Printed Photo]: Select this setting to copy printed originals containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Photo [Photo Paper]: Select this setting when the original photos are printed on photographic paper. Halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly an original state as possible. A smooth copy image is produced. [Printed Photo]: Select this setting to copy printed originals, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly an original state as possible. Map Select this setting to copy originals with a background color, originals containing pencil markings or fine colored lines such as maps. A sharp copy image is produced.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-19 5.3 Quality/Density 5 Original Type Dot Matrix Original Select this setting to copy originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read. Copied Paper Select this setting to copy images (originals) printed using this machine. Density Adjust copy density. Background Removal Adjust the density of the background area for originals with colored background (newsprints, recycle paper, etc.) or originals on thin paper showing text or images from the back. Select [Auto] for "Background Removal Level" to enable automatic background density adjustment for copying with the optimal background density. For "Background Removal", normally [Bleed Removal] is selected. However, when copying an original with colored background, select [Paper Discoloration Adj] to make adjustment for background removal for copying. Text Enhancement Adjust the text reproduction level for an original with a photo overlapping the text (background text) to clarify the text on the background. To emphasize the text on the background, press [Daker Text] to adjust the setting toward +. To emphasize the background image, press [Lighter Text] to adjust the setting toward -. [Text Enhancement] can be configured when an item other than [Photo] is selected. Glossy Makes copies with a glossy finish. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-20 5.4 Application 5 5.4 Application Configure the application settings for making copies. Item Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Inserts another sheet of paper or adds a cover page to the paper for copying. You can also scan multiple copies of the original with different settings. p. 5-21 Edit Color Inverts the contrast or gradation of the original or prints the original in the mirror image. It also adds a color in the background or adjust the quality of a color image. p. 5-29 Book Copy/Repeat Configure the settings for a book or catalog. An image on a single sheet of original can be repeatedly copied or divided and enlarged in parts to produce copies of the respective parts. p. 5-33 Page Margin Select the binding margin (blank area) of the paper used for copying. p. 5-37 Image Adjust Configure the layout for the image when the paper is larger than the original. p. 5-39 Booklet Automatically arranges the page order of the scanned original and makes 2-sided 2 in 1 copies to produce a page layout for a centerbound book, such as a magazine. p. 5-40 Erase Erases unnecessary outside portion of the original body text or erases the area outside the original placed on the original glass. p. 5-41 Stamp/Composition Prints the date/time, page number or a stamp printed on copies. This function also allows you to embed information for preventing unauthorized copying in a document. p. 5-43 Card Copy Copies the contents of the front and back sides of a card-size original, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card, on one sheet. p. 5-59 Save in User Box Saves the scanned original data in a User Box. p. 5-60bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-21 5.4 Application 5 5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert OHP Interleave Prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together because of the heat produced during copying by having paper (interleaves) inserted between the transparencies. 0 Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black. 0 Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies. 0 The number of copies is fixed to one. You cannot change. 0 The finishing function cannot be changed. 0 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. 0 Do not use a transparency that has been through the machine even once. It may lead to reduced print quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine. (Even if a transparency has been discharged without printing, it cannot be reused.) 1 Load the original. 2 Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black]. 3 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. Load the interleave paper into the desired paper tray. 4 Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and press [OK]. 5 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [OHP Interleave]. dReference Setting Black for Color Settings: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black]. Settings Interleave Paper Select the paper tray loaded with paper with a transparency interleaf. Transparency Indicates the paper size of the loaded transparency. EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGHbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-22 5.4 Application 5 Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the front and back covers. 0 Use paper of the same size for the body text and cover sheets, and ensure the same orientation of paper for both purposes. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Cover Sheet]. dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings None Disables copying of the front/back cover and blank sheet insertion. Front (Copy) For 1-sided copy: Copies the first page of the original onto paper for the front cover sheet. For 2-sided copy: Copies the second page of the original onto the back of the paper for the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Adds paper for the front cover sheet as the first page of the copy. Back (Copy) For 1-sided copy: Copies the last page of the original onto the back cover page. For 2-sided copy: Copies the last two pages of the original the 2-sided copy mode onto both sides of the paper for the back cover when copying an original with an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Add paper for the back cover sheet to the last page of the copy. Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front/back cover page or blank cover pages. You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Front(Blank)] or [Back(Blank)] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-23 5.4 Application 5 Insert Sheet A different sheet of paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted as specified pages in the copies. You can select from two options: [Copy] and [Blank] to enable or disable copying to the inserted sheet. 0 You can specify up to 30 positions for insert sheets. 0 Use paper of the same size for the sheets to be inserted and for the original copies, and ensure the same orientation of paper for both. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Sheet]. Settings P --- Specify where to insert sheets of a different paper type. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order. Insert Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted. You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Blank] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed. Copy Copies the original with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages. When setting the specified page to "2" For 1-sided copy: Inserts the specified paper as the second page of the copies, and copies the second page of the original onto it. For 2-sided copy: Leaves the back side of the first page of the copy blank, inserts the specified paper for the second page of the copy, and makes a 2-sided copy of the second and third pages of the original onto the inserted sheet. 6 6 4 4 5 2 2 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-24 5.4 Application 5 dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Insert Image A multi-page original scanned on the original glass can be inserted at the pre-set location in an original first scanned with the ADF. 0 With the Insert Image function, the inserted original is added after the specified page. 0 You can specify up to 30 positions for the original to be inserted. 0 If the document scanned on the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the remaining pages of the inserted original are printed at the end of the original. 0 The original on the original glass is scanned with the same settings as for the original scanned in the ADF. 0 If the original scanned on the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages will not be printed. 0 If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified location. 0 If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the copy. 1 Load the original into the ADF. Blank Select this option to insert the specified paper sheet after the page you have specified. When setting the specified page to "3" For 1-sided copy: Inserts the specified paper as the fourth page of the copy. For 2-sided copy: Leaves the back side of the second page of the copy blank, and inserts the specified paper for the third page of the copy. Settings 6 6 4 4 5 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 2 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT A B 4 3 B 2 1 A 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-25 5.4 Application 5 2 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Image]. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass. 5 Press the [Start] key. % To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 4 and 5 until all pages of the insertion original are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 6 Press [Finish]. 7 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins. Settings P --- Specify the position to insert the page scanned through the original glass. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-26 5.4 Application 5 Chapters When making 2-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. 0 You can set up to 30 positions for the first page of chapters. 0 Enable the Chapters function to set [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. For a 2-sided original, select [2-Sided >2- Sided]. 0 Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for text copies have the same size and orientation. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters]. dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings P --- Specify the first page of the chapters. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order. Chapter Paper Specify the paper tray for paper to be inserted for the first page of the chapter. Copy Insert Makes copies of the first pages of the chapters on paper of a different type from that for the text pages. None Copies all pages with the same type of paper. 3 7 7 8 6 2 6 4 4 5 3 3 3 7 7 8 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-27 5.4 Application 5 Program Jobs When the originals to be copied include different types of materials such as a 1-sided original for full size copying and a 2-sided original for enlarged copying among other things, you can use this setting for scanning various originals with different settings and then copy them all in a single copying job. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 0 Up to 100 types of originals can be scanned. 0 When configuring a program job, the [Group] setting cannot be selected in the Finishing screen. Instead, select [Sort]. 1 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Program Jobs]. 2 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. 3 Press [Fix]. % Press [Retry] to delete the scanned job. Press [Change Setting] to configure the copy settings. % When the original has been loaded on the original glass, press [Finish]. 4 Load the next original and press [Change Setting]. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-28 5.4 Application 5 5 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. % Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all originals have been scanned. 6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish]. 7 Press [Yes]. 8 Specify finish settings as needed. 9 Press [Start] or the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-29 5.4 Application 5 5.4.2 Edit Color Neg./Pos. Reverse Use this function to enable the original to be copied with the density and gradations of the image inversed. The images in the original are copied and output reversed like negative film of photographs. 0 If a single color is selected, the images are reversed relative to the selected color. 0 If a background color is selected, colors are reversed relative to the selected base color and the color of the images. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Neg./Pos. Reverse]. % To cancel the Neg./Pos. Reverse function, press [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again. dReference To set Single Color: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Single Color]. To Set Background Color: Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-30 5.4 Application 5 Mirror Image Copy originals as mirror images. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Mirror Image]. Settings Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-31 5.4 Application 5 Background Color Color the blank area of the original with a specified background color. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. Color Adjustment Adjust the image quality to fit an image based on the color-copied original. 1 Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Color Adjust]. Settings Select Color Select a background color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-32 5.4 Application 5 2 Configure respective functions. % Press [Sample Copy] to see how it will appear with the currently specified color quality adjustment settings. Settings Brightness Adjust the brightness of the copied image. Contrast Adjust the copy density balance. Saturation Adjust how vivid colors should be for full color copies. Red Adjust how vivid red colors should be for full color copies. Green Adjust how vivid green colors should be for full color copies. Blue Adjust how vivid blue colors should be for full color copies. Hue Adjust the hue for full color copies. The hue refers to a color trend relative to discrete colors such as red, blue and yellow. By adjusting the hue, the image can attain more reddish or bluish tone, for example. Copy Density Adjust copy density (lighter or darker). Sharpness Adjust the sharpness to emphasize the edges of text so that copied text can be read more easily. You can make an overly sharp original image softer or a blurry image clearer. Color Balance Adjust the individual concentrations of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) for full-color copies. Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in the copy.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-33 5.4 Application 5 5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat Book Copy Divides or does not divide page spreads (such as a book or catalog) into left and right pages to copy data. This function enables copying with the ADF open by placing the original on the Original Glass. If necessary, you can place an original image at the center of the paper to copy. 0 Place the original on the original glass. 0 If [Book Copy] is selected, [Image Adjust] is set to [Centering] and [Erase] is set to [Non-Image Area Erase] automatically. For details on [Centering], refer to page 5-39. For details on [Non-Image Area Erase], refer to page 5-41. The automatically set [Centering] or [Non-Image Area Erase] can be cancelled. 0 When [Book Spread] or [Separation] is selected, pressing the [Start] key starts printing. 0 When [Front and Back Cover] is selected, the scanning operation starts with the front cover followed by scanning of the back cover, and ends with scanning of all two-page spreads of the body text in the order of the page numbers. 0 When [Front Cover] is selected, all two-page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 0 When [Front and Back Cover] or [Front Cover] is selected, wait until all pages in the original are scanned and then press [Finish] and then the [Start] key to start printing. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Book Copy]. Settings Book Spread Copies both pages of a two-page spread original as a one page original. Separation Copies the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers. Front Cover Copies the front cover, the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers, and the back cover in this order. Front and Back Cover Copies the front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover in the original page order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-34 5.4 Application 5 Image Repeat An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. Specify the original and paper sizes or the zoom to automatically calculate the number of images to be copied accordingly. Alternatively, specify the desired number of repetitions. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Image Repeat]. Frame Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow around the book. Frame Configure the width of the area around the entire frame to be erased. Top, Right, Bottom, Left Configure the width of the top, right side, bottom and left side of the frame to be erased. None Select this settings to not erase the frame. Center Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow at the center of the book. Binding Position Select the binding position of the original. To indicate it, select [Separation], [Front Cover], and [Front and Back Cover]. Settings With Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the copy area of the sheet is filled with the copied image. If the entire image does not fit into the copy area, the extra range is not copied. Without Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the sheet is filled with the copied image. However, some parts of the image may be lost. Auto Detect Automatically detects the area to be scanned. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-35 5.4 Application 5 Poster Mode This function enables enlarged copy of the original image to a size exceeding the paper size that can be loaded in the machine, such as the 34 e 44 (A0) or 24 e 36 (B0) size. Specify the original size and the output size (enlarged copy size) to output enlarged copies of divided sections of the original onto separate sheets of paper respectively. Create an enlarged copy of the specified finished size by joining those copies of sections. To create an 34 e 44-size (A0-size) poster, create copies of sections on eight 11 e 17-size (A3-size) sheets and join them together. 0 Place the original on the original glass. 0 In Poster Mode, the number of copies is set to 1. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Poster Mode]. Set Range Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, or the reading range must be specified, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. 2/4/8 Repeat 2 Repeat 4 Repeat 8 Repeat Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original as many times as specified. Note, however, that an image that does not fit within the size of the paper used is copied with partial cutoff. [Repeat Interval Settings] can be configured only for [2 Repeat]. Repeat Interval Settings Specify the clearance between copied images. Settings Image Size Select the finished image size. Custom Size Enter the finished image size. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-36 5.4 Application 5 Booklet Original A catalog with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of the original catalog. 0 This function is available if a saddle stitcher is installed in the optional finisher. NOTICE Load a catalog with the staples removed. 1 Load the original. % To use the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page. Paper Size • North American model(inch): Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 inch. • European model(cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. Zoom Enter the zoom to output a copy of the finished size. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Settings 7 2 2 1 8 2 2 7 7 5 4 4 3 6 5 4 4 3 6 Staples + 2 7 8 1 4 5 6 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-37 5.4 Application 5 % To use the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top. 2 Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Booklet Original]. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish] and the [Start] key. 5.4.4 Page Margin Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When scanning a 2-sided original, you can specify the paper binding position (binding margin for the paper) to prevent the copy from being printed upside-down. Left Top Right 0 You can specify the binding position without creating a binding margin. 0 For 2-sided copy, you need to set the paper binding position and the original direction. Otherwise, the original image may be copied up-side-down. 0 If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 0 If part of the image is lost when copied with the specified binding margin settings, reduce the zoom and perform copying. % Press [Application] ö [Page Margin]. 3 3 4 6 6 5 1 1 2 8 8 7 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 AB DE GH 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF 2 1 ABC DEF 4 4 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHIbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-38 5.4 Application 5 dReference To set the zoom: Press [Basic] ö [Zoom]. Settings Margin Position Select an option from [Auto], [Left], [Top] and [Right]. When Auto is selected, the binding position is automatically set. • This function automatically determines the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. • The binding position is set on the upper or left-side end. • Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. If the document is loaded in any other orientation, this setting fails. Image Shift Adjust the image position according to the binding margin. Change Back Shift Adjust the image position on the back side of the paper in the 2-sided copy mode. Adjust Value • North American model (inch): Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 inch. • European model (cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-39 5.4 Application 5 5.4.5 Image Adjust If the paper is larger than the original, you can enlarge the original and copy it into the center of the paper. Full Size Center Zoom Centering % Press [Application] ö [Image Adjust]. Settings Full Size Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. Place the original on the original glass. Center Zoom Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. However, some parts of the image may be lost. Place the original on the original glass. Centering Copies the original image at the center of the paper without enlarging it. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-40 5.4 Application 5 5.4.6 Booklet The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce 2-sided 2 in 1 copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. 0 Center Staple & Fold or Half-Fold is available if the Saddle Stitcher is installed in the optional Finisher. 0 Generally, a multiple of 4 pages is required with a 1-sided original, and a multiple of 2 pages is required with a 2-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. 0 If a booklet is selected with the Auto Paper Select enabled, the zoom is automatically set at 64.7% (70.7%). % Press [Application] ö [Booklet]. Settings Left Bind/Right Bind Select the output binding position for copies to be output. Center Staple & Fold Staples copies at two places along the center, then folds the copies in half before feeding them out. Half-Fold Feeds out a copied sheet by folding it in two. No This setting feeds out a copied sheet without Center Staple & Fold or HalfFold. Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the front and back covers. 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 3 6 3 5 4 8 1 8 1 7 REPORT 2 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 6 6 6 4 5 1 8 1 8 2 REPORT 7 Right binding Left bindingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-41 5.4 Application 5 dReference To set to an appropriate zoom: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet]. 5.4.7 Erase Frame Erase Copies can be produced by erasing shadows of punched holes, unnecessary areas around the original text, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. All four sides around the original can be erased in the same width or in a different width for each side. % Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Frame Erase]. Settings Frame Erases the four sides of the original in the same width. Top Right Bottom Left Erases each frame side in a different width. +/- • North American model (inch): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 1/16 inch and 2 inch. • European model (cm): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 0.1 mm and 50.0 mm. The erasing width can also be entered using the keypad. None Sets the erasing width to 0 inch (0 mm). A A:1/16 inch to 2 inch (0.1 mm to 50.0 mm) Abizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-42 5.4 Application 5 Non-Image Area Erase This function enables copying with the ADF open while having an original that cannot be loaded in the ADF placed at a desired position on the original glass. The original is automatically detected and the area outside the original text is erased. Erase methods include "Bevel" and "Rectangular". "Bevel" is used when the background of the original is thin and "Rectangular" is used when it is dark. You can place the original on any position without opening or closing the ADF so that you can make copies promptly. In addition, toner consumption will be reduced as the area outside the original text is erased. 0 If erasing is not performed as desired, set "Erase Operation" under "Erase Adjustment" in Administrator Settings. 0 The size of the original automatically detected is 3/8 inch e 3/8 inch (10 mm e 10 mm) or larger. If the detection fails, a blank sheet of paper is output. 0 You cannot make copies with the ADF closed. 0 The original image may be defected at its top or end. % Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Non-Image Area Erase]. dReference To set Erase Operation: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Erase Adjustment]. Rectangular erasing Bevel erasingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-43 5.4 Application 5 5.4.8 Stamp/Composition Add date and time, page number, stamp, image, or header or footer to make copies. Item Date/Time Adds date and time to copies. Page Number Adds page numbers or chapter numbers to copies. Stamp Adds preset or registered stamps to copies. Copy Security Adds a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying in a document when copying. This function also allows you to copy a text with copy inhibit information or password embedded. Using this function, you can prevent original information from being leaked. Stamp Repeat Repeats copying of a stamp or the date and time onto the paper. Header/Footer Adds date and time to the top or bottom of the paper to print copies. Watermark Adds a watermark (watery text) to the center of the copied pages. Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images. Registered Overlay Saves an image of the scanned original as a registered overlay in the hard disk and later overlay the registered image on the copy of another original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-44 5.4 Application 5 Date/Time You can select the print position and notation format to print the date and time. Specify whether to print on all pages or only on the first page. 0 The date/time stamp cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. 0 The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Date/Time]. dReference To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Settings Date Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. Time Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. When [None] is selected, the time is not printed. Pages Select to print the date/time on all pages or only on the first page. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm). Text Details Set the text color, size and type.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-45 5.4 Application 5 Page Number You can select the print position and notation format to print page numbers and chapter numbers. Page and chapter numbers are printed on all pages. 0 Page numbers cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Page Number]. Settings Starting Page Number • Set [Page Number] between -99999 and 99999, and set [Chapter] between -100 and 100. • Press [*] to switch over the signs (+ and -) of the setting. • If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "-1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. • The entered chapter number is printed if [1-1, 1-2...] is selected under "Page Number Type". Starting Chapter Number Page Number Type Select the type (format) of the page.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-46 5.4 Application 5 dReference To configure the settings for the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions: Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. To configure the settings for the Chapters function: Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters]. To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Insert Sheet Setting Set this parameter when using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions together. Cover Sheet Print on Front and Back Cover: Prints on the front and back covers. Print on Back Cover Only: Prints a page number on the back cover but not on the front cover. Page number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy. Do not print Page Number: Disables printing on the front or back cover. Page number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy. Insert Sheet (Copy) Print page #: Prints on inserted pages. Do Not Print #: Counts but not prints on inserted pages. Skip the Page(s): Disables counting and printing on inserted pages. Insert (Blank) Do Not Print #: Counts but not prints on inserted pages. Skip the Page(s): Disables counting and printing on inserted pages. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm). Text Details Set the text color, size and type. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-47 5.4 Application 5 Stamp You can select the print position and notation format to print the stamp. Select printing on all pages or only on the first page. 0 A stamp refers to text with printing contents fixed and preset. You can also select a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility. 0 Stamps cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp]. dReference To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Settings Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Pages Select to print the stamp on all pages or only on the first page. Text Size Select the character size used for the stamp. Text Color Select the text color for the stamp. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-48 5.4 Application 5 Copy Protect This function allows you to print a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date, in the background without particular distinction. If you copy a document with Copy Protect printed, a text is highlighted on the entire sheet of paper to be printed, enabling you to know that the copy is not authorized. 0 The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected copy protection text formats appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight text lines. 0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. 0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security]ö [Copy Protect]. Settings Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps. Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time Format, the time is not printed. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number. Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine. For details on setting for the serial number, contact your service representative. Distribution Control Number Prints the distribution control number. Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999. Detail Settings Configure the settings for Text/Background Color, Density, Copy Protect Text, Text Size, Pattern Overwrite and Background Pattern. ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCDbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-49 5.4 Application 5 dReference To delete a registered stamp: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Delete Registered Stamp]. Copy Guard This function prints a document, embedding a Copy Guard pattern in a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date. If an attempt is made to copy copy-guarded sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Copy Guard pattern, stops copying, and discards the currently running job. 0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps. 0 The Copy Guard text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected Copy Guards appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to six text lines. 0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together. 0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected. 0 A Copy Guard cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film. % [Application] ö [Stamp/Compositon] ö [Copy Security] ö [Copy Guard] Position Change the angle. The angle can be changed when there are no more than four lines in the selected copy protection text. Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target copy protection text and press [Up] or [Down]. To add a space to the copy protection text, press [Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that appears beside the specified copy protection text type, and then press [Insert]. To delete the copy protection text, press [Delete], and then press the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. Settings ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD NGbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-50 5.4 Application 5 dReference To specify and detect a Copy Guard: Select Utility/Counter ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Copy Guard]. Password Copy This function prints a document, embedding a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date, and a password for Password Copy. If an attempt is made to copy password-copied sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Password Copy pattern and prompts you to enter the password. When the correct password is entered, copying will start. 0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps. 0 A Password Copy is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected Password Copy texts appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to six text lines. 0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together. 0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected. 0 A Password Copy cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film. 0 If you fail to enter a password three times, the currently processed copy job will be erased. 0 If a password is detected on copies with Zoom, 2 Color, Grayscale, Color Adjust, Colored Paper, Envelope, or Transparency specified, the currently processed copy job will be erased. 0 If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned, you will need to enter a password for each original. Settings Copy Guard Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Copy Guard Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper. ABCD 1234 1234 1234 Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD NG Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD 12bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-51 5.4 Application 5 % Select [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security] ö [Password Copy]. dReference To specify and detect a Password Copy: Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Copy]. Stamp Repeat You can print a stamp, the date and time, or other specified items on all pages of the copy. 0 The printing contents of the Stamp Repeat function are printed on all pages. 0 The selected Stamp appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight text lines. 0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. 0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. Settings Password Enter the password to be embedded in paper. Stamp Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Password Copy Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-52 5.4 Application 5 % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp Repeat]. dReference To delete a registered stamp: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Delete Registered Stamp]. Settings Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps. Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time Format, the time is not printed. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number. Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine. For details on setting for the serial number, contact your service representative. Distribution Control Number Prints the distribution control number. Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999. Detail Settings Select the Text Color, Density, Text Size and Pattern Overwrite. Position Change the angle as required when there are no more than four lines in the selected repeating stamp. Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target Stamp Repeat and press [Up] or [Down]. To add a space to repeated stamps, press [Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that appears beside the specified Stamp Repeat, and then press [Insert]. To delete the Stamp Repeat text, press [Delete], and then press the button for the Stamp Repeat text to be deleted.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-53 5.4 Application 5 Header/Footer This setting enables printing the date/time and text at the top or the bottom of the paper. The date/time or a distribution number can be printed on each page. The header and footer can contain predetermined contents, but you can also temporarily change the contents. 0 In order to use the Header/Footer function, a header/footer must be registered in advance in Administrator Settings. If no header/footer is registered in Administrator Settings, the [Header/Footer] menu does not appear. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Header/Footer]. dReference To register a header/footer: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Header/Footer Settings]. Settings Recall Header/Footer Select a header/footer to be used. Check/Change Temporarily Check or temporarily change the contents of the registered header/footer. Header Settings Select to enable or disable printing of a header/footer. To print a header/footer, configure the following settings: Text: Enter the text for the header/footer. Date/Time: Select the type of date and time notation. Other: Select to print or not to print the distribution control number, job number, or serial number. Footer Settings Pages Select to print the header/footer on all pages or only on the first page. Text Details Select the Text Color, Text Size and Text Type. Reset Reset the settings to the initial contents.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-54 5.4 Application 5 Watermark You can print a watermark (light text) at the center of the paper. Select fixed preset text to be printed such as "Invalid Copy" and "Private". Copying with a watermark enables explicit indication of the use of the copied paper. It also helps prevent unauthorized copy from the copied paper. 0 The watermark is printed on all pages at an angle of 45 degrees. It is printed once per page. 0 In case other settings affect the watermark printing to cause partial loss, the Watermark function is canceled upon copying. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Watermark]. Settings Watermark Type Select a watermark from the eight types available. The watermark selected is printed over the original image. Text Color Select the watermark color from [Black], [Magenta] and [Cyan]. The watermark is printed in the selected color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-55 5.4 Application 5 Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images. For example, if you set Overlay to copy three original pages, two pages are output, including "a merged image of the first and second pages" and "a merged images of the first and the third pages". The Overlay function is useful for overlay of text, pictures or figures not prepared in other Stamp/Composition functions on the original. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Overlay]. Settings Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Selecting [1st Page Only] prints only on the second page of the original. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Density Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). Color Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-56 5.4 Application 5 Registered Overlay This function enables storing of an image from the scanned original as a registered overlay on the hard disk for later use in copying another original. It is useful to register frequently used overlay images. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Registered Overlay]. Composition Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and increases the brightness of the image. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. Background Composition (Original) Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. Back Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-57 5.4 Application 5 Settings Recall Overlay Image Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. • You cannot select an overlay image when no overlay has been registered. Thumbnail View Display Name In the screen view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image. Detail Settings Density: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). Color: Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta]. Composition: Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and increases the brightness of the image. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. Background Composition(Original) Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. Back Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Image Details Check the "Name", "Registered Date", "Image Size" and "Color" of the overlay image. To confirm the enlarged overlay image, press [Preview]. Register Overlay Image New Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered. Load the overlay image original on the original glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay image registered. Overwrite Select an overlay image to use for overwrite and press [Overwrite]. Load the overlay image original on the original glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay image overwritten. Delete Select an overlay image to be deleted and press [Delete]. Detail Settings Density: Specify the density of an overlay to be registered between 20% and 100%. Color: Select the color for the overlay image to be registered from [Auto Color], [Full Color] and [Black]. Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-58 5.4 Application 5 dReference To prohibit changing the overlay registration: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Change Registered Overly].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-59 5.4 Application 5 5.4.9 Card Copy Separately scans the contents of the front and back sides of a card, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card, and copies them together on one sheet. You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. Using the card copy function, you can save the number of sheets to be used. 0 A card must be placed in the erect mode on the original glass. 0 The card copy function and the auto paper function cannot be selected at the same time. 0 For some zoom values, part of the image may be cut off. % Select [Application] ö [Card Copy]. dReference To specify the default of Card Copy: Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Card Copy]. Settings Original Size Press [X] and [Y], and enter the size of the card to be copied. Also select the pre-specified size from [size1] to [size4]. Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides of a card. Zoom You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. A A B Bbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-60 5.4 Application 5 5.4.10 Save in User Box This function enables saving of data from the scanned originals on the hard disk (in the User Box) built in the machine. Documents saved in User Boxes can be printed when necessary. For details on using documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". % Press [Application] ö [Save in User Box]. Settings User Box Select the destination User Box. Document Name Specify a document name for the read original. A name automatically assigned to the document appears. You can change the file name. Save & Print [Yes]: Select to copy the scanned original and save it in the specified User Box. [No]: Select to save the data of the scanned original in the specified User Box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-61 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5 Left panel display In the left panel of the basic settings screen, you can view the job list and the job status information. You can also view the result of the settings being configured. dReference To configure settings displayed as the default in the left panel: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Left Panel Display Default]. To prohibit other users from deleting jobs or to give permission to do so: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Delete Other User Jobs]. To prohibit or permit change if the print priority of jobs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Changing Job Priority]. To hide the file name and destination in the job log: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Hide Personal Information]. To delete all job logs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Initialize] ö [Job History]. Job List Check Job Settings Job List Lists jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed. If the Left Panel Display Default is set to "Status Display" in User Settings, the job status is displayed. Delete To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Job Details Opens the Job List screen. Check Job Displays the result of the settings being configured. Check Details Check or change the current copy settings.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-62 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5.1 Job List From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed. 0 If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. 0 If an Administrator Settings parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. 0 When there is a job being printed, another job can be registered. Up to 251 jobs can be registered in total. 0 If the authentication method is changed in Administrator Settings and all management data is cleared, the jobs in the [Job History] are deleted. % Press [Job List] ö [Job Details] ö [Print]. Settings Print Opens the screen for checking print jobs. Send Opens the screen for checking fax and scan transmission jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Receive Opens the screen for checking fax reception jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Save Opens the screen for saving jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-63 5.5 Left panel display 5 Current Jobs Lists the jobs currently processed. Check the current status. Delete Deletes a job. Increase Priority (Displayed for the list of print jobs in process) The currently processed print job is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the currently processed print job cannot be interrupted because it contains Fold or Staple, the job given priority is executed after the currently processed print job has been completed. Release Held Job (Displayed for the list of print jobs in process) Select to switch to the held job list and change the settings of, print, or delete a held job. The held job list contains jobs that could not be printed because, for example, system auto reset was activated during the proof copy. • If desired, press [Change Settings] to change the copy settings. • For confirmation, press the [Proof Copy] key to print a copy from a stored job. Check Job Set. Check job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed, and held jobs. Current Jobs Detail Check the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in process. To delete the job, press [Delete] in the Detail screen. Job History Lists completed jobs. • This list includes jobs that failed because of an error. • You can check the job logs and results. • [Scanned Image] in the left panel displays the first page of the selected job with a thumbnail. To display thumbnails in [Scanned Image], set [Job History Thumbnail Display] in Administrator Settings to [ON]. For details, refer to page 7-51. Deleted Jobs Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished. Finished Jobs Displays only jobs that were completed normally. All Jobs Displays all jobs. Detail Check the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in the Job History list. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-64 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5.2 Check Job From the Check Job Settings screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. 1 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details]. 2 Check the copy settings. To change the copy settings, press the relevant button. 3 After checking the settings, press [Close].6 User Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-2 6 6 User Settings User Settings are for setting items that a user can adjust as appropriate. The contents of these setting items depend upon how the Administrator settings are configured. User Settings cannot be initialized all at once. To initialize all settings, either manually reset them one by one or contact your service representative. Settings System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user. Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations. Scan/Fax Settings Configure setting for fax and scan operations. Printer Settings Configure setting is for the printer operations. Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in. Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified for registered users. Change Icon Change the icons specified for registered users. Register Authentication Information Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of the current login user. Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Configure settings to print data from a cellular phone or PDA.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-3 6.1 System Settings 6 6.1 System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [System Settings]. Settings Language Selection Select the language for display in the touch panel. Measurement Unit Settings Select the units for the values displayed in the touch panel. Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Selection Settings Select the trays to be selected automatically when the Auto Paper Select function is enabled. Also configure the priority for the auto tray switch operation to switch paper trays when it is enabled. • Configure "Auto Paper Selection Setting" to use paper types other than plain paper as plain paper in a regular auto paper selection mode. Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Specify the action to be taken when the matching paper is not loaded into the specified paper tray. • [Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)] Printing stops. • [Switch Trays (Tray Priority)] Whether the matching paper is loaded into the specified paper tray is determined first. And if not, another tray that has the matching paper loaded (if any) is selected. Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Also select whether to print lists in 1-Sided or 2- Sided mode. Post Inserter Settings Specify the paper tray, paper type, or paper size when using the Post Inserter. This button appears only when the Post Inserter is installed. Auto Color Level Adjust. Adjust the reference level for detecting a color or black-and-white original when the Auto Color setting is selected. Power Save Settings Refer to page 7-3. Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. Output Settings Refer to page 7-4. AE Level Adjustment Refer to page 7-9.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-4 6.1 System Settings 6 Auto Paper Select for Small Original Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the document placed on the original glass is too small to be detected in Auto Paper mode. Copy on Small Size Prints on 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper. • If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper is not loaded in the tray, a message that instructs you to load 5- 1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper in the bypass tray appears. Copy on Letter (Copy on A4) Prints on 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) paper. Prohibit Copy Starts printing when a paper tray is selected manually and the [Start] key is pressed. Blank Page Print Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-26. Page Number Print Position Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position. Select Keyboard Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel. Factory default Language Selection English Measurement Unit Settings This value varies depending on the area. Auto Tray Selection Settings Tray Priority Tray 1 ö Tray 2 ö Tray 3 ö Tray 4 ö LCT LCT is displayed when the optional LCT is installed. Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists • Tray 1 • 1-Sided Post Inserter Settings Paper Tray: F1 Paper Type: Plain Paper Paper size: Auto Detect Paper Type Plain paper Paper Size Auto Detect Auto Color Level Adjust. Standard (3) Low Power Mode Settings 15 min. Sleep Mode Settings 30 min. Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print Fax: Batch Print Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2 • Print: Tray 2 • Print Reports: Tray 1 • Fax: Tray 1 [Output Tray] is displayed when the Finisher FS-526, Finisher FS-527, or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. [Tray 3] is displayed if the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. AE Level Adjustment Standard (2) Auto Paper Select for Small Original Prohibit Copy Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print Page Number Print Position Left & Right Bind: All the Same Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-5 6.1 System Settings 6 dReference To enable Auto Paper: Press [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Auto Paper]. To enable Auto Color: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Auto Color]. To configure Background Removal to Auto: Press [Quality/Density] ö [Background Removal] ö [Auto]. Select Keyboard Local Keyboard Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-6 6.2 Custom Display Settings 6 6.2 Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings]. Settings Copier Settings Default Tab Select either the standard Basic tab or the Quick Copy tab as the basic settings screen in Copy mode. Shortcut Key 1 Allocate shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions to be added to the basic settings screen. Pressing a shortcut key displays the desired setting screen. • When the optional image controller is installed, only one shortcut key can be enabled. Shortcut Key 2 Quick Settings 1 Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place them on the basic settings screen. The registered setting condition can be invoked by only pressing the corresponding easy setting key. Quick Settings 2 Quick Settings 3 Quick Settings 4 Default Tab Density Settings Specify whether to display the copy density setting in the basic settings screen. If [ON] is selected, you can press [Dark] or [Light] in the basic settings screen to adjust the copy density. • If [ON] is selected, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] cannot be specified. Scan/Fax Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". User Box Settings Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". Copy Screen Configure whether to display the [Next Box Job], [Next Scan/Fax Job], or [Next Copy Job] button or messages when you program the next job during the printing operation. FAX Active Screen This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Color Selection Settings Select the color used for indicating that the button is selected. Left Pane Display Default Left Panel Display Default Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the contents of the current Copy settings as the default display of the left panel. Job Display Setting Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the progress of the current job in process, when the default display of the left panel set to "Job List".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-7 6.2 Custom Display Settings 6 Search Option Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Factory default Default Tab Basic Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2/Quick settings 1/Quick settings 2/Quick settings 3/Quick settings 4 OFF Default Tab Density Settings OFF Default Tab (Fax/Scan Settings) Address Book Program Default (Fax/Scan Settings) PAGE1 Address Book Index Default (Fax/Scan Settings) Favorites Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2 (Fax/Scan Settings) OFF Default Address Book (Fax/Scan Settings) Index Default Address Type (Fax/Scan Settings) Group Default Tab (User Box Settings) Public Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2 (User Box Settings) OFF Copy Operating Screen No Color Selection Settings Green Left Panel Display Default Job List Job Display Setting List Display Uppercase and lowercase letters Differentiate Search Option Screen OFF Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-8 6.3 Copier Settings 6 6.3 Copier Settings Configure the settings used by the copy functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings]. Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Configure whether to automatically specify Booklet when Center Staple and Fold is selected. This item is displayed if the saddle stitcher is installed in the finisher. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Configure whether the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when Combine or Booklet is selected in Auto Paper mode. • Select the recommended zoom ratios for the following zoom settings: 2 in 1, Booklet: 64.7% (70.7%) 4 in 1: 50.0% 8 in 1: 32.3% (35.3%) Auto Sort/Group Selection Configure whether to output the copied pages automatically in Sort mode when copying multiple-page original using the ADF. Default Copy Settings Configure the initial values for the Copy function to be displayed when the power in turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. Current Setting The current settings are used as the default settings. Factory Default The factory settings are used as the default settings. Default Enlarge Display Settings This setting is for the enlarged display screen operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". When AMS Direction is Incorrect Configure whether to print or discard the job when the original orientation does not match that of paper in Auto Zoom mode. Separate Scan Output Method Configure the output for divided original loaded in the ADF or for multiple pages of the original scanned on the original glass. Page Print Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the original is being scanned. Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have been scanned. Enlargement Rotation Configure whether to rotate and print a large-size original image when the original orientation does not match that of paper. Auto Zoom (Platen) Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri-Fold Print Side This item is displayed when user access is allowed in Administrator settings while the Finisher FS-526 is installed. For details, refer to page 7-43.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-9 6.3 Copier Settings 6 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold/Tri-Fold for all pages together or for specific pages when handling a job containing multiple pages. When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected. If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets are printed without being folded. This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed in the Finisher FS-526. To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative. Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3) Tri-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:1) Half-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold together for all pages or for each page when handling a job containing multiple pages. When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected. If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets are printed without being folded. This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative. Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3) Print Jobs During Copy Operation Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Automatic Image Rotation Finishing Program Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen. To display the button, register the contents of the finishing program. Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at once by using the button that appears in the basic settings screen. This item is set if the finisher is installed. Card Shot Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Factory default Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Auto Display Zoom Ratio Auto Sort/Group Selection Yes Default Copy Settings Factory Default When AMS Direction is Incorrect Print Separate Scan Output Method Page Print Enlargement Rotation Allow Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2 Tri-Fold Print Side Inside Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets Half-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-10 6.3 Copier Settings 6 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Accept Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom Is Set Finishing Program ON Card Shot Layout: Top/Bottom Zoom: Full Size Store Original Size: X: 3-1/2 inch (89.0 mm) Y: 21 inch (51.0 mm) Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-11 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings 6 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-12 6.5 Printer Settings 6 6.5 Printer Settings This setting is for the printer operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-13 6.6 Change Password 6 6.6 Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in. 0 A public user cannot use this function. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Password]. 2 Enter the previous password, and then press [OK]. 3 Enter a new password. 4 Press [Password Confirmation], and then enter the new password again. 5 Press [OK]. The new password is registered.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-14 6.7 Change E-Mail Address 6 6.7 Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified as registered user information. 0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address. 0 Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-50. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change E-Mail Address]. 2 Press [E-mail Address]. 3 Change the E-mail address. 4 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-15 6.8 Change Icon 6 6.8 Change Icon Change the icon specified as registered user information. 0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Icon]. 2 Select the icon and press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-16 6.9 Register Authentication Information 6 6.9 Register Authentication Information Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information about the registered users. You can register or delete authentication information when performing the following operations. 0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow]. 0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User Authentication Settings] ö [User Registration] ö [Function Permission] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow]. 0 Log in as a registered user. 1 Select Utility/Counter ö [User Settings] ö [Register Authentication Settings]. 2 Press [Edit]. To delete authentication information, press [Delete]. For biometric authentication For IC card authenticationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-17 6.9 Register Authentication Information 6 3 Register authentication information. For biometric authentication, place your finger on the Authentication Unit to scan the finger vein pattern. Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for each scanning. After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press [Authentication Test]. If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [Register]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. For IC card authentication, place your IC card on the Authentication Unit, and press [OK]. 4 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-18 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting 6 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Configure settings to print data in a cellular phone or PDA through this machine. For details, refer to the "User's Guide Box Operations" and "User's Guide Print Operations".7 Administrator Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-2 7 7 Administrator Settings Administrator Settings are used only by the administrator to adjust the settings. Logging on to Administrator Settings requires the administrator password. Settings System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. Administrator/Machine Settings Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine. One-Touch/User Box Registration Configure settings for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax operations. User Authentication/Account Track Configure the authentication settings to restrict the functions of this machine. Network Settings Configure settings for the software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine. Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations. Printer Settings Configure settings for the print operations. Fax Settings Configure settings for the fax and network fax operations. System Connection Configure network settings. Security Settings Configure settings to restrict the functions of this machine for processing secret data. License Settings Enable an optional i-Option function. OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-3 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1 System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. 7.1.1 Power Save Settings Configure the settings for the power-saving mode. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings]. Settings Low Power Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the lower power mode when this machine is not being operated. Sleep Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the sleep mode when this machine is not being operated. Power Save Key Configure the type of the power save function to be started when you press the [Power Save] key. Low Power Provides power-saving effect higher than normal. Sleep Although this machine conserves more energy in the sleep mode than in the power save mode, the machine must warm-up when the sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than the power save mode. Enter Power Save Mode Configure settings for switching to the power save mode after printing documents from computers or receiving faxes. Normal Enters the power save mode when the time specified in Low Power Mode Settings has elapsed. Immediately Enters the power save mode in a short time. Factory default Low Power Mode Settings 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings 30 minutes Power Save Key Lower Enter Power Save Mode Immediatelybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-4 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.2 Output Settings Configure the settings for the output functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Output Settings]. Settings Print/Fax Output Settings This setting is for the print and fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and " User's Guide [Print Operations]". Output Tray Settings Configure an output tray given priority for outputting by function. This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. Shift Output Each Job Select whether to shift the output paper for each job. This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. Factory default Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print Fax: Batch Print Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2 • Print: Tray 2 • Print Reports: Tray 1 • Fax: Tray 1 [Tray 3] is displayed when the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. Shift Output Each Job Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-5 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.3 Date/Time Settings Configure the current date and time and the time zone. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Date/Time Settings]. dReference To cancel the current settings: Press the [C] key. Settings Year Configure the current date and time. Monthly Daily Hour Minute Time Zone Configure the UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) related time zone. Factory default Time Zone +00:00bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-6 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time Configure daylight saving time settings. 0 This function is available when this machine is connected to the network where UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) is specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Daylight Saving Time]. Settings Configure whether to use daylight saving time and the time difference from UTC (Coordinate Universal Time). Factory default Daylight Saving Time Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-7 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting Configure the weekly timer in order to allow you to turn on and off this machine at the specified date and time. 0 An exact date/time setting must be performed in advance. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer Settings]. Settings Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings Configure whether to use the weekly timer function. Time Settings Configure the time of each day of the week to turn on and off this machine. Set All The setting for the selected day of the week is applied to the same day of the week in other weeks. Delete Cancels the selected input value. Date Settings Configure the days when timer operation is activated individually. To cancel the setting, press the same day again. Daily Setting Configure the days of the week when the timer operation is activated. Select Time for Power Save Configure the time to turn this machine off and on if you want to turn it off at a specific time, for example, during a lunch break. Password for Non- Business Hours Configure whether to require a user to enter the password if the user uses this machine outside the specified time. • To make the user to enter the password, you need to specify the password. Factory default Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings OFF Select Time for Power Save No Password for Non-Business Hours Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-8 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.6 Restrict User Access Restrict the machine operation, or change or delete the copy programs by the user. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access]. Settings Copy Program Lock Settings Configure the registered copy programs that are prevented from being changed or deleted. Delete Saved Copy Program Delete the registered copy programs. Restrict Access to Job Settings Configure whether to allow users to configure the following settings. Changing Job Priority Configure whether to allow users to change the print priority of jobs. Delete Other User Jobs Configure whether to allow other users to delete jobs when the user authentication settings have been specified. Registering and Changing Addresses This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Changing Zoom Ratio Configure whether to allow users to change registered zoom ratios. Changing the "From" Address This setting is for the network scan operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Change Registered Overlay Configure whether to allow users to change registered image overlays. Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration Configure whether to allow a registered user to register or delete biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of the user. Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Factory default Changing Job Priority Allow Delete Other User Jobs Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Allow Changing Zoom Ratio Allowbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-9 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.7 Expert Adjustment Make adjustments so that output quality is increased. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]. Changing the "From" Address Restrict Change Registered Overlay Allow Biometric/IC card Information Registration Restrict Restrict Broadcasting OFF Factory default Settings AE Level Adjustment Configure the initial value for AE (auto exposure). The higher the setting, the more that the original background is emphasized. Printer Adjustment Adjust the starting print position and defective print images caused by paper type features. dReference The starting print position is factory-adjusted. Normally, you are not required to change the set values. Leading Edge Adjustment p. 7-13 Centering p. 7-13 Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) p. 7-13 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) p. 7-13 Erase Leading Edge Adjust leading edge erase width. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Vertical Adjustment Adjust the feed direction zoom ratio of paper types. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Media Adjustment p. 7-14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-10 7.1 System Settings 7 Finisher Adjustment Adjust the staple, folding, and punch position of the finisher. This button appears only when the finisher is installed. dReference Create a sample in advance, and then adjust them while checking the sample. Center Staple Position p. 7-14 Half-Fold Position p. 7-15 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-15 (This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD- 508 are installed.) Punch Vertical Position Adjustment p. 7-16 (This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.) Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment p. 7-16 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment p. 7-17 Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment p. 7-17 (This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.) Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment p. 7-17 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment p. 7-18 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-18 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-19 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor p. 7-19 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment Adjust the paper size to be used in the Post Inserter. You can specify different paper sizes for the upper and lower trays. This button appears when the Post Inserter PI-505 is installed. Density Adjustment Correct the toner amount to be used by color depending on the paper type. • To correct the toner amount to be used in the black print mode, press [Black Image Density]. Image Stabilization Image Stabilization Only Press the [Start] key to stabilize images. Pressing the [Image Stabilization Only] button executes normal image stabilization. If a good result was not achieved after the [Image Stabilization Only] button was pressed, execute [Initialize + Image Stabilization]. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-11 7.1 System Settings 7 Image Stabilization Setting Specify the type and opportunity of image stabilization. If [Standard] is selected, normal stabilization is performed during warm-up processing when a change in the absolute humidity has been detected during warm-up processing. If [Color Priority] is selected, color stabilization is performed when the power has been turned on. Selecting [Black & White Priority] executes monochrome stabilization during warm-up when absolute humidity change is detected during the warmup, and then stabilizes color before performing color print. Paper Separation Adjustment Adjust the paper position where the two sides are separated for 2-sided print. Color Registration Adjust Correct color shifts if they are detected in the print result. For details, refer to page 7-20. Gradation Adjustment Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images. For details, refer to page 7-21. Image Stabilization Only Stabilize the image by pressing the [Start] key before performing gradation adjustment. Print Adjust the gradation when the color gradation has been changed in a print image. This function performs adjustment, emphasizing the gradation expression of an image and the reproducibility of texts or lines. Copy Adjust the gradation when the color gradation has been changed in a print image. This function performs adjustment to save as many images as possible in memory. Scanner Area Adjust the scan range of the scanner. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. ADF Adjustment Make adjustments for scanning images in the ADF. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Line Detection Prior Detection Setting (bizhub C652/C552/C452) Configure whether to issue an alert when the slit glass is dirty. • Select an alert display format and contamination detection level. Prior Detection Setting (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) Configure whether to issue an alert when the slit glass (front) is dirty. • Select an alert display format and contamination detection level. Prior Detection Setting (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) Configure whether to issue an alert when the slit glass (back) is dirty. • Select an alert display format, contamination detection level and display timing. Feed Cleaning Settings Configure whether to remove a dirt on the slit glass each time one sheet of paper passes through the ADF when scanning an original using the ADF. Trail Edge Adjust Correct a shift if it is detected at the trailing edge of the print result. Place, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w, or A4 v on the bypass tray, and then press the [Start] key to print a test pattern. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-12 7.1 System Settings 7 User Paper Settings Configure special paper settings for User Paper 1 through 6. Settings to configure include Basic Weight and Media Adjustment. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings Configure Non-Image Area operation settings. [Auto]: Automatically detects the background density of the original, and selects either "Bevel" or "Rectangular" accordingly. [Specify]: Allows you to manually specify an erase method and original density. As an erase method, select "Bevel" or "Rectangular". Specify an original density from five levels. Factory default AE Level Adjustment Standard (2) Leading Edge Adjustment 0.0 mm Centering 0.0 mm Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) 0.0 mm Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) 0.0 mm Media Adjustment Auto Center Staple Position 0.0 mm Half-Fold Position 0.0 mm Tri-Fold Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Punch Vertical Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment For Finisher FS-526 Finisher: 0.0 mm Finisher (for Z folding): 0.0 mm Post inserter feeder (Upper tray): 0.0 mm Post inserter feeder (Lower tray): 0.0 mm For Finisher FS-527: 0 Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment 0.0 mm 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment 0.0 mm 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment Auto Detect Density Adjustment 0 Image Stabilization Only Image Stabilization Only Image Stabilization Setting Standard Paper Separation Adjustment 0.0 mm Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-13 7.1 System Settings 7 Leading Edge Adjustment Adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of each type of paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Leading Edge Adjustment]. % To adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with respect to the paper feed direction), press [Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)]. 2 Select a paper type to be adjusted. 3 Load the paper into the bypass tray. 4 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 5 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 4.2 mm. % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width. Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern. 6 Press [OK]. Centering Adjust the starting print position at the left edge of each paper tray (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0 Only 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Centering]. % To adjust the starting print position at the left edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with respect to the paper feed direction), press [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)]. 2 Select a paper tray to be adjusted. 3 Press the [Start] kay. A test pattern is printed. Color Registration Adjust 0 dot Prior Detection Setting Yes Warning Display: TYPE1 Detection Level: Std. Prior Detection Setting (front) Yes Warning Display: TYPE1 Detection Level: Std. Prior Detection Setting (back) Feed Cleaning Settings Remove Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings Erase Operation: Specify Erase Method: Rectangular Original Density: 3 Factory default a a:4.2mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-14 7.1 System Settings 7 4 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the left edge of the paper (b) is 3.0 mm (+/-0.5 mm). % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width. Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern. 5 Press [OK]. Media Adjustment Adjust defective print images caused by paper type features. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Media Adjustment]. 2 Select a paper type to be adjusted. % If defective images exist on the back side of 2-sided copy paper, select [2nd Side]. 3 Press [+] or [-] to specify an adjusted value. % If missing parts or white spots exist in print images, press [-]. If the surface of the print image is rough, press [+]. 4 Press [OK] ö [Close]. 5 Copy, and then check the print image. Center Staple Position Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function. 0 Adjust the half-fold position before adjusting the center stapling position. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the center staple function. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed. 0 When stapling in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service representative. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Center Staple Position]. 2 Select the size of paper of which the center staple position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the staple position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. b b:3.0mm±0.5mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-15 7.1 System Settings 7 dReference To adjust the half-fold position: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position]. Half-Fold Position Adjust the center staple & fold and half-fold positions. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the half-fold function. Adjust the half-fold position while checking the created sample. 0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed. 0 When adjusting the half-fold position in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service representative. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position]. 2 Select the size of paper of which half-fold position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. Tri-Fold Position Adjustment Adjust the folding position for each paper size when printing with the tri-fold function. The folding width depends on the paper size, which cannot be changed. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the tri-fold function. Adjust the tri-fold position while checking the created sample. 0 It can be adjusted when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD-508 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment]. 2 Select the size of paper of which tri-fold position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the tri-fold position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-16 7.1 System Settings 7 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment]. 2 Select the paper size to adjust the vertical punch position. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes. Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes as appropriate for each installed option or paper type. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole position while checking the created sample. 0 The horizontal position of the punched holes can be adjusted as appropriate for each installed option if the finisher FS-526, punch kit PK-516, and post inserter are installed. 0 This adjustment is available for each paper type if the Finisher FS-527 and Punch Kit PK-517 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment]. % Select an option to adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes if the post inserter is installed. % First, select the paper type if the finisher FS-527 and punch kit PK-517 are installed. 2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-17 7.1 System Settings 7 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment Correct the orientation of the paper and adjust the punched hole position to be parallel with the left edge of the paper. The punched hole array is corrected by adjusting the resistance applied to the paper for each paper type. 0 This adjustment is available if the punch kit is installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment]. First select the option to adjust the inclination of punch holes when the Finisher FS-526 and Post Inserter PI-505 or Z Folding Unit ZU-606 are installed. 2 Select a paper type for which the punch hole angle is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch kit is automatically adjusted. 0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and the Punch Kit PK-516 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment]. 2 Press the [Start] key. The punch edge sensor is automatically adjusted. The adjusted result appears. Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment]. 2 Select the size of paper of which the vertical punched hole position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-18 7.1 System Settings 7 Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes for each paper size. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment]. 2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result. 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment Adjust the first paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment]. 2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the first folding position. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result. 1st Z-Fold Positionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-19 7.1 System Settings 7 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment Adjust the second paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment]. 2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the second folding position. % The distance between the left end of paper and the second Z-fold position must be 2 mm or more. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result. Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch unit is automatically adjusted. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit or Punch Kit PK-516 is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor]. 2 Press [Start]. % The punch unit edge sensor is automatically adjusted. % The adjusted result appears. 2nd Z-Fold Position 2 mm or morebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-20 7.1 System Settings 7 Color Registration Adjust If color shifts are detected in the print result, adjust the each color print position for each paper type. 0 The procedure for adjusting the color registration is the same for yellow, magenta and cyan. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Color Registration Adjust]. 2 Select a color to be corrected. 3 Select a paper type for which color registration is adjusted. 4 Load the paper into the bypass tray. % The loadable paper size is 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3 w, or A4 v. 5 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 6 Check that the black line aligns with the color line to be adjusted at the X and Y positions of the test pattern. % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the color line to be corrected while checking the sample. The color registration is adjusted. 7 Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern, and then check the print result. 8 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-21 7.1 System Settings 7 Gradation Adjustment Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images. 0 Adjust each correction item three times. 1 Turn off the main power switch of this machine. 2 Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. 3 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Gradation Adjustment]. 4 Press the [Start] key. The image stabilization operation starts. The correction items on the right of the touch panel become enabled. 5 Select an item to be corrected. 6 Select paper used to output a test pattern. % As a paper size, select 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3w or A4 v. By default, 11 e 17 w (A3 w) is selected. % Paper in the bypass tray cannot be selected. 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. % Selecting 11 e 17w or A3w outputs one sheets, and selecting 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v outputs two sheets. 8 Place the printed test pattern on the original glass in orientation displayed in the touch panel. % For the test patterns of 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v, place the output two sheets side by side. 9 Place 10 or more sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern to prevent it from becoming transparent. 10 Close the ADF. 11 Press the [Start] key. The test pattern is scanned. The gradation level is automatically adjusted. 12 Repeat steps 5 through 11 two more times.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-22 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.8 List/Counter Configure the job settings list print settings and paper count settings for this machine. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [List/Counter]. Settings Management List Job Settings List Configure paper tray settings for printing the job settings list and specify a print side. Paper Size/Type Counter Register a combination of paper size and paper type for a counter. Every time the counter is changed, the count is reset to 0. Counter Clear Resets the count to 0. Paper Size Select the paper size of the counter. Paper Type Select the paper type of the counter. Factory default Job Settings List • 1-Sided • Tray 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-23 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.9 Reset Settings Configure auto reset settings. 0 All settings performed in the following tabs during operation using the copy function are automatically reset to the initial settings after the specified time has elapsed. Basic tab, Original Setting tab, Quality/Density tab, Application tab 0 Even if [OFF] is selected for System Auto Reset Time, the system auto reset function operates when this machine is not used for one minute during user authentication/account track operations. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Reset Settings]. Settings System Auto Reset Priority Mode Configure a mode to be displayed in the system auto reset mode. System Auto Reset Time Configure whether to perform system auto reset. Specify a time until the initial screen appears if this machine is not operated. The specified time is not canceled. dReference If user authentication or enhanced security mode is enabled, the administrator settings mode or user authentication mode is logged off according to the setting for System Auto Reset Time. In the enlarge display mode, the system auto reset mode is disabled. Auto Reset Configure whether to perform auto reset in the selected mode. Specify a time until the basic settings screen appears and the settings are reset to the initial values if this machine is not operated. Job Reset When Account is changed Configure whether to reset the settings when you log off if the user authentication or account track settings have been configured. When original is set on ADF Configure whether to reset the settings when an original is loaded in the ADF. Next Job Configure whether to reset the following settings when the next job is selected. • Staple Setting • Original Set/Bind Direction • Reset Data After Job The destination of data is always reset.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-24 7.1 System Settings 7 dReference To configure user authentication/account track: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings]. 7.1.10 User Box Settings This setting is for the User Box functions. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". 7.1.11 Standard Size Setting Configure settings relating to the capability for detecting original size and the foolscap paper sizes. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Standard Size Setting]. Factory default Priority Mode Copy System Auto Reset Time 1 minute Auto Reset • Copy: 1 Minute • Scan/Fax: 1 Minute • User Box: 1 Minute When Account is changed Reset When original is set on ADF Do Not Reset Next Job • Staple Setting: OFF • Original Set/Bind Direction: OFF • Reset Data After Job: Reset All Settings Original Glass Original Size Detect Configure the capability for detecting original sizes. 8-1/2 e 14/Foolscap Size Detection European model (cm) only Specify whether to detect a size of 8-1/2 e 14 or a foolscap size. • This item may not be displayed on product sales areas. Foolscap Size Setting Select the size that you want to use when the paper size is close to 13 inches. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-25 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.12 Stamp Settings Configure header and footer settings to be printed. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings]. Factory default Original Glass Original Size Detect Table 1 8-1/2 e 14 Foolscap Size Detection 8-1/2 e 14 Foolscap Size Setting 8 e 13 w Settings Header/Footer Settings Register or change a header and footer. To use the header/footer function in Application Setting, a header and footer must be registered in advance. New Enter a registration name, and then configure detailed header and footer settings. Configure whether to print a header and footer, and then configure print contents. • Text: Enter text. • Date/Time: Select a format to display the date and time. • Other: Specify the distribution control number. Select whether to include the Job Number, Serial Number, and Account/User Name. Configure pages and text details. • Pages: Select whether to print the header and footer on all pages or only on the first page. • Text Details: Select the color, size, and type of the text for the header and footer to be printed. Delete Deletes the selected header or footer. Check/Edit Change the selected header or footer. Fax TX Settings This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Factory default FAX TX Settings Cancelbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-26 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings Configure whether to print stamps or overlay on blank pages. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. 7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings Configure whether to start processing for the next job when the current job stops due to running out of paper in the paper tray. Selecting "Yes" provides no print queue time due to job stopping. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Skip Job Operation Settings]. Settings Configure whether to print stamp/composition on blank pages. Factory default Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print Settings Fax Configure whether to skip a job in the fax mode. Other than Fax Configure whether to skip a job in a mode other than the fax mode. Factory default Skip Job Operation Settings Fax: Yes Other than Fax: Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-27 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting Configure the initial settings for the paper type to be used for the bypass tray. The initial setting for the paper type is applied after the job finishes or the tray runs out of paper. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Default Bypass Paper Type Setting]. 7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Settings Configure whether to specify the initial setting for paper type for the bypass tray. When you specified this, select a paper type. Factory default Default Bypass Paper Type Setting Yes Paper Type: Plain Paperbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-28 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.17 Page Number Print Position Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Page Number Print Position]. Settings Left & Right Bind: All the Same Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same Select a desired print position. Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical Top & Bottom Bind: Symmetrical Factory default Page Number Print Position Left & Right Bind: All the Same Top & Bottom Bind: All the Samebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-29 7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings 7 7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine. 0 The device name entered under the Input Machine Address may not be supported by your operating system. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Administrator/Machine Setting]. Settings Administrator Registration Register administrator information displayed on the Service/Admin. Information screen of the Guidance screen and the From address for sending E-mail from this machine. Input Machine Address Register the device name and E-mail address of this machine. The device name is used as a part of the name of the file created on this machine. The E-mail address can be used for Internet fax. Factory default Device Name The default abbreviation is input for the product name. If necessary, it can be changed freely.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-30 7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration 7 7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration This setting is for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-31 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track Configure the authentication settings to control the use of this machine. Type and functions of authentication - User Authentication Appropriate for controlling users. To allow unregistered users to use this machine, public user settings are required. – Restricts accessible functions. – Counts the number of outputting and scanning by user. – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by user. – Operates a Personal User Box for each user and group box. – Controls the access allowed level of the destination. – Prohibits jobs of other users from being deleted. - Account Track Appropriate for controlling groups or multiple users. – Counts the number of outputting and scanning by account. – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by account. – Operates the group box. Reference - Either user authentication or account track settings can be configured, or user authentication can be synchronized with account track. Settings can be configured for the both and used without being synchronized. - A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. - To register more than 1,000, use PageScope Authentication Manager. You can register up to 30,000 users and accounts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-32 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.1 General Settings Configure the settings for enabling the authentication functions. 0 Before registering a user, select an authentication method. If all management data is cleared after the authentication method was selected, the histories of the registered users, print, send, receive, and save jobs are deleted. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings]. Settings User Authentication Configure whether to use user authentication. OFF Disables user authentication. ON (External Server) Restricts users who can access this machine using the external authentication server. This setting is available when external authentication server settings are configured. ON (MFP) Restricts users who can access this machine using this machine. Public User Access Allows public user accesses when the enhanced security mode is disabled. Restrict Prohibits unregistered users from using this machine. ON (With Login) A public user can use this machine after pressing [Public user] in the Login screen to log in to this machine. ON (Without Login) A public user can use this machine without logging in to this machine in the Login screen. Account Track ON/OFF Configure whether to use the account track function. Account Track Input Method Select an authentication method when configuring account track settings. Account Name & Password Enter the account name and password to log in. Password Only Enter only the password to log in. • You cannot configure this when user authentication settings are configured.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-33 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 dReference To configure external server settings: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [External Server Settings]. For details on enhanced security settings, contact your service representative. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Configure the authentication operation settings when both user authentication and account track settings are configured. Configure whether to automatically select the account assigned to the user during logging in. Synchronize Allows the user to log in to one account assigned to the user. The user who succeeded in user authentication can log in without account track authentication. dReference This function is appropriate for managing each user by account. Do Not Synchronize Allows the user to log in to some accounts. The user who succeeded in user authentication performs account track authentication to log in. When # of Jobs Reach Maximum Configure the action of this machine that is taken when the output count of the job reaches the limit specified for the user or account. Skip Job Stops the running job, and then automatically starts the next job. Stop Job Stops all jobs. Number of User Counters Assigned Configure how many of a total of 1,000 users and account registrations should be allowed for user registration at maximum. The remaining registration number is for accounts. When user authentication and account track settings are configured, the number of counters assigned for users can be specified. Ticket Hold Time Setting Enter a time to hold the Kerberos authentication tickets. The external server authentication settings are configured, and applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. Factory default User Authentication OFF Public User Access Restrict Account Track OFF Account Track Input Method Account Name & Password Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Synchronize When # of Jobs Reach Maximum Skip Job Number of User Counters Assigned 500 Ticket Hold Time Setting 60 min. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-34 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.2 User Authentication Settings Configure the user and user counter management settings. 0 When only user authentication settings are configured, User Authentication Setting are enabled. 0 If only user authentication settings are configured, up to 1,000 users can be registered. If user authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 users can be registered as initial settings. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User Authentication Settings]. Settings Administrative Settings User Name List Configure whether to display a key to display a list of registered users in the Login screen. This item is enabled when the enhanced security settings are disabled. Default Function Permission Configure an initial value for function permission to users who are authenticated on the external server. ID & Print Settings Configure whether to use the ID & print function. Also configure whether to immediately print unauthenticated jobs or public user job or save it in the ID & Print User Box. ID & Print Operation Settings Configure whether to print all jobs using one authentication or print jobs one by one if multiple ID & print jobs are accumulated. Default Operation Selection In the Login screen for user authentication where ID and print jobs are stored, specify the default values for the operation to be carried out after authentication has been completed. When using this machine while the ID & print function is disabled, the user can select [Access] to log in to this machine without specifying the operation to be carried out after authentication. User Registration Register users who can access this machine. Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit]. Settings for registered users can be changed. • Selecting a user and pressing [Delete] delete the selected user. • If public user access is allowed, functions available to public users can be restricted. To change the setting for public users, select the registration number "000". User Name Enter a user name. • Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed. • A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again. Password Enter the password. E-Mail Address Enter an E-mail address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-35 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 Account Name Specify the account track of the registered user when account track settings are configured, Before you select an account name, you must registered it. Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected user or all users. • Print Configure whether to allow the user to copy and print in color and black, respectively. If black copy or print is restricted, print in black and white cannot be output. • Send Configure whether to allow the user to send fax and E-mail in color. dReference Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41. Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected user or all users. When not specifying it, select [No Limit]. • Total Allowance Specify the number of copies that can be output by the user. • Individual Allowance Specify the number of black copies and color copies that can be output by the user. Auth.-info.registrieren Press [Edit], and then register authentication information. This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed. Function Permission Restrict functions available to the selected user or all users. Specify whether to allow the following functions: • Copy • Scan • Fax • Print • User Box • Print Scan/Fax TX • Save to External Memory • External Memory Document Scan • Manual Destination Input (If [Allow] is selected, specify either to allow Manual Destination Input or manage the destination manually.) • Limited Color Print (Public user only) • Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info. • Mobile/PDA Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected user. [Stop Job] is selected, the specified user cannot log in to this machine. It is convenient to set suspend for users who do not use this machine temporarily or who have lost an IC card, instead of deleting them. • If [All Users] is selected, you can suspend the use of this machine for all the registered users. • If suspend is selected for a specific account, it is also suspended for users who belong to that account even if [Continue Job] is selected for this setting. Icon Select an icon. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-36 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 dReference To specify the maximum number of registrations for the user: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned]. User Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all users. Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected user. Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter. • The public user counter is specified for the last page. Factory default User Name List OFF Default Function Permission Save to External Memory/External Memory Document Scan: Restrict Other items: Allow ID & Print Settings ID & Print: OFF (when the authentication unit is not installed) ON (when the authentication unit is installed) Public User: Print Immediately ID & Print Operation Settings Print All Jobs Default Operation Selection Begin Printing Output Permission All Items: Allow Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit Total Allowance: No Limit Function Permission Copy: Allow Scan: Allow Fax: Allow Print: Allow User Box: Allow Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow External Memory Document Scan: Restrict Save to External Memory: Restrict Manual Destination Input: Allow/Allow All Limited Color Print: Restrict Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info.: Restrict Mobile/PDA: Allow Pause Continue Job Icon Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-37 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.3 Account Track Settings Configure the account and account counter management settings. 0 When only account track settings are configured, Account Track Settings is enabled. 0 If only account track settings are configured, up to 1,000 accounts can be registered. If user authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 accounts can be registered as initial settings. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [Account Track Settings]. Settings Account Track Registration • Select a desired registration number, press [Edit], and then register or change the account. • Select an account to be deleted, and the press [Delete]. Account name Specify the account name. • An account name that has already been registered cannot be used again. Password Enter the password. Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected account or all accounts. • Print Specify whether to allow color or black copy or print output to the user of the account. If black copy or print is restricted, print in black and white cannot be output. • Send Specify whether to allow the account members to send fax or E-mail in color. dReference Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41. Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected account or all accounts. When not specifying it, select [No Limit]. • Total Allowance Configure the number of copies that can be output by a member of the account. • Individual Allowance Configure the number of black copies and color copies that can be output by a member of the account.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-38 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 dReference To specify the maximum number of registrations for the account: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned]. 7.4.4 Print without Authentication This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". 7.4.5 Print Counter List Select the paper tray and print format to be used for printing the counter list. 0 This function is enabled when user authentication or account track settings are configured. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [Print Counter List]. Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected account. If [Stop Job] is selected, the specified user cannot log in to this machine. It is convenient to set suspend for accounts that do not use this machine temporarily, instead of deleting them. • If [All Accounts] is selected, you can suspend the use of this machine for all registered accounts. • If [Stop Job] is selected, it is also suspended for users who are belong to the accounts. Account Track Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all accounts. Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected account. Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter. Factory default Output Permission All Items: Allow Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit Total Allowance: No Limit Settings Settings Paper Tray Select the desired paper tray. Simplex/Duplex Select Print (1-Sided) or Print (2-Sided). Print Item Configure whether to print all data or printing data only.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-39 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.6 External Server Settings Configure the external server that performs user authentication. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [External Server Settings]. dReference For details on configuring external server settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". 7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". Factory default Print Counter List • Paper Tray: Tray 1 • Simplex/Duplex:1-Sided • Print Item: All Data Settings Select a number for the desired external server. You can also change the settings for the registered servers. New/Edit Server Name Enter the name of the external server. Server Type Configure an external server type, and then configure the settings for required items. Delete Delete the selected external server. Set as Default Configure an external server specified as the initial value. Select a desired server, and then press the [Set as Default] button.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-40 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings Configure the authentication operations when the optional authentication unit is installed. 0 This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [Authentication Device Settings]. Settings General Settings Card Authentication Displayed when the Authentication Unit (IC card type) AU-201 is installed. • IC Card Type Select the type of the IC card to be used in this machine. The FeliCa card ([FeliCa], [SSFC], [FCF], or [FCF (Campus)]) or Type A card ([Type A]) can be selected. If [FeliCa+Type A], [SSFC+Type A], [FCF+Type A], or [FCF (Campus)+ Type A] is selected, both the FeliCa and Type A cards can be used in this machine at the same time. If [SSFC] or [SSFC+Type A] is selected, specify [Company Code] or [Company Identification Code]. • Operation Settings Specify how to log in to this machine. [IC Card Authentication] allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card. [Card Authentication + Password] allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password. Bio Authentication Displayed when Authentication Unit (biometric type) AU-101 or Authentication Unit (biometric type) AU-102 is installed. • Beep Sound Specify whether to output a beep when reading the finger vein pattern. • Operation Settings Specify how to log in to this machine. [1-tomany authentication] allows the user to log in by simply placing his or her finger on the authentication unit. [1-to-1 authentication] allows the user to log in by entering the user name and placing his or her finger on the authentication unit. Logoff Settings Configure whether to log out when scanning of the original finishes.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-41 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting Configure the settings for the logout confirmation screen and settings for single color and 2 color output management if authentication settings have been configured. 0 This function is enabled if authentication function settings have been configured. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User/Account Common Setting]. 7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings This setting is for the network scan operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]""User's Guide [Network Administrator]". 7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". Settings Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting Configure whether to display the logout confirmation screen when you press the [Access] key to log out. Single Color > 2 Color Output Management Configure whether to manage the output of single color or 2 color as color print or black print. When managing it as black print, even a user who is restricted from performing color print can perform single color or 2 color output. dReference For details on output permission for users, refer to page 7-34 or page 7-37. Factory default Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting ON Single Color > 2 Color Output Management Colorbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-42 7.5 Network Settings 7 7.5 Network Settings This setting is for the network operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-43 7.6 Copier Settings 7 7.6 Copier Settings Configure the settings used by the copy functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings]. Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected manually while an original is placed on the original glass. Auto Zoom (ADF) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected manually while an original is placed in the ADF. Specify Default Tray when APS Off Configure which paper tray to be selected when the APS (Auto Paper) setting is canceled. Tray Before APS ON Uses the paper tray specified before the APS was selected. Default Tray Uses Tray 1. Select Tray for Insert Sheet Configure the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted sheets and the chapter title pages. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Configure whether to accept print data or fax data while a copy operation is being performed. Accept Accepts print data or fax data to print. Receive Only Prints print data or fax data after the copy operation is finished. Tri-Fold Print Side Configure whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside when the page is folded in three. This function is enabled when the finisher FS-526 and Saddle Sticher SD- 508 are installed. Automatic Image Rotation When the original orientation is different from paper orientation, the image is rotated depending on the setting. Configure when the image is automatically rotated. Copy Card Settings Register card copy setting. If [Card Copy] is selected in [Application], the function can be invoked with the registered setting. Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides of a card. Zoom Specify to copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. Store Original Size Change and register the pre-specified original size or [Original Name]. Factory default Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-44 7.6 Copier Settings 7 Specify Default Tray when APS Off Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Accept Tri-Fold Print Side Inside Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is Set Card Shot Settings Layout: Top/Bottom Zoom: Full Size Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-45 7.7 Printer Settings 7 7.7 Printer Settings This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-46 7.8 Fax Settings 7 7.8 Fax Settings This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-47 7.9 System Connection 7 7.9 System Connection Configure settings for software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine. % [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Connection] Settings OpenAPI Settings Access Setting Specify whether to allow the user to access this machine from other system that is using OpenAPI. SSL/Port Settings SSL Setting To use SSL encryption, select [SSL Only] or [SSL/Non-SSL]. • If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, [SSL Only] is enabled. Port No. Enter a port number. Port No. (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. Client Certificate Request Specify whether to enable a client certificate request. If you authenticate the client by requesting for its certificate (verification of client certificate), select [Enable]. Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify a certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the target certificate is within the validity period. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the certificate key is being used properly.[Chain]: Select whether to check that the certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Expiration Date Confirmation]: Select whether to check the target certificate for validation. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the certificate matches the server address. Authentication Specify whether to authenticate an access from other system that is using OpenAPI. • To authenticate, enter the login name and password in [Login Name] and [Password] • When user authentication is performed or when acquiring the device information with the PageScope Authentication Manager, set the Authentication setting of the OpenAPI Setting screen of the machine to [OFF]. Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number. If [Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-48 7.9 System Connection 7 Printer Information Specify [Printer Name], [Printer Location], [Printer Information], and [Printer URI]. The [Printer Information] setting is linked to [Printer Information] in [HTTP Server Settings]. Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Specify whether to allow the user to print data in a cellular phone or PDA or save such data in a User Box. Factory default Access Setting Possible to combine SSL Setting Non-SSL Only Client Certificates Disable Validity Period Confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm CN Do Not Confirm Authenticate OFF Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting OFF Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Restrict Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-49 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10 Security Settings Configure the settings for the restricting the functions of this machine for processing secret data. 7.10.1 Administrator Password Change the administrator password. 0 The administrator password can be entered using 0 through 8 digits. 0 If password rules are specified, an 8-digit password must be entered. 0 If you enter an incorrect administrator password a configured number of times, you are prohibited from using this machine. In this case, contact your service representative. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator Password]. 2 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 3 Enter a new administrator password. 4 Press [Password Confirmation], enter the administrator password again, and then press [OK]. 5 Press [OK]. The password is changed. dReference To configure password rule settings: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Rules]. 7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". Factory default Administrator Password 12345678bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-50 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels Configure settings so that the user can change some of the settings accessible only to the administrator. Settings allowed to the user appear in User Settings. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator Security Levels]. Settings Level 1 Allows the user to change the following settings. • Power Save Settings • Auto Zoom (Platen) • Auto Zoom (ADF) • Specify Default Tray when APS Off • Select Tray for Insert Sheet • Automatic Image Rotation • Card Shot Settings Level 2 Allows the user to change the following settings. • All settings allowed in Level 1 • Output Settings • AE Level Adjustment • Blank Page Print Settings • Change E-Mail Address • Print Jobs During Copy Operation Prohibit Does not allow the user to change the settings allowed in Level 1 and Level 2. Factory default Administrator Security Levels Prohibitbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-51 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.4 Security Details Configure security detail settings to restrict the functions of this machine. You can restrict the functions to enhance security. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details]. Settings Password Rules Configure whether to enable the password rules. When enabled, the restrictions are applied to the following passwords. The set passwords must be changed to ones that meet the conditions. • Administrator password • User password • Account password • User Box password • Security document password • Specify a password in 8 or more digits. • Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. • Only half-width symbols can be used. For some of the passwords, specification of """, "+", and "space" is restricted. • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be specified. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Configure restrictions on operation when you enter one of the following passwords incorrectly. • User password • Account password • User Box password • Security document password • Administrator password Mode 1 Disables operations for a specified time if authentication fails. Mode 2 Disables operations of the control panel if authentication fails. Specify the max. allowance for authentication operation frequency. Release Releases the prohibited operations due to failure in authentication, enabling the operations. Release Time Settings Configure the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically released.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-52 7.10 Security Settings 7 Confidential Document Access Method Synchronizes with the settings for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error", automatically changes it. • Mode 1 Requires entering security document ID and password before selecting a security document from a User Box. • Mode 2 Performs authentication based on the password after you enter the security document ID and select a security document from a User Box. Manual Destination Input This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Print Data Capture This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Job Log Settings Configure job log settings to be obtained when power is turned off and on. Specify the type of obtain log and whether to permit overwriting. Pressing [Erase Job Log] erases the job log. Restrict Fax TX This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Hide Personal Information Hide Personal Information (MIB) Specify whether to display the file name, address, or User Box number as MIB information in Job List. Display Activity Log This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Initialize Initializes Job History, Network Settings, Copy Program, or Store Address. Job History Thumbnail Display Configure whether to perform thumbnail display when displaying the job history. Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Copy Guard Specify whether to use the Copy Guard function. If [Copy Guard] is selected in [Application], you can embed copy inhibit information on paper. You can also detect copy inhibit information embedded on paper. • Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed. Password Copy Specify whether to use the Password Copy function. If [Password Copy] is selected in [Application], you can embed a password on paper. You can also detect a password embedded on paper. • Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed. Factory default Password Rules Invalid Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error • Mode 1 • Release Time Settings: 5 min. Confidential Document Access Method Mode 1 Manual Destination Input Allow All Print Data Capture Allow Job Log Settings No Restrict Fax TX OFF Hide Personal Information OFF Hide Personal Information (MIB) ON Display Activity Log ON Job History Thumbnail Display OFF Secure Print Only No Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-53 7.10 Security Settings 7 Copy Guard No Password Copy No Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-54 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode The enhanced security mode cannot be enabled when any of the current functional settings conflict with the enhanced security mode. When the enhanced security mode is enabled, the settings required for the mode or the settings that have been forcibly switched when entering the mode cannot be changed. Required settings To enable the enhanced security mode, the following settings must have been configured. Settings to forcibly changed When the enhanced security is enabled, the following settings are forced. - The changed settings will not revert when the enhanced security mode is turned off. - After the password rules have been changed, any passwords that do not comply with the changed rules will not be authenticated. For details on the password rules, refer to page 7-51. - For details on the network settings to be forcibly changed, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Administrator Settings Required settings User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / User Authentication Select either [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)]. • When you enable account track, select [Account Name & Password] for the account track input method. Security Settings / Administrator Password Set a password complying with password rules. Security Settings / HDD Settings / HDD Lock Password Set an HDD lock password. [Security] in PageScope Web Connection / PKI Settings / SSL Setting • Set [Mode using SSL/TLS] to [Administrator mode] and [User mode]. • Set [Encryption Strength] to [AES-256] or [3DES-168]. • Image controller setting • Management function setting • CE password • CE authentication function • HDD installation setting All the settings above must be configured by your service representative. These items must be configured by your service representative. For details, contact your service representative. Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changed System Settings / Restrict User Access / Restrict Access to Job Settings / Registering and Changing Addresses Set to [Restrict]. User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / Pubic User Access Set to [Restrict]. User Authentication/Account Track / User Authentication Settings / Administrative Settings / User Name List Set to [OFF]. User Authentication/Account Track / Print without Authentication Set to [Restrict]. Network Settings / FTP Setting / [FTP Server Settings] [FTP Server Settings] is not displayed. Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v1/v2c Settings [Write Setting] is set to [Disable]. Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v3 Settings In [Write User], [Security Level] cannot be set to [OFF]. Network Settings / TCPSocket Settings [Use SSL/TLS] is set to [ON]. Network Settings / WebDAV Settings / WebDAV Server Settings / SSL Settings Set to [SSL Only].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-55 7.10 Security Settings 7 If [Enhanced Security settings] is enabled, various security functions are configured to allow you to ensure the higher-level security of data management. For details, contact your service representative. To enable the enhanced security mode, the following settings must first be configured. Different screens appear depending on the current settings. 7.10.6 HDD Settings This setting is for the hard disk operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". System Connection / OpenAPI Setting Set to [SSL Only]. Security Settings / User Box Administrator Setting Set to [Restrict]. Security Settings / Security Details / Password Rules Set to [Enable]. Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Set to [Mode 2], and the number of tries is set to 3. • The number of tries can be changed to 1, 2, or 3. Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error / Release Time Settings The allowable setting range is limited to 5 or more minutes. This value cannot be less than 5 minutes. Security Settings / Security Details / Confidential Document Access Method Set to [Mode 2]. Security Settings/Security Details/Print Data Capture Set to [Restrict]. Security Settings/Security Details/Hide Personal Information (MIB) Set to [ON]. Security Settings / Security Details / Initialize / Network Settings [Network Settings] is not displayed. Security Settings/Security Details/Job History Thumbnail Display Set to [OFF]. Security Settings / Image Log TX Setting Set to [OFF]. Review Secure Print User Box Only the list is displayed before the password authentication is performed. [Network] in PageScope Web Connection / E-Mail Setting / S/MIME [Automatically Obtain Certificates] is set to [No]. [E-Mail Text Encryption Method] is set to [3DES]. [Maintenance] in PageScope Web Connection / Reset / Network Setting Clear [Network Setting Clear] is not displayed. [Security Administrator] in PageScope Web Connection / Password Setting [Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed. CS Remote Care Restricts the device setting in the remote mode based on CS Remote Care. Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changedbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-56 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.7 Function Management Settings Configure the settings for the network functions that are difficult to count. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Function Management Settings] . Settings Network Function Usage Settings ON Configure the settings for the network management that are difficult to count when managing operations. OFF The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF". • PC-FAX transmission • Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in User Boxes • Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in User Boxes • Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in User Boxes • Box operations using PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.) Factory default Network Function Usage Settings ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-57 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.8 Stamp Settings Manage the stamp. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings]. dReference To configure copy protect and stamp repeat settings: Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition]. 7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Settings Stamp Settings Apply Stamps Configure whether to add a stamp when printing or sending. To add a stamp, configure stamp contents settings. dReference If a stamp is added, print settings cannot be configured in "Stamp/Composition" of "Application". Delete Registered Stamp • Stamp Deletes all registered stamps. • Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat Deletes all stamps registered in Copy Protect and the stamp repeat function. Factory default Apply Stamps Printing: Do Not Apply Sending: Do Not Applybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-58 7.11 License Settings 7 7.11 License Settings Enable the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105. For details on the enabling procedure, refer to the "Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]". 0 An optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 must be purchased. For details, contact your service representative. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [License Settings] . Reference - When the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 are enabled, the enabled functions can be checked with [List of Enabled Functions]. Settings Get Request Code Issue a request code for this machine to be registered in the license management server (LMS). Install License Enter the function code and license code obtained from the license management server (LMS).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-59 7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings 7 7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine. For details, contact your service representative.8 Maintenancebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-2 8.1 Paper 8 8 Maintenance 8.1 Paper 8.1.1 Checking the paper Replenishment message If a tray has run out of paper during printing, load paper or change the paper tray. Load paper in the paper tray that is highlighted in color. Precautions regarding the use of paper Do not use the following types of paper. Not observing these precautions may lead to reduced print quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine. - OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if they are still blank) - Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer - Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper - Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time - Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes - Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface - Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper - Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing - Paper of a non-standard shape (paper that is not rectangular) - Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips - Paper with labels attached - Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached Paper storage Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. If the paper becomes damp, a paper jam may occur. Store the paper flat, not on its edge. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-3 8.1 Paper 8 8.1.2 Loading paper This section describes how to load paper into each tray. If printing stops due to the tray being empty, load paper into the tray. Printing restarts automatically. For the types of paper to be used, refer to page 12-2. Loading paper into trays 1 and 2 The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 1 and 2. The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 1. 0 When "Auto Detect" is selected on the "Paper" tab, the size of loaded paper is automatically detected. 1 Pull out tray 1. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the film. 2 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. % If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected. 3 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. 4 Close tray 1. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper]. Filmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-4 8.1 Paper 8 Loading paper into trays 3 and 4 The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 3 and 4. The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 3. 1 Pull out tray 3. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hand. 2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the tray. % Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % Do not load tray 3 with paper of a size other than that previously specified. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. % To change the paper size for tray 3, contact your service representative. 3 Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 3. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-5 8.1 Paper 8 Loading paper into the bypass tray 1 Open the bypass tray. % To load large-sized paper, pull out the tray extension. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hand. 2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as far as possible into the feed slot. % The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up. % When loading postcards: Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. To use postcards other than 4 e 6-size (A6-size), check the size of postcards to be used, and then select the size on the Custom Size screen before using them. % When using envelopes: Expel air from the envelopes, and then load them while holding the folds of the envelopes. Load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-6 8.1 Paper 8 % To load label sheets: Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. A label sheet consists of the printing surface, sticking layer, and pasteboard. Peel off the pasteboard, then you can stick the label to other objects. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. 4 Select the paper type. % To use label sheets, select [Thick 1]. % OHP transparencies can be printed only in black. Before selecting OHP transparencies, select [Black] in the Color tab. % If you select [4 e 6 w (A6 Card w)], the paper type is automatically set to [Thick 3]. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-7 8.1 Paper 8 Loading paper into the LCT The same procedures can be used to load paper into the Large capacity unit LU-301 and LU-204. The following procedure describes how to load paper into Large capacity unit LU-301. 0 To change the paper size, contact your service representative. 1 Open the upper door. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hand. 2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the tray. % Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces down. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % Do not load the LCT with paper of a size other than that previously specified. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-8 8.2 Consumables 8 8.2 Consumables 8.2.1 Checking comsumables Replacement message When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message appears at the top of the screen. For the replacement procedure, refer to the guidance or the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. For details on using the guidance, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. When the message appears, make a preparation and replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. When it is almost time to replace the Toner Cartridge, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears. When the message appears, prepare to replace the Toner Cartridge according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears. Replace them according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. - Do not replace any color other than the one indicated in the message in the touch panel. - For the Toner Cartridge, the machine stops operating after the message appears. Toner Cartridgebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-9 8.2 Consumables 8 Imaging Unit NOTICE Do not replace the Imaging Unit until a "Please replace following unit(s)." message appears. If you continue to use the drum unit while an advanced warning message is displayed, the following replacement message appears. Replace the drum unit according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit If a Toner Cartridge other than for black or the Imaging Unit is empty, printing can continue using black. Press [Continue], and then select the job to be printed. Replacement by user Replacement by service representative Replacement by user Replacement by service representativebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-10 8.2 Consumables 8 Checking consumables status In the Check Consumable Life screen, you can check the status (usage level) of consumables. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Check Consumable Life]. % To print the list of usage levels, press [Print List], then [Start] or the [Start] key. Viewing counters In the Meter Count screen, you can check the total number of prints since counting started. In the Coverage Rate screen, the consumed amount of toner can be viewed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Meter Count] ö [Check Details]. % To print the counter list, press [Print List], select paper, and then press the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-11 8.2 Consumables 8 % To display the Coverage Rate screen, press [Coverage Rate]. Checking the total number of pages printed Pressing Total Counter displays the total number of pages printed to date. Total Counterbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-12 8.3 Cleaning procedure 8 8.3 Cleaning procedure Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452) NOTICE Do not touch the slit glass. 1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner. 2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass cleaner. % Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the guide. Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) NOTICE Do not touch the slit glass (front). 1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner. 2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (front) cleaner. % Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the guide. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-13 8.3 Cleaning procedure 8 Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) NOTICE Do not touch the slit glass (back). 1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner. 2 Open the opening and closing guide. 3 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (back) cleaner. % Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the guide. Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller NOTICE Do not press the control panel hard, or the keys and touch panel may be damaged. % Wipe the surface using a soft, dry cloth.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-14 8.3 Cleaning procedure 8 Housing, document pad NOTICE Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad. % Wipe the surface using a soft cloth moistened with a mild household detergent.9 Troubleshootingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-2 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative) 9 9 Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting. 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative) If this message appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not resolved, perform the following operations, and then contact your service representative. Normally, the phone number and fax number of your service representative appear in the center of the screen. If a defective part can be separated in order to be able to continue operations after a problem has been detected, [Continue] or [Recover Data] is displayed. To continue operations, select any key. However, the problem has not been resolved, so contact your service representative immediately. Problems that cannot be corrected by the user 1 Write down the malfunction code in the Service Call screen. 2 Turn off the [sub power switch]. 3 Turn off the [main power switch].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-3 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative) 9 4 Unplug the machine. 5 Contact your service representative and inform them of the written down malfunction code.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-4 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 9.2 Troubleshooting table Simple troubleshooting The following explains simple troubleshooting procedures. If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your service representative. Description of problem Check points Remedy The machine does not start up when the [main power switch] is turned on Is power being supplied from the electrical outlet? Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet. Has the [sub power switch] been turned on? Turn on the [sub power switch]. Copying does not start Is the upper right-side door of the machine open? Securely close the upper rightside door of the machine. Is there any paper that matches the original? Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray. The printed output is too light Is the copy density set to [Light]? Press [Dark] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (p. 5-18) Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3) The printed output is too dark Is the copy density set to [Dark]? Press [Light] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (p. 5-18) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5) The printed image is blurry Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5) There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output There are streaks in the printed output Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (p. 8-13) Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass with the slit glass cleaner. (p. 8-12) Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (p. 8-14) Was the original printed on highly translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP transparencies? Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the original. (p. 3-5) Is a 2-sided original being copied? If a thin 2-sided original is being copied, the print on the back side may be reproduced on the front side of the copy. In the Background Removal screen, select a lighter background density. (p. 5-18) Is the electrostatic charger wire dirty? Use the charger-cleaning tool to clean the electrostatic charger. (p. 9-12)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-5 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 The image is printed at an angle Is the original positioned correctly? Correctly position the original against the document scales. (p. 3-5) Load the original into the ADF, and slide the adjustable lateral guides to fit the size of the original. (p. 3-4) Is the original incorrectly positioned in the ADF? If the original cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make copies by positioning the original on the original glass. (p. 3-5) Is the slit glass dirty (while using the ADF)? Clean the slit glass with the slit glass cleaner. (p. 8-12) Are the adjustable lateral guides incorrectly positioned against the edges of the paper? Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the paper. Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray? Flatten the paper before loading it. The printed page is curled Was paper that curls easily (as with recycled paper) used? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Replace with new dry paper. (p. 8-3) The edge of the printed image is dirty Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (p. 8-14) Was the selected paper size larger than the original? (With a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)) Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (p. 5-7) Is the size or orientation of the original different from that of the paper? (With a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)) Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the original. Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)? Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the original size to the selected paper size. Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (p. 5-7) Even though a paper jam was cleared, copies cannot be produced Is paper jammed at other locations? Remove any jammed paper from other locations. Printing with the "2-Sided > 1-Sided" or "2-Sided > 2-Sided" settings are not available Have settings been selected that cannot be combined? Check the combinations of the selected settings. Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with account track settings configured Did the message "Your account has reached its maximum allowance." appear? Contact your administrator. The original is not fed Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF. Is the original one that does not meet the specifications? Check that the original is one that can be loaded into the ADF. (p. 12-7) Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly. (p. 3-4) The Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 does not run. Is any power being supplied to the connector? Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector. Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-6 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90° Has the staple position been correctly specified? Specify the desired position for stapling. (p. 5-10) The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incorrectly positioned Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the sides of the paper? Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the paper so that there is no gap. Is the paper type configured correctly? Configure the paper type of the selected tray correctly. Though the authentication unit is connected with this machine sing a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in green A malfunction of the USB port of this machine is suspected. Turn off the main power of this machine, disconnect the USB cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Though the authentication unit is connected with the computer using a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in green MA malfunction of the USB port of your computer is suspected. Restart your computer. Has the authentication unit driver being installed correctly? Check that your computer is installed to the computer correctly. (p. 10-2) (p. 11-2) No notice sound is given when scanning is started or authentication is finished on this machine Has the notice sound being set to OFF on this machine? Set the notice sound to ON. (p. 10-2) When the "Failed to register" message appears on this machine where registration fails The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited per scanning. If scanning does not finish within the limited time, the corresponding message appears. For details on the scanning time, contact your service representative. To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to perform authentication and how to place your finger when scanning. (p. 10-2) During scanning, place the scanned part on the scanning section correctly, and do not move it until results have been obtained. If the scanned part is dusty or rough and dry when performing authentication, a correct image will not be able to be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Clean your finger, and then scan it again, or improve the rough and dry condition of your finger. If the scanned part is too thick or thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch (10 to 25 mm)), a correct image cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your finger deeply", or "placing your finger shallowly" on the scanning section. When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this machine where login fails When the "Failed to read data. Place your finger once again and click the [Start reading] button." message appears on the computer where registration has failed The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited to five seconds per scan. If scanning does not finish within five seconds, the corresponding message appears. Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-7 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Scanning does not start Have you placed your finger correctly on the authentication unit? Confirm how to perform authentication and how to place your finger when scanning. (p. 10-2) During scanning, place the scanned part on the scanning section correctly, and do not move it until results have been obtained. If the scanned part is dusty or rough and dry when performing authentication, a correct image will not be able to be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Clean your finger, and then scan it again, or improve the rough and dry condition of your finger. If the scanned part is too thick or thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch (10 to 25 mm)), a correct image cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your finger deeply", or "placing your finger shallowly" on the scanning section. Did you restart this machine after connecting the authentication unit to this machine? Turn off the main power of this machine, disconnect the USB cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Connecting the authentication unit to the computer starts the hardware uninstall wizard Is the USB port to which the authentication unit is connected the same as the one used when installing the driver? If you connect the authentication unit to a different USB port from the one used when installing the driver, the hardware uninstall wizard may start. Use the same USB port as the one used when installing the driver. When the "Failed to register" message appears on this machine where registration fails The scanning time of the authentication unit is limited to 10 seconds. If scanning does not finish within the limited time, the corresponding message appears. To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to place the IC card. (p. 11-2) When a message appears on the computer where registration fails When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this machine where login fails When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled Did you enter the correct password? Check the password, and then enter the correct one if not. Scanning does not start Did you restart this machine after connecting the authentication unit to this machine? Turn off the main power of this machine, disconnect the USB cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-8 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Main messages and their remedies If any message other than those listed below appears, perform the operation described in the message. Message Cause Remedy Originals left on original glass. The original has been left on the original glass. Remove the original from the original glass. Paper of matching size is not available. Select the paper size. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray. Either select paper of a different size or load paper of a suitable size. Place paper in Bypass Tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray. Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray. The original size cannot be detected Select the paper size. (1) The original is not positioned correctly. (2) An original with a nonstandard size or with a size too small to be detected is loaded. (1) Position the original correctly. (2) Select the correct paper size. The image will not fit in the selected paper size. Change the direction of the original The image does not fit in the paper. Turn the original 90° and load it. Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together are selected. Make copies using only one of the functions. The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove paper from the tray indicated by . Copy cannot be performed because the paper loading capacity of the output tray of the displayed Finisher or Job Separator reached the maximum. Remove all paper from the indicated tray. Enter the login user name and password and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. User authentication settings have been configured. Copies cannot be made unless a user name and correct password are entered. Enter the correct user name and password. (p. 4-8) Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. Account track settings have been configured. Copies cannot be made unless an account name and correct password are entered. Enter the correct account name and password. (p. 4-8) Your account has reached its maximum allowance. The limit on the number of pages that can be printed has been reached. Contact the administrator of the machine. The part indicated by is open. Ensure that it is properly closed. Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make copies. Make sure that all doors and covers of this machine and options are closed securely. Check covers. The exit cover of the finisher is open. Securely close the exit cover of the finisher. Install the Imaging Unit and close all doors The indicated Imaging Unit is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. [Install a toner cartridge.] The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. [Set the toner cartridge, and close all doors.] The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. Install the waste toner box and close all doors. The waste toner box is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. Incorrect Imaging Unit is installed. Install the correct Imaging Unit and close all doors. The correct Imaging Unit is not set. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-9 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper. Add paper. (p. 8-3) Toner (X) is low. Please when indicate. The toner for the indicated color is about to run out. Prepare to replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. Install toner cartridge (X) The toner is about to run out. Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. Toner is depleted Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance (explanation). Press the [Continue] button to continue the operations. Toner is depleted Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. No more staples. Replace the staple cartridge, or cancel stapling The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge. Misfeed detected. Remove paper according to the instructions. Since a paper jam occurred, the machine is unable to make copies. Clear the jammed paper. Empty hole-punch scrap box To continue the job, disable punching. (1) The punch scrap box is full. (2) The punch scrap box is not installed. (1) Throw punch scraps away from the punch scrap box. (2) Install the punch scrap box. Reset the following number of originals. XX After clearing a paper jam, it is necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF. Load the indicated original pages into the ADF. An internal error occurred. Open and then close the front door. If the trouble code appears again, contact your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Take a remedy according to the message displayed in the screen. If the problem is not resolved or released, inform your service representative of the malfunction code displayed in the screen. An internal error occurred. Turn the main switch OFF and ON. If the trouble code appears again, contact your Service Rep. Malfunction detected. Inform the service representative of the error code. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Inform your service representative of the code displayed in the screen. Clean the slit scan glass on the far left with a glass cleaner. Continuing using the machine in this condition may cause lines to appear in the output. The slit glass is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to clean it. Clean the slit glass on the left side of the machine with the glass cleaner. Continuing using the machine in this condition may cause lines to appear in the output. The slit glass (front) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to clean it. Clean the slit glass on the left side of the ADF with the glass cleaner. Continuing using the machine in this condition may cause lines to appear in the output. The slit glass (back) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to clean it. Message Cause Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-10 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen Now Downloading Program Data from the Firmware server. (1) CS Remote Care was activated by your service representative. (2) Internet ISW is being downloaded. Do not turn off the sub power switch while this message is displayed. After turning off the sub power switch, turn off the main power switch, and then contact your service representative. Authentication information entered is invalid, due to failed access attempts. Contact the administrator. The authentication information has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Contact the administrator of the machine. Due to failed access attempts, the current administrator password is invalid. The administrator password has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Turn the machine off, then on again. Turn off the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The job log has reached the maximum allowed. Contact the administrator. The write area of the job log has reached the maximum allowed. Obtain the job log using PageScope Web Connection. No Animation Guide data available. Contact your administrator. Animation guide data is not installed. For details on installing animation guide data, contact your service representative. Verify that external keyboard is properly connected. It may not be connected or multiple keyboards may be connected. The compact keyboard is not connected to this machine. Turn off the main power of this machine, connect the compact keyboard to this machine. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Message Cause Remedy Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, press this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this button to display the message, and then carry out the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. If the optional image controller is installed, press this icon to display the setting screen for the image controller.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-11 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Appears when the external memory (USB memory) is not connected. Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled. Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function. Icon Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-12 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated 9 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed images. If this occurs, follow the procedure described below to clean the electrostatic charger wire. 0 When replacing the waste toner box, follow the "Quick Guide" to clean the electrostatic charger wire. 1 Open the machine's lower front door. 2 Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Next, slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Repeat the above operations three times. 3 Securely insert the charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front door.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-13 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated 9 Cleaning the print head If the print head becomes dirty, print quality may be reduced. If this occurs, clean the print head according to the following procedure. 1 Pull out tray 1. 2 Remove the print head glass cleaning tool from tray 1. 3 Open the machine's lower front door. 4 Release the securing levers for the waste toner box, and then remove the waste toner box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-14 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated 9 5 Insert the print head glass cleaning tool into the print head cleaning opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back-and-forth movement two or three times. 6 Install the waste toner box. 7 Place back the print head glass cleaning tool to tray 1. 8 Close tray 1.10 Authentication unit (biometric type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-2 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10 Authentication unit (biometric type) This chapter describes the authentication unit (biometric type). 1. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 2. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) The authentication unit (biometric type) is a "biometrics (biometric authentication)" system that scans a finger vein pattern to perform personal authentication. Using the biometric authentication, you can log in to this machine where user authentication settings are configured in order to execute a print job. Place your forefinger straight so that your forefinger cushion slightly touches the hollow and protuberance part of the scanning section. Secure your middle finger and thumb on the both sides of the authentication unit to prevent your forefinger to be used for authentication from rotating. For details on how to place your forefinger on the authentication unit, refer to page 10-17. NOTICE If you change the authentication unit from AU-101 to AU-102, the users you registered with AU-101 cannot use AU-102. Connect AU-102 to this machine, and then register the users again. Do not place anything other than your finger on the scanning section during scanning operation. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Do not disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or computer during a scanning operation. Doing so may cause the system to become unstable. The status indicator LED and notice sound indicate the status of the authentication unit. *1 For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 *2 For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 1 2 Status indicator LEDs Status Lit in green Ready state or authentication is completed Flash in green During authentication or scanning operation Lit in red Authentication failed or scanning failed Unlit The authentication unit is not recognized Notice sound Status One short blip sound Scanning starts One short blip sound During a retry after authentication failed One short blip sound *1 /two short blip sounds *2 Authentication completed Two short blip sounds *1 / one short blip and one long beep sounds *2 Authentication failed One long beep sound *2 Scanning canceledbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-3 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 To use the authentication unit, first register the finger vein pattern of the user in this machine. The registered user, who is authenticated with the finger vein pattern, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with authentication. 10.1.1 Configuring this machine NOTICE User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine. This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], then [1 General Settings]. 2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK]. 3 Press [Yes], and then [OK]. 4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings]. 5 Press [1 General Settings]. 6 Press [Bio Authentication].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-4 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 7 Configure "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings". % For "Beep Sound", specify whether to give a "blip" sound when the finger vein pattern is scanned successfully. % For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration. 1-to-many authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing his or her finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Allows the user to log in by entering the user name and placing his or her finger. For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 10-17. 8 Press [OK] twice. 9 Press [2 Logoff Settings]. 10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with the authentication unit. 11 Press [OK]. 12 Press [Close] twice.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-5 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10.1.2 Registering a user The following two methods can be used to register a user. - Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine - Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user NOTICE The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data. Registering a user using the control panel of this machine 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings]. NOTICE [2 User Authentication Settings] is disabled when User Authentication is set to [OFF] in General Settings. 2 Press [2 User Registration]. 3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit]. 4 Press [Register Auth. Info.].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-6 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 5 Press [Edit]. 6 Place your finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern. % Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for each scanning. % After scanning the finger vein pattern, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press [Authentication Test]. % If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. 7 Press [Close] twice. 8 Enter the user name and password. 9 Configure function permission settings as required. 10 Press [OK]. 11 Press [Close]. Registering a user using Data Administrator To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator Bio Plugin. NOTICE Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-7 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information". NOTICE This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x". If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version]. 3 In "Plug-in information list:", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator. % This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x". Setup 1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine. 2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver). Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer. The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears. 3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)". 4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-8 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)". 6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next]. % When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the CD-ROM, and then click the [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-9 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 % Installation starts. 7 Click the [Close]. Installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin. Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe. 9 Select a language, and then click the [OK]. The installation program starts. 10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-10 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 11 Click the [Next]. 12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next]. 13 Click the [Install].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-11 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 14 Click the [Finish]. Installation of the Data Administrator Bio Plugin is completed, which completes the setup. User registration To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer, and also connect the computer to this machine via network. 1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit. % When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4. NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn the main power on. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator. NOTICE Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure. To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more. Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-12 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported. The Device Information window appears. % For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide. 5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-13 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK]. The User Registration window appears. 7 Enter the user name and password, select the "AU-101" or "AU-102" tab, and then click the [Register Auth. Info]. % Enter the E-mail address and other information as required.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-14 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 8 Register finger vein pattern. % Scan the finger vein patterns three times; reset the same finger and then press [Start Reading] for each scanning. % After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and click [Authentication Test]. % If the authentication test has succeeded, press [Register]. % If the authentication test has failed, place your finger on the authentication unit again, and click [Authentication Test]. % If the authentication has failed, click [Reset] to repeat the scanning process. For authentication unit AU-101 For authentication unit AU-102 9 Click the [Registration].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-15 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10 Click the [OK]. % Repeat steps 5 to 10 to register all users. 11 Click the [Export to the device]. % Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-16 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 12 Click the [Write]. % Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled. The registered user data is configured in this machine. 13 Click the [OK]. 14 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer. 15 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and turn the main power of this machine on. NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-17 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10.1.3 Logging in to this machine This section explains how to log in to this machine with the finger vein pattern authentication. - To use authentication unit (biometric type), register the finger vein pattern in advance. - If authentication fails frequently, finger vein pattern may not be registered correctly. Register the finger vein pattern again. - Authentication is carried out when you simply place your finger on the 1-to-many authentication. Authentication is carried out when you enter the user name and place your finger on the 1-to-1 authentication. - Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication unit. When 1-to-many authentication has been specified % Place your finger on the authentication unit. The basic settings screen appears. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-18 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified 1 Select [User Name], and enter the user name. 2 Place your finger on the authentication unit. The basic settings screen appears. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-10211 Authentication unit (IC card type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-2 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 11 Authentication unit (IC card type) This chapter describes the authentication unit (IC card type). 1. Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) The authentication unit (IC card type) is an "IC card authentication " system that reads the IC card to perform personal authentication. Using this system, you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this machine or execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. To use the authentication unit, first register the card ID of the user in this machine. The registered user, who is authenticated with the card ID, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with authentication. For details on how to place the IC card in the authentication unit, refer to the "Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]". NOTICE Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 must be installed inside the working table WT-506. Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication unit. Doing so may cause the system to become unstable. Do not leave the IC card within 1-9/16 inch (40 mm) of the card reader. 11.1.1 Configuring this machine NOTICE User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine. This device does not support external server authentication. For the [Public User] or [Account Track] settings, refer to page 7-31. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], then [General Settings]. 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-3 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK]. 3 Press [Yes], and then [OK]. 4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings]. 5 Press [1 General Settings]. 6 Press [Card Authentication]. 7 Configure "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings". % In "IC Card Type", specify the required IC card type. % For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration. Card Authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password. For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 11-15.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-4 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 8 Press [OK] twice. 9 Press [2 Logoff Settings]. 10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with the authentication unit. 11 Press [OK]. 12 Press [Close] twice. 11.1.2 Registering a user The following two methods can be used to register a user. - Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine - Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user NOTICE The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data. Registering a user using the control panel of this machine 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings]. 2 Press [2 User Registration]. 3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-5 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 4 Press [Register Auth. Info.]. 5 Press [Edit]. 6 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and press [OK]. 7 When message [Registration complete] appears, press [Close] twice. 8 Enter the user name and password. 9 Configure function permission settings as required. 10 Press [OK]. 11 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-6 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 Registering a user using Data Administrator To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. NOTICE Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide. Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information". NOTICE This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x". If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version]. 3 In "Plug-in information list", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator. % This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-7 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 Setup 1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine. 2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver). Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer. The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears. 3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)". 4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. 5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-8 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next]. % When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder in the CD-ROM, and click the [OK]. % Installation starts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-9 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 7 Click the [Close]. Installation of the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe. 9 Select a language, and then click the [OK]. The installation program starts. 10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation. 11 Click the [Next].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-10 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next]. 13 Click the [Install]. 14 Click the [Finish]. Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed, which completes the setup.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-11 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 User registration To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer, and also connect the computer to this machine via network. 1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit. % When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4. NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn the main power on. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator. NOTICE Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure. To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more. Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit. 4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported. The Device Information window appears. % For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User 's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-12 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add]. 6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK]. The User Registration window appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-13 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 7 Enter the user name and password, and select the "IC card authentication" tab. % Enter the E-mail address and other information as required. 8 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and click the [Start reading]. % If necessary, click [Card ID Input] to register the card ID. 9 Click the [OK]. % Repeat steps 5 to 12 to register all users.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-14 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 10 Click [Export to the device]. % Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data. 11 Click the [Write]. % Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled. The registered user data is configured in this machine. 12 Click the [OK]. 13 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer. 14 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and turn the main power switch of this machine on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-15 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged. 11.1.3 Logging in to this machine This section explains how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication. - To use authentication unit (IC card type), register the information recorded in the IC card in advance. - If authentication fails frequently, IC card information may not be registered properly. Register IC card information again. - When the IC Card authentication is enabled, a registered user is authenticated by simply placing the IC card. Authentication is carried out when you place the IC card and enter the password when both IC cards and passwords are used for authentication. - Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication unit. When IC card authentication is enabled % Place the IC card on the working table. The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-16 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled 1 Place the IC card on the working table. 2 Press [Password], and then enter the password. 3 Press either [Login] or the [Access] key. The basic settings screen appears.12 Specificationsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-2 12.1 Paper 12 12 Specifications This chapter describes the specifications of the paper, machine, and options. This product specification is subject to change without notice toward the improvement. 12.1 Paper Paper types and paper capacities *1 Paper where you do not print on both sides (for example, when something is already printed on the front side). *2 Fine and other special paper. *3 Paper where company names, preset text, and others are already printed. *4 Colored paper. *5 Paper that is registered as one of frequently used paper types. For paper weight and media adjustment settings, contact your service representative. Paper type Paper weight Paper capacity Plain paper Single Side Only *1 Special Paper *2 Letterhead *3 Colored Paper *4 User Paper 1 *5 User Paper 2 *5 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 150 sheets, Tray 1/2: 500 sheets Tray 3: 1,500 sheets, Tray 4: 1,000 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 3,000 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,500 sheets Thick 1 User Paper 3 *5 24-3/16 lb to 31-15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 100 sheets, Tray 1/2: 400 sheets Tray 3: 1,150 sheets, Tray 4: 750 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 2,500 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,000 sheets Thick 1+ User Paper 4 *5 32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 80 sheets, Tray 1/2: 280 sheets Tray 3: 800 sheets, Tray 4: 500 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,750 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,450 sheets Thick 2 User Paper 5 *5 42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 70 sheets, Tray 1/2: 250 sheets Tray 3: 700 sheets, Tray 4: 450 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,550 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,250 sheets Thick 3 User Paper 6 *5 55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 60 sheets, Tray 1/2: 200 sheets Tray 3: 600 sheets, Tray 4: 400 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,300 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,000 sheets Thick 4 68-3/8 lb to 79-13/16 lb (257 to 300 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 50 sheets Transparency - Bypass tray: 20 sheets Postcards - Bypass tray: 50 sheets Tray 3: 200 sheets * , Tray 4: 200 sheets * * Ask the service representative to change the setting. Envelope - Bypass tray: 10 sheets Label sheets - Bypass tray: 50 sheetsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-3 12.1 Paper 12 NOTICE Paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as OHP transparencies and colored paper. If the paper size and paper type have not been correctly specified, a paper jam may occur or poor image quality may result. When you select Plain Paper, Thick 1, Thick 1+, Thick 2, Thick 3, or Thick 4 for the bypass tray, you can select Duplex 2nd Side. Select Duplex 2nd Side when you load paper where something is printed on one side.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-4 12.2 Machine specifications 12 12.2 Machine specifications bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Specification Type Scanner, printer, desktop, or stand-alone Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning) Photo conductor OPC Light source White rare-gas fluorescent Copy system Laser electrostatic copying Developing system Dry 2-component HMT developing system Fusing system Belt fusing Resolution Scanning 600 dpi e 600 dpi Output 1,800 dpi e 600 dpi Originals Type Sheets, books (two-page spread), three-dimensional objects Size Max. 11 e17 (A3) Weight 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) (three-dimensional objects) Copying paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 )), Thick4 (68-3/8 lb to 79-13/16 lb (257 to 300 g/m2 )) * , Letterhead, colored paper, transparency * , postcard ** , envelope * , label sheet * , banner paper (33-13/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (127 to 210 g/m2 )) * 2 Sided: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick1/1+/2/3 (24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 to 256 g/m2 )) * Available for bypass tray. ** Available for bypass tray or tray 3/4. (When using tray 3/4, ask the service representative to change the setting.) Copy paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w to A5 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , 16K v, 8K w 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v * , A4 v to A5 v, 16K v *2 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 4 e 6 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , A6 card w, 16K w/v, 8K w Width: 3-9/16 to 12-1/4 (90 mm to 311.1 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 47-1/4 (139.7 mm to 1,200 mm) *1 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. *2 Banner Paper Width: 8-1/4 to 11-11/16 (210 to 297 mm) Length: 18 to 47-1/4 (457 to 1,200 mm) Number of sheets loaded in output tray Plain paper 250 sheets Thick 10 sheets Transparency 1 sheetbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-5 12.2 Machine specifications 12 Number of loadable sheets (8-1/2 e 11 (A4)) Tray 1 or 2 Plain paper: 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/550 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 400 sheets, Thick 1+: 280 sheets, Thick 2: 250 sheets, Thick 3: 200 sheets Tray 3 Plain paper: 1,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/1,650 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 1,150 sheets, Thick 1+: 800 sheets, Thick 2: 700 sheets, Thick 3: 600 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets Tray 4 Plain paper: 1,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/1,100 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 750 sheets, Thick 1+: 500 sheets, Thick 2: 450 sheets, Thick 3: 400 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets Bypass tray Plain paper: 150 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 100 sheets, Thick 1+: 80 sheets, Thick 2: 70 sheets, Thick 3: 60 sheets, Thick 4: 50 sheets, Transparency: 20 sheets, Postcard or label sheet: 50 sheets, Envelope: 10 sheets Warm-up time Period from the time the [main power switch] was turned on to the time [sub power switch] was turned on to get ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C)) C652/C652DS: 30 sec. or less C552/C552DS: 60 sec. or less C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 30 sec. or less) Period from the time [main power switch] was turned on to the time this machine is ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C)) C652/C652DS: 39 sec. or less C552/C552DS: 39 sec. or less C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 45 sec. or less) Warm-up time may vary depending on the operating environment and usage. Image chipping width Top edge 3/16 (4.2 mm) Bottom edge 1/8 (3.0 mm) Right edge 1/8 (3.0 mm) Left edge 1/8 (3.0 mm) First copy (When 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) printing) C652/C652DS Full color: 5.5 sec. or less Black: 3.8 sec. or less C552/C552DS Full color: 6.0 sec. or less Black: 4.3 sec. or less C452 Full color: 6.0 sec. or less Black: 4.8 sec. or less Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-6 12.2 Machine specifications 12 Copy speed (When 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) printing) Full Color (Simplex/Duplex) C652/C652DS Plain paper: 50 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 25 sheets/min. C552/C552DS Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick 2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. C452 Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. Black (Simplex/Duplex) C652/C652DS Plain paper: 65 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 25 sheets/min. C552/C552DS Plain paper: 55 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. C452 Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. Copy magnification Full size: 100.0% ± 0.5% Enlarge: 121.4%, 129.4%, 154.5%, or 200.0% (115.4%, 122.4%, 141.4%, or 200.0%) Reduce: 78.5%, 73.3%, 64.7%, or 50.0% (86.6%, 81.6%, 70.7%, or 50.0%) Manual: 25.0 to 400.0% (in 0.1% steps) Number of continuous copies 1 to 9999 sheets Density adjustment Copy density Manual density adjustment (9 levels) Background density Manual or automatic density adjustment (9 levels) Power supply North American model (inch): AC 120 V, 16 A, 60 Hz European model (cm): AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50/60 Hz Max. power consumption C652/C652DS: 2,100W C552/C552DS: 2,000 W C452: 2,000 W Size Width 25-9/16 e Depth 30-9/16 (excluding panel)/34-5/8 (including panel) e Height 45-1/2 (including ADF) (Width 650 mme Depth 777 mm (excluding panel)/879 mm (including panel) e Height 1,155 mm (including ADF)) Machine occupation dimensions C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS: Width 100-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16 (Width 2,554 mm e Depth 1,525 mm e Height 1,650 mm) The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-526) tray extension, paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is open. C452: Width 84-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16 (Width 2,148mm e Depth 1,525mm e Height1,650mm) The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-527) tray extension and paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is open. Memory size (hard disk capacity) 2,048 MB (250 GB) Weight bizhub C652/C552/C452 :Approx. 487-13/16 lb (Approx. 221 kg) bizhub C652DS/C552DS :Approx. 223 kg Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-7 12.2 Machine specifications 12 Automatic duplex unit Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452) Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) Specification Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 )) Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , 16K w/v, 8K w, 4 e 6 w Width: 3-15/16 to 12-1/4 (100 to 311.1 mm), Length: 5-13/16 to 18 (148 to 457.2 mm) *1 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Power supply Supply from machine Specification Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original Original types 1-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210 g/m2 )) 2-sided, mixed original Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128 g/m2 )) Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16. Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 60 W or less Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8 (Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 130 mm) Weight Approx. 35-1/4 lb (Approx. 16 kg) Specification Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original Original types 1-sided, 2-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210 g/m2 )) mixed original Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128 g/m2 )) Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16. Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 80 W or less Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8 (Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 129 mm) Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-8 12.3 Options 12 12.3 Options Large capacity unit LU-301 Large capacity unit LU-204 * The maximum number of loadable sheets for each paper size is 2,500 sheets (for 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) or 2,750 sheets (for 17 lb (64 g/m2 )). Specification Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 (210 to 256 g/m2 )) Paper size 8-1/2 e 11 v, A4 v Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 3,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/3,300 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 2,500 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,750 sheets, Thick 2: 1,550 sheets, Thick 3: 1,300 sheets Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 22W or less Size Width 14-7/16e Depth 20-13/16e Height 15-15/16 (Width 367 mm e Depth 528 mm e Height 405 mm) Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg) Specification Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 )) Paper size * 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3w, B4 w, A4 w/v Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 2,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/2,750 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 2,000 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,450 sheets, Thick 2: 1,250 sheets, Thick 3: 1,000 sheets Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 22W or less Size Width 24-3/4e Depth 21-7/8e Height 15-15/16 (Width 629 mm e Depth 556 mm e Height 405 mm) Weight Approx. 55-1/8 lb (Approx. 25 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-9 12.3 Options 12 Finisher FS-526 Specification Output tray Output tray 1, output tray 2 Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group * , Offset Sort * , Staple * * Fed into output tray 2 Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 to 90 g/m2 )) Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 to 300 g/m2 )), transparency, postcard, envelope, label sheet, letterhead paper, colored paper Staple: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )) Thick (24-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 to 209 g/m2 )) * * Can be used only as a cover page Paper size

(Main Tray) 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to A6 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 , 16K w/v, 8K w Width: 3-15/16 to 13 (100 to 330.2 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm) Staple: 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 v, 8 e 13 w*1 , 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K w/v, 8K w, Width: 7-3/16 to 13 (182 to 330 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm)

(Sub Tray) 13 e 19 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , 11 e 17 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Width: 3-15/16 to 13-1/16 (100 to 331 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm) *1 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Paper loading capacity < Output tray 2> Group/Sort 3,000 sheets *1 (11 e 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v) 1,500 sheets (12 e 18 w*2 , 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8 e 13 w*3 , 8K w) 500 sheets (5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w) *1 2,500 sheets when saddle stitcher SD-508 is installed. *2 12 e 18 is 304.8 e 457.2 mm that is one-size larger than A3. *3 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13- 1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Offset Group/Offset Sort When the length of paper is 5- 15/16 to 12-5/8 (150 mm to 320 mm) 300 sets When the length of paper is other than 5-15/16 to 12-5/8 (150 mm to 320 mm) 150 setsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-10 12.3 Options 12 Saddle stitcher SD-508 Staple 11 e 17 w, A3 w 2 sheets-9 sheets 50 sets 10 sheets-20 sheets 50 sets 21 sheets-30 sheets 30 sets 31 sheets-40 sheets 25 sets 41 sheets-50 sheets 20 sets Other than 11 e 17 w, A3 w 2 sheets-9 sheets 100 sets 10 sheets-20 sheets 50 sets 21 sheets-30 sheets 30 sets 31 sheets-40 sheets 25 sets 41 sheets-50 sheets 20 sets 51 sheets-60 sheets 15 sets 61 sheets-100 sheets 10 sets Paper loading capacity < Output tray 1> 100 sheets Maximum number of stapled sheets Plain paper (17 to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )) 100 sheets Shift amount 1-3/16 (30 mm) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 105 W or less (when all applicable options are installed) Size Width 28-1/2 (Main tray is pulled output: 33-7/16, Sub tray is pulled output: 34- 11/16) e Depth 27-15/16 e Height 40-3/8 (Width 723.8 (Main tray is pulled output: 848.8 mm, Sub tray is pulled output: 881.2 mm) mm e Depth 709.5 e Height 1,025 mm) Weight Approx. 132-1/4 lb (Approx. 60 kg) Consumables Staples MS-10A For EH-1028 (Product No. 1002 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit Specification Specification Feeding function Center Staple and Fold, Half-Fold, Tri-Fold (Belt conveyer feeding) Paper type Center Staple and Fold: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )) Half-Fold or Tri-Fold: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 ))bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-11 12.3 Options 12 * Not applicable to multi-function jobs (jobs with multiple functions combined). Punch kit PK-516 Paper size Center Staple and Fold, Half-Fold: 12 e 18 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w, A3w, B4w, A4w, 8K w Width: 8-1/4 to 12-3/8 (210 mm to 314 mm), length: 11 to 18-1/16 (279 mm to 458 mm) Tri-Fold: 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4w, 16K w Maximum number of sheets that can be centerstapled 20 sheets, 19 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) or 16 sheets (23-15/16 (90 g/m2 )) + Thick (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2 )) 1 sheet Maximum number of folded sheets Half-Fold: 3 sheets Tri-Fold: 3 sheets Number of sheets that can be loaded into the folding output tray Plain paper (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) * When the length of paper is 13 (330 mm) or more One sheet folded 20 sets Two sheets stapled and folded 18 sets Three sheets stapled and folded 15 sets Four sheets stapled 12 sets Five sheets stapled 8 sets Six to 15 sheets stapled 5 sets 16 to 20 sheets stapled 5 sets Tri-Fold - When the length of paper is 13 (330 mm) than less One sheet folded 10 sheets Two sheets stapled and folded 10 sets Three sheets stapled and folded 10 sets Four sheets stapled 5 sets Five sheets stapled 5 sets Six to 15 sheets stapled 5 sets 16 to 20 sheets stapled 4 sets Tri-Fold 20 sets Size Width 11-1/16e Depth 23-1/4e Height 20-7/8 (Width 281.3 mm e Depth 596.4 mm e Height 529.8 mm) Weight Approx. 49-13/16 lb (Approx. 22.6 kg), Approx. 8-3/8 lb (Approx. 3.8 kg) (Output tray) Consumables Staple MS-5C For EH-554 (Product No. 500 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit Power supply Supply from finisher Specification Specification Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes or 4 holes Paper type Plain paper (17-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 ))bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-12 12.3 Options 12 Job Separator JS-602 Z-Folding Unit ZU-606 Paper size "2-Hole" Punch setting: 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3w to A5w/v, 8 e 13 w* , 16K w/v, 8K w, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v "3-Hole"/"4-Hole" Punch settings: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w, 16K v * There are four types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Power supply Supply from finisher Size Width 5-3/4 e Depth 25-3/16e Height 9-3/16 (Width 146.2 mm e Depth 639.2 mm e Height 233.8 mm) Weight Approx. 9-15/16 lb (4.5 kg) Specification Specification Output tray Output tray 3 Feeding function Group, Sort Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) Paper size 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, 8 e 13 w* , A3 w to A5 w * There are five types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Paper loading capacity Plain paper (80 g/m2 ) 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w 100 sheets Other than 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w 50 sheets Size Width 13-7/16 e Depth 21-1/8 e Height 5-7/8 (Width 341 mm e Depth 537 mm e Height 149 mm) Weight Approx. 3-7/8 lb (Approx. 1.75 kg) Specification Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes, 4 holes Paper type when hole punching is selected Plain paper 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64g/m2 - 90g/m2 ) Paper size when hole punching is selected 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 × 13 w* , A3 w to A5 w/v * There are four types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Fold type Z-Fold Paper type when Z-folding is selected Plain paper (64g/m2 - 90g/m2 ) Paper size when Z-folding is selected 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w Power supply Supply from electrical outlet Size Width 6-11/16 e Depth 26 e Height 40-7/16 (Width 169.7 mm e Depth 660 mm e Height 1027.5 mm) Weight Approx. 99-3/16 lb (Approx. 45 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-13 12.3 Options 12 Post Inserter PI-505 Finisher FS-527 Specification Configuration 2 trays (upper and lower) Cover paper type Plain paper 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64-90g/m2 ), Thick 24-1/4 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 -209 g/m2 ) Cover paper size 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2/v, A4 w/v to A5 v, 16K w/v Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.1 mm) Length: 5-1/2 to 11-11/16 (139 mm to 297 mm) 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 8 e 13 w*1 , A3 w to 5 v, 16K w/v, 8K w, SRA4 w Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.1 mm) Length: 5-1/2 to 11-11/16 (139 mm to 457.2 mm) *1 There are four types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mm w, 8- 1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Paper loading capacity Plain paper 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ) 200 sheets for each tray Power supply Supply from finisher Size Width 20-1/8 e Depth 25 e 8-11/16 (Width 511 mm e Depth 635 mm e Height 220 mm) Weight Approx. 23-1/8 lb (Approx. 10.5 kg) Specification Output tray Output tray 1, Output tray 2 Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group*, Offset Sort*, Staple* * Fed into Output tray 2 Paper type Group/Sort: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper, banner paper Offset Group/ Offset Sort: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )) Staple: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 82-7/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 310 g/m2 ))* * There is a limit on the number of sheets. Paper size < Output tray 1 > 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w Width: 3-9/16 to 12/1/4 (90 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-1/2 to 47-1/4 (139.7 mm to 1200 mm) < Output tray 2 > Group/Sort: 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w Width: 3-15/16 to 12-1/4 (100 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-1/2 to 18 (139.7 mm to 457.2 mm) Offset Group / Offset Sort: 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to A5 w Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-7/8 to 18 (148.5 mm to 457.2 mm) Staple: 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to A5 v Width: 7-3/16 to 11-1/4 (182 mm to 297 mm), Length: 5-7/8 to 17(148.5 mm to 431.8 mm)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-14 12.3 Options 12 Saddle stitcher SD-509 Paper loading capacity < Output tray 1> Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 200 sheets Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper 20 sheets Paper loading height: 1-3/8 (35 mm) Paper loading capacity < Output tray 2> Group/Sort Plain paper (15- 15/16 lb to 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w or less 3000 sheets 8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more 1500 sheets 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w, A5 w or less 500 sheets Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper 20 sheets Offset Group / Offset Sort Plain paper (15- 15/16 lb to 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w or less 3000 sheets 8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more 1500 sheets 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w, A5 w or less 500 sheets Staple Plain paper (15- 15/16 lb to 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 2 sheets-9 sheets: 100 sets * * 8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more: 50 sets 10 sheets-20 sheets: 50 sets 21 sheets-30 sheets: 30 sets 31 sheets-40 sheets: 25 sets 41 sheets-50 sheets: 20 sets Paper loading height: 14-3/4 (375 mm) (8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w or less)/7-3/8 (187.5 mm) (8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more) Maximum number of folded sheets Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 50 sheets Thick (24-3/16 lb to 31-15/16 lb (91g/m2 to 120 g/m2 )): 30 sheets Thick (32-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (121 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 )): 15 sheets Example number of stapled sheets: Thick (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2 )) 2 sheets + Plain paper 23-15/16 lb (90 g/m2 ) 48 sheets Shift amount 1-/16 (30 mm) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 56 W or less Size Width 20-13/16 (25-7/8) e Depth 25-1/4 e Height 48-3/8 (Width 528 (658) mm e Depth 641 mm e Height 1025 (1087) mm) The numbers enclosed in parentheses ( ) indicate the values applied when the tray is pulled output Weight Approx. 92-5/8 lb (Approx. 42 kg) Consumables Staples SK-602 For EH-590 (Product No.505 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit Specification Specification Feeding function Center Staple and Fold, Half-Foldbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-15 12.3 Options 12 Punch Kit PK-517 Job Separator JS-504 Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) Thick 24-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 - 209 g/m2 )* * Can be used only as a cover page Paper size 12-1/4 × 18 w, 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 14 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w Width: 8-1/4 to 12-14 (210 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 11 to 18 (279.4 mm to 457.2 mm) Maximum number of sheets that can be centerstapled 15 sheets, 14 sheets (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ))+ 1 sheets 15-15/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 ) Maximum number of folded sheets 3 sheets Number of sheets that can be loaded into the folding output tray Number of stapled and folded sheets 1 sheets - 3 sheets 20 sets 4 sheets- 10 sheets 10 sets 11 sheets- 15 sheets 5 sets Size Width 9-7/16 e Depth 22-13/16 e Height 21 (Width 239 mm e Depth 579 mm e Height 534 mm) Weight Approx. 52-15/16 lb (Approx. 24 kg) Consumables Staples SK-602 For EH-280 (Product No.505 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 2 unit Power supply Supply from finisher FS-527 Specification Specification Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes or 4 holes Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 ) Paper size "2-Hole"/"3-Hole" Punch settings 11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w, 16K v Power supply Supply from finisher FS-527 Size Widht 2-5/16 e Depth 18-1/2 e Height 5-5/16 inch (Width 58 mm e Depth 470 mm e Height 135 mm) Weight Approx. 3-15/16 lb (Approx. 1.8 kg) Specification Output tray Output tray 1, Output tray 2 Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group, Offset Sort Paper type

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ))

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 24-3/16 lb to 72-1/16 lb (91 g/m2 - 271 g/m2 ), Transparency, Postcards, Label sheets, Envelope, Banner paper Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, Postcards, Banner Paper, 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 wbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-16 12.3 Options 12 Job Separator JS-603 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Paper loading capacity

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 50 sheets

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 150 sheets, Thick 24-3/16 lb to 72-1/16 lb (91 g/m2 - 271 g/m2 ), Transparency, Postcards, Label sheets: 20 sheets Envelope: 10 sheets Banner Paper: 1 sheets Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 40 W or less Shift amount 1-3/16 (30 mm) Offset function

Plain paper, Thick 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w Size Width 16-1/4 (413 mm)/21-8/5 (550 mm) (when tray extension is pulled out) e Depth 18-3/4 (477 mm) e Height 5-1/16 (129 mm) Weight Approx. 11-1/4 lb (Approx. 5 kg) Specification Specification Output tray Output tray 3 Feeding function Group, Sort Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 g/m2 -256 g/m2 ), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheets, Letterhead Paper Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w to A5 w Paper loading capacity Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 100 sheets, Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheets, Letterhead Paper: 10 sheets Paper loading height: 7/8 (22 mm) Size Width 14-7/16 e Depth 20-13/16 e Height 15-15/16 inch (Width 165 mm e Depth 389 mm e Height 63 mm) Weight Approx. 2-3/16 lb (Approx. 1 kg) Specification Name AU-101 Applied finger width 3/8 to 1 (10 to 25 mm) Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Approx. 3-1/16 (W) e 3-3/4 (D) e 2-3/16 (H) (Approx. 78 mm (W) e 95 mm (D) e 55 mm (H)) Weight Approx. 5/16 lb (Approx. 150 g) (excluding USB cable) Max. power consumption (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA System conditions (during operation) Ambient temperature 50 ºF to 95 ºF (10 ºC to 35 ºC) Humidity 10% to 80% (No dew condensation) System conditions (during non-operation) Ambient temperature 14 ºF to 140 ºF (-10 ºC to 60 ºC) Humidity 10% to 80% (No dew condensation)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-17 12.3 Options 12 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more HDD Free space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2) Windows Vista Business/Enterprise Specification Specification Name AU-102 Biometric sensor system Transmission-type optical system Verification time Approx. 1 sec. or less Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Approx. 2-5/16 (W) e 3-1/4 (D) e 2-15/16 (H) (Approx. 59 mm (W) e 82 mm (D) e 74 mm (H)) Weight Approx. 3/16 (96 g) (excluding USB cable) Max. power consumption (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA System conditions (during operation) Ambient temperature 41 ºF to 95 ºF (5 ºC to 35 ºC) Humidity 20% to 80% (No dew condensation) System conditions (during non-operation) Ambient temperature 32 ºF to 122 ºF (0 ºC to 50 ºC) Humidity 20% to 80% (No dew condensation) Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more HDD Free space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2) Windows Vista Business/Enterprise Specification Name AU-201 Dimensions Approx. 3-5/8 (W) e 2-1/2 (D) e 5/8 (H) (Approx. 92 mm (W) e 64 mm (D) e 16 mm (H)) Weight Approx. 1/4 lb (Approx. 120 g) Power supply Power received from USB portbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-18 12.3 Options 12 System conditions (during operation) Ambient temperature 32 ºF to 104 ºF (0 ºC to 40 ºC) Humidity 20% to 85% (No dew condensation) System conditions (during non-operation) Ambient temperature -4 ºF to 122 ºF (-20 ºC to 50 ºC) Humidity 20% to 85% (No dew condensation) Radio law division Self-guided read-write communication facility Applicable card ISO 14443 TypeA, FeliCa-based noncontact IC card, HID iClass Acquired standard VCCI class B Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more HDD Free space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2) Windows Vista Business/Enterprise Specification13 Appendixbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-2 13.1 Colors 13 13 Appendix 13.1 Colors Hue, brightness, and saturation Color has three elements: hue, brightness, and saturation. These are referred to as three attributes of colors and all colors are created by combinations these elements. You can adjust the hue, brightness, and saturation in 19 levels. What is hue? Everybody has an idea of what "hue" an object has, for example, an apple is red, a lemon is yellow, and the sky is blue. "Hue" is the tint by which the color of an object is classified as red, yellow, blue, etc. What is brightness? "Brightness" is the degree of lightness in a color, as compared with another color, which makes it a light color or a dark color. For example, when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a grapefruit, it is obvious that the yellow of the lemon is brighter. But what about when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the red of a bean? Obviously, the yellow of the lemon is brighter. "Brightness" is this degree of lightness that enables comparison regardless of the hue.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-3 13.1 Colors 13 What is saturation? What makes the difference between the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a pear? By saying that the lemon is a more vivid yellow and the pear is a duller yellow, the difference between the two colors is stated in terms of "saturation", as opposed to "brightness". As opposed to hue and brightness, "saturation" is the characteristic that indicates the degree of vividness. Hue Brightness Saturationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-4 13.1 Colors 13 Red, green, and blue This machine allows you to adjust red, green, and blue in 19 levels. Red Green Bulebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-5 13.2 Image quality 13 13.2 Image quality Contrast, copy density, and sharpness Contrast: You can finely adjust an image in between soft/smooth and crisp. Copy density: You can finely adjust the shading of an image. Sharpness: You can adjust the amount of contours in text and images. You can adjust the contrast and copy density in 19 levels and the sharpness in 7 levels. Contrast Copy Density Sharpnessbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-6 13.2 Image quality 13 Color balance (CMYK) Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in the copy. You can adjust the color balance in 19 levels. Yellow Bule Magenta Red Green Cyan Blackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-7 13.3 Glossary 13 13.3 Glossary The following describes the terms used in Copy mode. Term Description ADF The acronym for automatic 2-sided document feeder, which automatically scans originals. (ADF = Automatic document feeder) AE Level Adjustment Function that adjusts the background of the original. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. (AE = Auto Exposure) APS The acronym for Auto Paper Select. (APS = Auto Paper Select) ATS Function that automatically switches trays. (ATS=Auto Tray Switch) Auto Paper Function that detects the size of the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, and automatically selects paper of the same size if it is set to Full Size or selects the paper size appropriate to the specified zoom ratio. Auto Zoom Function that automatically selects the appropriate zoom ratio when you place an original in the ADF or on the original glass, and selects the paper size. Background Color Function that copies the original using one of the 18 colors available for the background color (blank areas). Background Removal Function that adjusts the background density of the original with a colored background. Select a background removal method and level to copy the original. Binding Position Function that allows you to specify the position of the page margin in one side of the loaded original. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making a 2-sided copy from a 1-sided original or when making a 1-sided copy from a 2-sided original. Blue Function that adjusts the level of blue in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the blue of water or the sky. Brightness Function that makes the image either lighter or darker. Center Staple & Fold Function that folds the copies in half and staples them together in the center. Change Tray Settings Function that copies the original with a paper size not specified in the paper tray or copies it on paper other than plain paper. Color Function that copies the original in specified colors. Using the 2 Color function, you can copy in two colors: specified color and black. Color Adjust Function that adjusts the color copy image quality to match the original image. Color Balance Function that adjusts the balance in the concentration for each of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). You can finely adjust the individual color balance in 19 levels between -3 and +3. Combine Originals Function that arranges reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single copy page. You can select , "2in1", "4in1", or "8in1" depending on the number of pages to be combined. Contrast Function that adjusts the contrast between light and dark. Copy Density Function that allows you to finely adjust the copy density in 19 levels between - 3 and +3. Copy Protect Function that prints hidden text to prevent unauthorized copying. Copying a copy-protected document repeatedly prints hidden text in all pages more clearly than the original to prove the user that it is a copied document. Cover Sheet Function that attaches a sheet in the specified paper tray as a cover page. Density Function that adjusts the density of the print image in nine levels. Duplex 2nd Side Function to use when copying on paper that has already been printed on one side. Duplex/Combine Function to specify the scanning side of the original and the printing side of the paper to be 1-sided or 2-sided. Edit Color Function that configures the image according to the objectives of copy editing. Finishing Allows you to select how to sort or finish copies when feeding them into the output tray.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-8 13.3 Glossary 13 Finishing Preview Function that allows you to check the finishing status with a preview image before printing. Finishing Program Allows you to select a preset offset or finishing method. Glossy Function that improves the glossy level of an image. Green Function that adjusts the level of green in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the green of forests and trees. Group (Access permission) Function that limits the addresses that can be accessed by each user in order to assure security. Group (Copy or Finishing) Function that prints copies in pages. This function first prints the specified number of copies of the first page, and then prints the second page in the same way. Half-Fold Function that folds printed paper in half. Hue Function that adjusts the hue level to make the image either more reddish or more bluish. Manual Function that enlarges or reduces the loaded original with the zoom ratio specified using the keypad, and copies it on paper. Minimal This setting slightly reduces the image of the original and copies it at the center of the paper. Mirror Image Function that produces a copy in the mirror image of the original. Mixed Original Function that detects the size of each original page and prints a copy on paper of the appropriate size when loading originals in different page sizes into the ADF. Neg./Pos. Reverse Function that copies the original with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image reversed. Offset Function that sorts copies. Original Direction Function that allows you to configure the orientation of the original that was placed in the ADF or on the original glass. Original Type Function that allows you to select the desired functions according to the original text or image type and adjust it to obtain better image quality. Paper Allows you to configure the type and the size of the paper to be printed on. Proof Copy Function that prints a sample copy and stops printing temporarily before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies. Punch Function that punches copies for filing. Red Function that adjusts the level of red in the image, for example, if you wish to redden skin tones. Saturation That adjusts the degree of vividness of the colors in the image. Save in User BOX Function that temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can be recalled later and used again. Separate Scan Function that divides the original into multiple parts for scanning when the number of original pages exceeds the maximum (100 pages) that can be loaded into the ADF. You can scan the original and batch-copies it as one copy job. You can also load the original on the original glass or switch to the ADF during scanning. Sharpness Function that emphasizes the edges of text so that it can be read more easily. This function also enables you to adjust the original image. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Allows you to configure editing functions according to your copying requirement. Sort Function that prints a document in sets of copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished. Staple Function that staples copies. Text Enhancement Function that allows you to configure the reproduction quality of the text when copying originals consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs (text with a background). Term Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-9 13.3 Glossary 13 Transparency Interleave Function that inserts a blank sheet between transparency films each time a transparency film is copied. This function prevents transparency films from sticking together. Tri-Fold Function that tri-folds printed paper. Zoom Function that changes the zoom ratio of the copy. Term Description14 Indexbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-2 14.1 Index by item 14 14 Index 14.1 Index by item Numerics 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment .................................7-18 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...............................7-19 A Access .........................................................................4-8 Accessibility ..............................................................4-12 Account track ..............................................................4-8 Account track settings ..............................................7-37 ADF ..............................................................................2-7 Adjusting gradation ...................................................7-21 Adjusting the center staple position ..........................7-14 Adjusting the half-fold position .................................7-15 Adjusting the punch edge sensor .............................7-17 Adjusting the punch horizontal position ....................7-16 Adjusting the punch resistance loop .........................7-17 Adjusting the punch vertical position ........................7-16 Adjusting the tri-fold positions ..................................7-15 Administrator password ............................................7-49 Administrator security levels .....................................7-50 Administrator settings .................................................7-2 Administrator/machine settings ................................7-29 Advanced preview .....................................................4-19 Application settings ...................................................5-20 Authentication device settings ..................................7-40 Authentication method ..............................................7-40 Authentication unit ..............................................2-2, 2-5 Authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................10-2, 12-16, 12-17 Authentication unit (IC card type) ..................11-2, 12-17 Automatic duplex unit .......................................2-7, 12-7 B Background color ......................................................5-31 Basic tab ...................................................................2-16 Biometric type ...........................................................10-2 Blank page print settings ..........................................7-26 Blue ...........................................................................13-4 Book copy .................................................................5-33 Book copy/repeat ......................................................5-33 Booklet ......................................................................5-40 Booklet original .........................................................5-36 Brightness .................................................................13-2 Brightness adjustment dial ........................................2-14 Bypass tray .................................................................2-7 Bypass tray door .........................................................2-7 C C ................................................................................4-17 Centering ...................................................................7-13 Centering (duplex 2nd side) ......................................7-13 Changing E-mail addresses ......................................6-14 Changing icons ..........................................................6-15 Changing passwords .................................................6-13 Charger-cleaning tool ................................................2-11 Checking comsumables ..............................................8-8 Checking job settings ................................................2-16 Checking job settings. ...............................................5-64 Checking the total number of pages printed .............8-11 Cleaning procedure ...................................................8-12 CMYK ........................................................................13-6 Color ............................................................................5-4 Color adjustment .......................................................5-31 Color balance ............................................................13-6 Color registration adjustment ....................................7-20 Colors ........................................................................13-2 Configuring the basic settings .....................................5-3 Contrast .....................................................................13-5 Control panel .................................. 2-7, 2-14, 4-2, 8-13 Copier settings ................................................. 6-8, 7-43 Copy density .............................................................13-5 Copy function ..............................................................5-2 Copy protection .........................................................5-48 Copying .......................................................................4-5 Copying mixed originals ............................................5-16 Cover sheet ...............................................................5-22 Coverage rate ............................................................8-10 Custom display settings ..............................................6-6 Custom size .................................................................5-6 D Data indicator ............................................................2-14 Date/time ...................................................................5-44 Date/time settings .......................................................7-5 Daylight saving time ....................................................7-6 Default bypass paper type setting ............................7-27 Document pad ...........................................................8-14 Driver password encryption setting ...........................7-57 Duplex/Combine ..........................................................5-8 E Editing colors .............................................................5-29 Editing pages .............................................................5-21 Eject assist lever ........................................................2-25 Electrostatic charger wire ..........................................9-12 Enhanced security mode ...........................................7-54 Enlarge Display ..........................................................4-14 Erasing .......................................................................5-41 Erasing frames ...........................................................5-41bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-3 14.1 Index by item 14 Erasing non-image areas ..........................................5-42 Expert adjustment .......................................................7-9 External server settings .............................................7-39 F Fax kit ..................................................................2-2, 2-6 Fax multi line ...............................................................2-2 Fax settings ...............................................................7-46 Fax/Scan .....................................................................4-5 Fax/scan settings ......................................................6-11 Filter .............................................................................2-9 Finisher ......................... 2-2, 2-3, 2-6, 2-18, 2-23, 12-9 Finisher connector .......................................................2-9 Finishing ....................................................................5-10 Folding and binding ...................................................5-10 Front door ..............................................2-18, 2-21, 2-24 Function keys ............................................................2-14 Function management settings .................................7-56 Functions/settings display area ................................2-16 Fusing unit .................................................................2-11 Fusing unit cover lever ..............................................2-11 G General settings ........................................................7-32 Green .........................................................................13-4 Grouping ...................................................................5-10 Guidance ...................................................................4-15 Guide lever ............................................2-18, 2-21, 2-24 H HDD settings .............................................................7-55 Header/footer ............................................................5-53 Hide Personal Information (MIB) ...............................7-52 Horizontal transport unit cover ........................2-18, 2-24 Housing .....................................................................8-14 Hue ............................................................................13-2 I IC card type ...............................................................11-2 Icon/shortcut key display area ..................................2-16 Icons ..........................................................................9-10 Image adjustment ......................................................5-39 Image controller ..................................................2-2, 2-5 Image quality .............................................................13-5 Image Repeat ............................................................5-34 Imaging unit ...............................................................2-11 Imaging unit release lever .........................................2-11 Inserting images ........................................................5-24 Inserting sheets .........................................................5-23 Inside of the main body .............................................2-11 Interleaving OHP transparencies ...............................5-21 Internal controller port .................................................2-9 Interrupt .......................................................................4-4 J Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) ...........2-9 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) ...........2-9 Jam removal cover ....................................................2-26 Jam removal dial ............................................ 2-11, 2-18 Job list .......................................................................2-16 Job Separator ................. 2-3, 2-6, 12-12, 12-15, 12-16 Job separator cover ..................................................2-20 Job Separator JS-504 ...............................................2-25 Job separator JS-602 ................................................2-20 Job Separator JS-603 ...............................................2-23 K Keypad ......................................................................2-14 L Large capacity unit ......................... 2-2, 2-5, 2-26, 12-8 Lateral guide ................................................................2-7 Leading edge adjustment ..........................................7-13 Leading edge adjustment (duplex side 2) .................7-13 Left panel ........................................................ 2-16, 5-61 Left-side cover .............................................................2-7 Left-side cover release levert ......................................2-7 License settings .........................................................7-58 Limiting access to destinations .................................7-39 List/counter ...............................................................7-22 Listing jobs ................................................................5-62 Loading paper .............................................................8-3 Loading paper into the bypass tray .............................8-5 Loading paper into the LCT .........................................8-7 Loading paper into trays 1 and 2 ................................8-3 Loading paper into trays 3 and 4 ................................8-4 Local interface kit ............................................... 2-2, 2-6 Lower front door ..........................................................2-7 Lower right-side door ..................................................2-7 Lower right-side door release lever .............................2-8 Lower Tray .................................................................2-22 Lower tray paper guide .............................................2-22 M Machine specifications ..............................................12-4 Main power indicator .................................................2-14 Main power switch ......................................................2-7 Maintenance ................................................................8-2 Media adjustment ......................................................7-14 Message display area ................................................2-16 Meter count ...............................................................8-10 Mirror image ..............................................................5-30 Mode Memory .............................................................4-7 Mount kit ............................................................. 2-2, 2-5 N Negative-positive reversal .........................................5-29 Network connector (10Base-T/100BaseTX/1000Base-T) ...........................2-9 Network settings .......................................................7-42 O Offsetting ...................................................................5-10 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........7-59 Options ............................................................. 2-2, 12-8 Original glass ........................................ 2-11, 8-12, 8-13bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-4 14.1 Index by item 14 Original glass cleaner ................................................2-11 Original output tray ......................................................2-7 Original scales ...........................................................2-11 Original setting ..........................................................5-15 Original tray .................................................................2-7 Output belt ................................................................2-18 Output settings ............................................................7-4 Output tray ....................................... 2-2, 2-5, 2-7, 2-18 Output tray 1 .........................................2-18, 2-24, 2-25 Output tray 2 .........................................2-18, 2-24, 2-25 Output tray switch .....................................................2-18 Outside of the main body (front) .................................2-7 Outside of the main body (rear) ...................................2-9 Overlay ......................................................................5-55 Overlaying registered images ....................................5-56 Ozone filter ..................................................................2-9 P Page margin ..............................................................5-37 Page number .............................................................5-45 Page number print position settings .........................7-28 Paper .........................................................5-5, 8-2, 12-2 Paper capacities ........................................................12-2 Paper types ...............................................................12-2 Paper-empty indicator ......................................2-7, 2-26 Password Copy .........................................................5-50 Placing originals ..........................................................3-4 Post Inserter ............................... 2-3, 2-22, 5-12, 12-13 Post inserter control panel ..............................2-22, 5-12 Poster mode ..............................................................5-35 Power cord ..................................................................2-9 Power Save ...............................................................4-11 Power save settings ....................................................7-3 Power switch for dehumidifying heater .......................2-9 Print head ..................................................................9-13 Print head glass cleaning tool ...................................2-11 Print without authentication ......................................7-38 Printer settings ................................................6-12, 7-45 Printing counter list ...................................................7-38 Program jobs .............................................................5-27 Proof copy .................................................................4-18 Punch kit .................................... 2-2, 2-18, 2-23, 12-11 Punch kit PK-516 ......................................................2-18 Punch Kit PK-517 ......................................................2-23 Punch scrap box ...................................2-19, 2-21, 2-24 Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor .................................7-19 Punching ...................................................................5-10 Q Quality/density ..........................................................5-18 Quick Copy tab .........................................................2-16 R Red ............................................................................13-4 Register Authentication Information ..........................6-16 Registering one-touch destinations or User Boxes ................................................................7-30 Release lever .............................................................2-26 Replacement message ................................................8-8 Replenishment message .............................................8-2 Reset ...........................................................................4-4 Reset settings ............................................................7-23 Restricting user accesses ...........................................7-8 Reverse automatic document feeder ........................12-7 RS-232C port ..............................................................2-9 S Saddle stitcher ..................... 2-2, 2-3, 2-6, 2-18, 12-10 Saddle stitcher SD-508 .............................................2-18 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 .............................................2-23 Saturation ..................................................................13-2 Saving in User Boxes ................................................5-60 Scan to authorized folder settings ............................7-41 Scan to home settings ...............................................7-41 Security details ..........................................................7-51 Security kit .......................................................... 2-2, 2-6 Security settings ........................................................7-49 Separate scan ...........................................................5-13 Separating chapters ..................................................5-26 Service call ..................................................................9-2 Settings common to user and account track authentication ............................................................7-41 Sharpness ..................................................................13-5 Skip job operation settings ........................................7-26 Sorting .......................................................................5-10 Specifications ............................................................12-2 Stamp ........................................................................5-47 Stamp repetition ........................................................5-51 Stamp settings ............................................... 7-25, 7-57 Stamp unit .......................................................... 2-3, 2-6 Stamp/composition ...................................................5-43 Staple cartridge .........................................................2-25 Staple holder .............................................................2-24 Staple replacement door ...........................................2-18 Stapler .......................................................................2-24 Stapling .....................................................................5-10 Start .............................................................................4-4 Status indicator ...........................................................2-7 Stop .............................................................................4-4 Stylus pen ..................................................................2-14 Sub power switch ............................................. 2-7, 2-14 System connection ....................................................7-47 System settings .................................................. 6-3, 7-3 T Take-up roller ............................................................8-13 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) ..................................2-9 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) ..................................2-9 Toner cartridges ........................................................2-11 Toner supply indicators .............................................2-16 Total counter ...............................................................2-7 Touch panel .................................................... 2-14, 2-16 Touch pen ..................................................................2-14 Tray 1 ...........................................................................2-7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-5 14.1 Index by item 14 Tray 2 ..........................................................................2-7 Tray 3 ..........................................................................2-7 Tray 4 ..........................................................................2-7 Tray extension ...........................................................2-25 Troubleshooting ..........................................................9-2 Troubleshooting table .................................................9-4 Turning off automatic rotation ...................................5-14 U Upper door ................................................................2-26 Upper front door ..........................................................2-7 Upper right-side door ..................................................2-7 Upper right-side door release lever .............................2-8 Upper Tray ................................................................2-22 Upper Tray paper guide ............................................2-22 Upper unit release lever ............................................2-22 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 ............................2-7, 2-9 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 ....................................2-9 User authentication .....................................................4-8 User authentication settings .....................................7-34 User authentication/account track ............................7-31 User Box ......................................................................4-5 User Box administrator setting .................................7-49 User Box settings ......................................................7-24 User settings ...............................................................6-2 Utility/Counter .............................................................4-6 V Video interface kit ........................................................2-2 W Waste toner box ........................................................2-11 Watermark .................................................................5-54 Weekly timer setting ....................................................7-7 Wide paper ..................................................................5-6 Working table ......................................................2-2, 2-5 Z Z folding unit .................................................2-21, 12-12 Z-folded original ........................................................5-17 Zoom .................................................................5-7, 5-59bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-6 14.2 Index by button 14 14.2 Index by button Numerics 1-Sided > 1-Sided .......................................................5-8 1-Sided > 2-Sided .......................................................5-8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment .................................7-18 2 Color .........................................................................5-4 2/4/8 Repeat ..............................................................5-35 2in1 ..............................................................................5-9 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...............................7-19 2-Sided > 1-Sided .......................................................5-8 2-Sided > 2-Sided .......................................................5-8 4in1/8in1 ......................................................................5-9 A Access .........................................................................4-8 Accessibility ..............................................................4-12 Account Name ...................................................4-9, 7-35 Account Track ...........................................................7-32 Account Track Counter .............................................7-38 Account Track Input Method ....................................7-32 Account Track Registration .......................................7-37 Account Track Settings .............................................7-37 Administrative Settings .............................................7-34 Administrator Password ............................................7-49 Administrator Registration .........................................7-29 Administrator Security Levels ...................................7-50 Administrator Settings .........................................4-6, 7-2 Administrator/Machine Settings ................................7-29 AE Level Adjustment ...........................................6-3, 7-9 All Jobs ......................................................................5-63 Application ................................................................5-20 Apply Stamps ............................................................7-57 Auth.-info.registrieren ................................................7-35 Authentication Device Settings .................................7-40 Auto .............................................................................5-7 Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple .........................6-8 Auto Color ...................................................................5-4 Auto Color Level Adjust. ..............................................6-3 Auto Detect ...............................................................5-34 Auto Paper Select for Small Original ...........................6-4 Auto Prefix/Suffix setting ...........................................7-47 Auto Reset .................................................................7-23 Auto Reset Confirmation ...........................................4-13 Auto Rotate OFF .......................................................5-14 Auto Sort/Group Selection ..........................................6-8 Auto Tray Selection Settings .......................................6-3 Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF ...........................................6-3 Auto Zoom (ADF) ...............................................6-8, 7-43 Auto Zoom (Platen) ............................................6-8, 7-43 Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet ................................6-8 Automatic Image Rotation .................................6-9, 7-43 B Back (Blank) ..............................................................5-22 Back (Copy) ...............................................................5-22 Background Color .....................................................5-31 Background Removal ................................................5-19 Banner Printing ............................................................4-6 Basic ............................................................................5-3 Binding Position ..................................... 5-8, 5-15, 5-34 Bio Authentication .....................................................7-40 Black ............................................................................5-4 Blank ..........................................................................5-24 Blank Page Print Settings ................................. 6-4, 7-26 Blue ...........................................................................5-32 Book Copy .................................................................5-33 Book Copy/Repeat ....................................................5-33 Book Spread ..............................................................5-33 Booklet ......................................................................5-40 Booklet Original .........................................................5-36 Bottom .......................................................................5-41 Brightness .................................................................5-32 Bypass Tray .................................................................5-5 C C ................................................................................4-17 Card Authentication ...................................................7-40 Card Copy .................................................................5-59 Card Shot Settings ......................................................6-9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................7-48 Center Erase ..............................................................5-34 Center Staple & Fold .................................................5-40 Center Staple Position ...............................................7-14 Center Zoom .............................................................5-39 Centering ........................................................ 5-39, 7-13 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) ......................................7-13 Change E-Mail Address .............................................6-14 Change Icon ..............................................................6-15 Change Password .....................................................6-13 Change Setting ..........................................................4-20 Change Size ................................................................5-6 Change Tray Settings ..................................................5-5 Chapter Paper ...........................................................5-26 Chapters ....................................................................5-26 Check Consumable Life ..............................................4-6 Check Details ............................................................5-61 Check Job ...................................................... 5-61, 5-64 Check Job Set. ..........................................................5-63 Check Program Settings .............................................4-7 Check/Change Temporarily .......................................5-53 Color ................................................................. 5-4, 5-55 Color Adjustment .......................................................5-31 Color Balance ............................................................5-32 Color Registration Adjust ............................... 7-11, 7-20 Color Selection Settings ..............................................6-6 Composition ..............................................................5-56 Confidential Document Access Method ....................7-52 Consumables Replace/Processing Procedure ..........4-16 Contrast .....................................................................5-32bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-7 14.2 Index by button 14 Copied Paper ............................................................5-19 Copier Settings ..........................................6-6, 6-8, 7-43 Copy ..................................................................4-5, 5-23 Copy Card Settings ...................................................7-43 Copy Density .............................................................5-32 Copy Guard ...............................................................5-49 Copy Insert ................................................................5-26 Copy Program Lock Settings ......................................7-8 Copy Protect .............................................................5-48 Copy Screen ................................................................6-6 Counter Details ................................................7-36, 7-38 Cover Sheet .....................................................5-22, 5-40 Coverage Rate ..........................................................8-10 Current Jobs ..............................................................5-63 Custom Display Settings .............................................6-6 Custom Size ................................................................5-6 D Date Format ..............................................................5-44 Date Settings ...............................................................7-7 Date/Time ......................... 5-44, 5-48, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52 Date/Time Settings ......................................................7-5 Daylight Saving Time ...................................................7-6 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ..........................7-27 Default Copy Settings .................................................6-8 Default Enlarge Display Settings .................................6-8 Default Function Permission .....................................7-34 Default Operation Selection ......................................7-34 Default Tab ..................................................................6-6 Default Tab Density Settings .......................................6-6 Delete ..............................................................5-61, 5-63 Delete Registered Stamp ..........................................7-57 Delete Saved Copy Program .......................................7-8 Deleted Jobs .............................................................5-63 Density ............................................................5-19, 5-55 Density Adjustment ...................................................7-10 Despeckle ..................................................................5-15 Detail .........................................................................5-63 Detail Settings ............................ 5-48, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52 Detection While Feeding Setting ...............................7-11 Device Information ......................................................4-6 Display Activity Log ...................................................7-52 Document Name .......................................................5-60 Dot Matrix Original ....................................................5-19 Driver Password Encryption Setting .........................7-57 Duplex/Combine .........................................................5-8 E Edit Color ..................................................................5-29 Edit Name ....................................................................4-7 E-Mail Address ..........................................................7-34 Enhanced Security Mode ..........................................7-54 Enlarge Display ..........................................................4-14 Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation ..........................4-13 Enlargement Rotation ..................................................6-8 Enter Power Save Mode .............................................7-3 Erase ..........................................................................5-41 Erase Adjustment ......................................................7-12 Expert Adjustment .......................................................7-9 External Server Settings ............................................7-39 F FAX Active Screen .......................................................6-6 Fax Settings ...............................................................7-46 Fax TX Settings .........................................................7-25 Fax/Scan .....................................................................4-5 Fax/Scan Settings .....................................................6-11 Finished Jobs ............................................................5-63 Finisher Adjustment ...................................................7-10 Finishing ....................................................................5-10 Finishing Program .......................................................6-9 Fixed Zoom .................................................................5-7 Fold/Bind ...................................................................5-11 Frame ........................................................................5-41 Frame Erase ................................................... 5-34, 5-41 Front (Blank) ..............................................................5-22 Front (Copy) ...............................................................5-22 Front and Back Cover ...............................................5-33 Front Cover ................................................................5-33 Full Color .....................................................................5-4 Full Size ............................................................ 5-7, 5-39 Function .....................................................................4-15 Function Management Settings ................................7-56 Function Map ............................................................4-15 Function Permission ..................................................7-35 G General Settings ............................................. 7-32, 7-40 Get Request Code .....................................................7-58 Glossy ........................................................................5-19 Gradation Adjustment .................................... 7-11, 7-21 Green .........................................................................5-32 Group .........................................................................5-10 Guidance ...................................................................4-15 H Half-Fold ....................................................................5-40 Half-Fold Position ......................................................7-15 Half-Fold Specification ................................................6-9 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification ..................................6-9 HDD Settings .............................................................7-55 Header/Footer ...........................................................5-53 Header/Footer Settings .............................................7-25 Hide Personal Information .........................................7-52 Hide Personal Information (MIB) ...............................7-52 Hue ............................................................................5-32 I Icon ............................................................................7-35 ID & Print Operation Settings ....................................7-34 ID & Print Settings .....................................................7-34 Image Adjust ..............................................................5-39 Image Repeat ............................................................5-34bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-8 14.2 Index by button 14 Image Shift ................................................................5-38 Image Size .................................................................5-35 Image Stabilization ....................................................7-10 Image Stabilization Only ............................................7-10 Image Stabilization Setting ........................................7-11 Increase Priority ........................................................5-63 Initialize ......................................................................7-52 Input Machine Address .............................................7-29 Insert Image ...............................................................5-24 Insert Paper ...............................................................5-23 Insert Sheet ...............................................................5-23 Insert Sheet Setting ...................................................5-46 Install License ............................................................7-58 Interleave Paper ........................................................5-21 Interrupt .......................................................................4-4 J Job Details ................................................................5-61 Job History ................................................................5-63 Job History Thumbnail Display .................................7-52 Job List ............................................................5-61, 5-62 Job Log Settings .......................................................7-52 Job Reset ..................................................................7-23 K Key Repeat Start/Interval Time .................................4-13 L Language Selection .....................................................6-3 Layout ........................................................................5-59 LCT ..............................................................................5-5 Leading Edge Adjustment .........................................7-13 Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) ................7-13 Left ............................................................................5-41 Left Bind ....................................................................5-40 Left Panel Display Default ...........................................6-6 License Settings ........................................................7-58 Limiting Access to Destinations ................................7-39 Line Detection ...........................................................7-11 List/Counter ...............................................................7-22 Login ............................................................................4-9 Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting ............7-41 Low Power ..................................................................7-3 Low Power Mode Settings ..........................................7-3 M Management List .......................................................7-22 Manual .........................................................................5-7 Manual Destination Input ..........................................7-52 Map ...........................................................................5-18 Margin Position .........................................................5-38 Max. Allowance Set .........................................7-35, 7-37 Measurement Unit Settings .........................................6-3 Media Adjustment .....................................................7-14 Message Display Time ..............................................4-13 Meter Count ..............................................................8-10 Minimal ........................................................................5-7 Mirror Image ..............................................................5-30 Mixed Original ...........................................................5-15 Mode Memory .............................................................4-7 N Name and Function of Parts ......................................4-15 Neg./Pos. Reverse .....................................................5-29 Network Function Usage Settings .............................7-56 Network Settings .......................................................7-42 No Matching Paper in Tray Setting .............................6-3 None ..........................................................................5-41 Non-Image Area Erase ..............................................5-42 Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings ...............7-12 Number of User Counters Assigned .........................7-33 O Offset .........................................................................5-11 OHP Interleave ..........................................................5-21 ON (External Server) ..................................................7-32 ON (MFP) ...................................................................7-32 One-Touch/User Box Registration ................... 4-6, 7-30 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........7-59 OpenAPI settings .......................................................7-47 Original Setting ..........................................................5-15 Original Type .............................................................5-18 Other ............................................................... 5-48, 5-52 Other Functions .........................................................4-15 Output Permission .......................................... 7-35, 7-37 Output Settings .................................................. 6-3, 7-4 Output Tray Settings ...................................................7-4 Overlay ......................................................................5-55 P P --- ...................................................... 5-23, 5-25, 5-26 Page Margin ..............................................................5-37 Page Number ............................................................5-45 Page Number Print Position ............................. 6-4, 7-28 Page Number Type ....................................................5-45 Pages .......................................... 5-44, 5-47, 5-55, 5-57 Paper ................................................................ 5-5, 5-22 Paper Separation Adjustment ...................................7-11 Paper Size .................................................................5-36 Paper Size/Type Counter ..........................................7-22 Paper Tray Settings .....................................................6-3 Password .......................................................... 4-9, 7-34 Password Copy .........................................................5-50 Password for Non- Business Hours ............................7-7 Password Rules .........................................................7-51 Pause .............................................................. 7-35, 7-38 Photo .........................................................................5-18 Position ........................................................... 5-49, 5-52 Position Setting .........................................................5-12 Post Inserter ..................................................... 2-3, 5-12 Post inserter control panel ........................................5-12 Poster Mode ..............................................................5-35 Power Save ...............................................................4-11 Power Save Key ..........................................................7-3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-9 14.2 Index by button 14 Power Save Settings ...........................................6-3, 7-3 Preset Stamp ...................................................5-48, 5-52 Print ...........................................................................5-62 Print Counter List ......................................................7-38 Print Data Capture .....................................................7-52 Print Jobs During Copy Operation ....................6-9, 7-43 Print Lists ....................................................................6-3 Print Position .........................................5-44, 5-46, 5-47 Print without Authentication ......................................7-38 Print/Fax Output Settings ............................................7-4 Printer Adjustment .......................................................7-9 Printer Information .....................................................7-48 Printer Settings ........................................6-12, 7-2, 7-45 Prior Detection Setting ..............................................7-11 Program Jobs ............................................................5-27 Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error ......7-51 Proof Copy ................................................................4-18 Public User Access ...........................................4-9, 7-32 Punch ........................................................................5-11 Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment ...............................7-17 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ......................7-16 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment .........................7-17 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment ..........................7-16 Q Quality/Density ..........................................................5-18 Quick Settings 1 ..........................................................6-6 Quick Settings 2 ..........................................................6-6 Quick Settings 3 ..........................................................6-6 Quick Settings 4 ..........................................................6-6 R Recall Header/Footer ................................................5-53 Recall Overlay Image ................................................5-57 Receive ......................................................................5-62 Red ............................................................................5-32 Register Authentication Information ..........................6-16 Register Overlay Image .............................................5-57 Register Program ........................................................4-7 Registered Overlay ....................................................5-56 Registered Stamp ...........................................5-48, 5-52 Release Held Job ......................................................5-63 Reset .................................................................4-4, 5-53 Reset All Counters ...........................................7-36, 7-38 Reset Settings ...........................................................7-23 Restrict Access to Job Settings ..................................7-8 Restrict Fax TX ..........................................................7-52 Restrict Operation .......................................................7-8 Restrict User Access ...................................................7-8 Right ..........................................................................5-41 Right Bind ..................................................................5-40 Rotate Image .............................................................4-20 S Saturation ..................................................................5-32 Save ..........................................................................5-62 Save & Print ...............................................................5-60 Save in User Box .......................................................5-60 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ...........................7-41 Scan to Home Settings .............................................7-41 Scan/Fax Settings .......................................................6-6 Search by Operation .................................................4-15 Search Option Settings ...............................................6-7 Secure Print Only .......................................................7-52 Security Details ..........................................................7-51 Security Settings .......................................................7-49 Select Color ...............................................................5-31 Select Keyboard ..........................................................6-4 Select Time for Power Save ........................................7-7 Select Tray for Insert Sheet .............................. 6-8, 7-43 Send ..........................................................................5-62 Separate Scan ...........................................................5-13 Separate Scan Output Method ...................................6-8 Separation .................................................................5-33 Server Name ................................................................4-9 Service/Admin. Information .......................................4-15 Set Range ..................................................................5-35 Sharpness ..................................................................5-32 Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert .....................................5-21 Shift Output Each Job .................................................7-4 Shortcut Key 1 .............................................................6-6 Shortcut Key 2 .............................................................6-6 Single Color .................................................................5-4 Single Color > 2 Color Output Management .............7-41 Skip Job Operation Settings .....................................7-26 Sleep ............................................................................7-3 Sleep Mode Settings ...................................................7-3 Sort ............................................. 5-10, 5-23, 5-25, 5-26 Sound Setting ............................................................4-13 Specify Default Tray when APS Off .................. 6-8, 7-43 Stamp ........................................................................5-47 Stamp Repeat ............................................................5-51 Stamp Settings ............................................... 7-25, 7-57 Stamp Type/Preset Stamps ......................................5-47 Stamp/Composition ..................................................5-43 Staple ........................................................................5-11 Start .............................................................................4-4 Starting Chapter Number ..........................................5-45 Starting Page Number ...............................................5-45 Stop .............................................................................4-4 Store ............................................................................5-6 Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track ...........................................................7-33 System Auto Reset ....................................................7-23 System Auto Reset Confirmation ..............................4-13 System Connection ...................................................7-47 System Settings ................................................. 6-3, 7-3 T Text ............................................................................5-18 Text Color ....................................................... 5-47, 5-54 Text Details ..................................................... 5-44, 5-46 Text Enhancement .....................................................5-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-10 14.2 Index by button 14 Text Size ....................................................................5-47 Text/Photo .................................................................5-18 Ticket Hold Time Setting ...........................................7-33 Time Format ..............................................................5-44 Time Settings ..............................................................7-7 Time Zone ...................................................................7-5 Top ............................................................................5-41 Touch Panel Adjustment ...........................................4-12 Trail Edge Adjust .......................................................7-11 Transparency .............................................................5-21 Tray 1 ..........................................................................5-5 Tray 2 ..........................................................................5-5 Tray 3 ..........................................................................5-5 Tray 4 ..........................................................................5-5 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment .....................................7-15 Tri-Fold Print Side .............................................6-8, 7-43 U User Authentication ...................................................7-32 User Authentication Settings .....................................7-34 User Authentication/Account Track ..........................7-31 User Box ............................................................4-5, 5-60 User Box Administrator Setting .................................7-49 User Box Settings .............................................6-6, 7-24 User Counter .............................................................7-36 User Name ........................................................4-9, 7-34 User Name List ..................................................4-9, 7-34 User Preset Zoom .......................................................5-7 User Registration .......................................................7-34 User Settings .......................................................4-6, 6-2 User/Account Common Setting ................................7-41 Utility/Counter .............................................................4-6 V View Finishing ...........................................................4-20 View Pages ................................................................4-20 View Status ...............................................................4-20 W Watermark .................................................................5-54 Watermark Type ........................................................5-54 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings ..................................7-7 Weekly Timer Setting ..................................................7-7 When # of Jobs Reach Maximum .............................7-33 When AMS Direction is Incorrect ................................6-8 Wide Paper ..................................................................5-6 With Margin ...............................................................5-34 Without Margin ..........................................................5-34 X X/Y ...............................................................................5-6 Z Z-Folded Original ......................................................5-15 Zoom .......................................................4-19, 5-7, 5-36http://konicaminolta.com Copyright A1DM-9585CO-00 2009 2009.11 Guide de l’utilisateur IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-1 Sommaire 1 Introduction Déclaration OpenSSL..................................................................... 1-5 Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-7 1.1 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel....................................................... 1-8 1.2 A propos de ce Guide de l'utilisateur............................................ 1-10 Composition du Guide de l'utilisateur.......................................... 1-10 Notations...................................................................................... 1-10 Captures d'écran de ce manuel utilisateur .................................. 1-10 1.3 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-11 Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-11 Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-11 Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-12 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-12 2 Présentation 2.1 Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur ...................................... 2-3 2.2 Contrôleur d'impression .................................................................. 2-4 Rôle du contrôleur d'impression.................................................... 2-4 Fonctions disponibles du contrôleur d'impression........................ 2-4 Modes machine.............................................................................. 2-5 Flux d'impression........................................................................... 2-6 2.3 Environnement d'exploitation.......................................................... 2-8 Système d'exploitation compatible avec le pilote d'imprimante ... 2-8 Pilote PCL ...................................................................................... 2-8 Pilote PS (PostScript3)................................................................... 2-8 Pilote PPD PostScript (PostScript3) .............................................. 2-9 Interfaces compatibles................................................................... 2-9 2.4 Installation du système .................................................................. 2-11 Pour installer le système d'impression ........................................ 2-11 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3.1 Pilotes d'imprimante et systèmes d'exploitation compatibles .... 3-3 3.2 Utilisé avec Windows ....................................................................... 3-4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante .................................................................................. 3-5 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64.............. 3-6 Sommaire-2 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000............................................ 3-8 Installation à l'aide du câble USB................................................. 3-10 Pour Windows 98SE/Me............................................................... 3-10 Pour Windows 2000...................................................................... 3-12 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 ............ 3-13 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-14 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante manuellement ........................ 3-14 3.3 Si vous utilisez Macintosh .............................................................. 3-15 Installation du pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-15 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-15 Sélectionner une imprimante ........................................................ 3-17 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-17 Pour Mac OS 9 ............................................................................. 3-20 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-22 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-22 Pour Mac OS 9 ............................................................................. 3-23 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4.1 Aperçu des fonctions réseau ........................................................... 4-3 Fonctions réseau ............................................................................ 4-3 Caractéristiques des fonctions réseau ........................................... 4-4 Méthodes de connexion réseau que l'on peut sélectionner dans chaque système d'exploitation Windows ....................................... 4-5 Impression réseau à partir d'un système d'exploitation Windows . 4-5 Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare..................... 4-5 4.2 Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil ...................................... 4-6 Spécification de l'Adresse IP.......................................................... 4-6 4.3 Accéder à Web Connection.............................................................. 4-8 Pour accéder à Web Connection.................................................... 4-8 4.4 Impression SMB ................................................................................ 4-9 Opérations sur cet appareil ............................................................ 4-9 Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante ........................................... 4-11 Pour Windows 98SE/Me............................................................... 4-11 Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64............................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Impression Raw/LPR ...................................................................... 4-12 Opérations sur cet appareil .......................................................... 4-12 Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante ........................................... 4-12 Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 ... 4-12 Réglage de l'impression Raw ....................................................... 4-13 Réglage de l'impression LPR........................................................ 4-13 Pour Windows NT 4.0 (lors du réglage de l'impression LPR) ....... 4-13 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-3 4.6 Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64).............................................................................. 4-14 Opérations sur cet appareil.......................................................... 4-14 Installation du pilote d'imprimante............................................... 4-16 4.7 Imprimer avec NetWare ................................................................. 4-18 Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare.................. 4-18 Pour le mode Imprimante distante avec l'émulation NetWare 4.x Bindery ......................................................................................... 4-18 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression avec émulation NetWare 4.x BIndery......................................................................................... 4-21 Pour le mode imprimante distante NetWare 4.x (NDS)................ 4-24 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 (NDS) .... 4-27 Pour le service distribué d'impression NetWare 5.x/6 Novell (NDPS).......................................................................................... 4-30 Configurer les paramètres d'un client (Windows) avec le serveur NetWare ....................................................................................... 4-32 4.8 Imprimer avec Macintosh .............................................................. 4-33 Opérations sur cet appareil.......................................................... 4-33 Spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk ............................................. 4-33 Spécifier les paramètres Bonjour................................................. 4-35 Réglage de l'ordinateur Macintosh .............................................. 4-37 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................ 4-37 Pour Mac OS 9............................................................................. 4-38 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5.1 Opérations d'impression.................................................................. 5-3 Pour Windows................................................................................ 5-3 Impression Test.............................................................................. 5-5 Pour Macintosh.............................................................................. 5-6 Pour Mac OS X .............................................................................. 5-6 Pour Mac OS 9............................................................................... 5-7 5.2 Réglage des fonctions d'impression .............................................. 5-8 Liste des fonctions......................................................................... 5-8 Présentation des fonctions .......................................................... 5-11 Orientation.................................................................................... 5-11 Format des originaux et format de sortie..................................... 5-12 Zoom (agrandissement et réduction) ........................................... 5-13 Magasin papier (Source papier) ................................................... 5-14 Type de papier (Support) ............................................................. 5-15 Type d'impression (Impression recto-verso/Impression Livret)... 5-16 Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page ............................. 5-18 Marge ........................................................................................... 5-19 Agrafage et perforation ................................................................ 5-20 Type de sortie (gestion des travaux) ............................................ 5-21 Sommaire-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Tri (assemblage) et classement (décalage)................................... 5-22 Sauter pages vierges (Économiser papier) ................................... 5-23 Paramètres de page de couverture, de page de dos et d'intercalaire ............................................................................ 5-24 Couverture avec bac d'insertion................................................... 5-25 Chapitre ........................................................................................ 5-26 Combinaison................................................................................. 5-27 Pliage ............................................................................................ 5-28 Décalage d'image ......................................................................... 5-29 Superposition................................................................................ 5-30 Filigrane ........................................................................................ 5-31 Réglage qualité ............................................................................. 5-32 Utiliser polices d'imprimante (Remplacer polices)........................ 5-33 Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ..................................... 5-34 Envoyer téléfax ............................................................................. 5-35 Pour Windows............................................................................... 5-36 Pour Macintosh............................................................................. 5-39 Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue d'impression ........................... 5-39 Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression............... 5-39 Vérifiez le travail ............................................................................ 5-41 Affichage de la liste d'impression................................................. 5-41 Vérifier Réception/Boîte utilisateur ............................................... 5-42 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 6-3 Paramètres communs..................................................................... 6-3 Onglet Configuration....................................................................... 6-4 Onglet Paramétrage par page ........................................................ 6-5 Onglet Fonctions spéciales ............................................................ 6-5 Onglet Superposition ...................................................................... 6-5 Onglet Filigrane............................................................................... 6-5 Onglet Qualité ................................................................................. 6-6 Onglet Police................................................................................... 6-6 Onglet Fax....................................................................................... 6-6 Onglet Version ................................................................................ 6-6 Onglet Option.................................................................................. 6-6 6.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration ....................... 6-7 Adapter l'impression au format papier ........................................... 6-7 Enregistrer un format personnalisé................................................. 6-8 Configuration de la position d'impression ...................................... 6-9 Sélectionner la source papier ....................................................... 6-10 Spécifier la source du type de papier ........................................... 6-11 Spécifier l'impression recto-verso/livret ....................................... 6-13 Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page (N en 1)................. 6-14 Régler la marge............................................................................. 6-15 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-5 Agrafage....................................................................................... 6-16 Perforer ........................................................................................ 6-16 Agrafage central et pliage ............................................................ 6-17 Sélectionner le type de sortie ...................................................... 6-18 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur ................................................. 6-20 Attente avec épreuve ................................................................... 6-20 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification.................................. 6-21 Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ................. 6-22 6.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page...... 6-23 Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos .... 6-23 Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion...................... 6-24 Impression de chapitres............................................................... 6-25 Imprimer plusieurs pages............................................................. 6-26 Paramétrage par page ................................................................. 6-26 Utilisation de papier à onglet ....................................................... 6-28 6.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.......... 6-32 Une image étalée sur deux pages est imprimée sur une feuille de papier de format double (combinaison)........................ 6-33 Définir le pliage............................................................................. 6-34 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) ............ 6-35 6.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition .................... 6-36 Imprimer ensemble des documents originaux différents (Superposition) ............................................................................. 6-36 Créer une superposition............................................................... 6-38 6.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane ............................. 6-40 Imprimer un filigrane .................................................................... 6-40 Modifier un filigrane...................................................................... 6-41 Imprimer le numéro du document................................................ 6-42 6.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité................................ 6-43 Motif ............................................................................................. 6-43 Densité d'impression ................................................................... 6-43 Imprimer avec noir ....................................................................... 6-44 Lissage......................................................................................... 6-45 6.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police ................................. 6-46 Spécifier les paramètres .............................................................. 6-46 6.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax...................................... 6-47 Envoyer un fax ............................................................................. 6-47 Créer une page de garde ............................................................. 6-53 Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire .............................. 6-57 Enregistrer les informations de destinataire................................. 6-57 Enregistrer un groupe .................................................................. 6-59 Sommaire-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option ................................. 6-61 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 6-62 6.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................. 6-63 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote............................................. 6-63 Rétablir les paramètres................................................................. 6-65 Supprimer les paramètres ............................................................ 6-66 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 7-3 Paramètres communs..................................................................... 7-3 Onglet Configuration....................................................................... 7-5 Onglet Paramétrage par page ........................................................ 7-6 Onglet Fonctions spéciales ............................................................ 7-6 Onglet PostScript............................................................................ 7-7 Onglet Superposition ...................................................................... 7-7 Onglet Qualité ................................................................................. 7-8 Onglet Filigrane............................................................................... 7-8 Onglet Option.................................................................................. 7-8 7.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration ....................... 7-9 Adapter l'impression au format papier ........................................... 7-9 Sélectionner une source papier .................................................... 7-10 Utiliser les transparents ................................................................ 7-12 Paramètres format personnalisé................................................... 7-15 Impression Recto-verso/Livret...................................................... 7-16 Agrafage........................................................................................ 7-17 Perforation .................................................................................... 7-18 Impression en mode Disposition .................................................. 7-19 Impression de livret....................................................................... 7-21 Impression en mode Zoom........................................................... 7-22 Imprimer une affiche ..................................................................... 7-23 Changer le papier ......................................................................... 7-24 Sélectionner le type de sortie ....................................................... 7-25 Impression sécurisée .................................................................... 7-26 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur .................................................. 7-27 Attente avec épreuve.................................................................... 7-28 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification .................................. 7-29 Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) .................. 7-31 7.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page ...... 7-32 Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos..... 7-32 Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion....................... 7-33 Impression de chapitres ............................................................... 7-34 Imprimer plusieurs pages ............................................................. 7-35 Paramétrage par page .................................................................. 7-35 Enregistrer/Charger la configuration............................................. 7-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-7 Enregistrer la configuration .......................................................... 7-36 Charger la configuration............................................................... 7-37 Utilisation de papier à onglet ....................................................... 7-38 7.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.......... 7-42 Imprimer le numéro du document................................................ 7-42 Imprimer 2 pages sur du papier deux fois plus grand ................. 7-43 Définir le pliage............................................................................. 7-44 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) ............ 7-45 7.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet PostScript .......................... 7-46 Impression d'un travail................................................................. 7-46 Compression d'un travail ............................................................. 7-47 Compression des bitmaps........................................................... 7-47 Utiliser le mode PS marqué ......................................................... 7-47 Définir le protocole de sortie ........................................................ 7-47 Régler la valeur gamma ............................................................... 7-48 Configurer les options.................................................................. 7-49 Effacer mémoire par page............................................................ 7-50 Compatibilité................................................................................ 7-50 Lissage bitmap............................................................................. 7-50 7.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition .................... 7-51 Créer Superposition ..................................................................... 7-51 Ajouter Superposition .................................................................. 7-53 Effacer Superposition................................................................... 7-54 7.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité................................ 7-55 Rotation de l'image...................................................................... 7-55 Imprimer les données en image miroir ou en image négative ..... 7-56 Ajuster la luminosité et le contraste des graphiques ................... 7-57 Lissage......................................................................................... 7-58 Conversion monochromatique..................................................... 7-59 Economie Toner, Brouillon........................................................... 7-60 7.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane ............................. 7-61 Imprimer un filigrane .................................................................... 7-61 Modifier un filigrane...................................................................... 7-62 7.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police ................................. 7-64 Spécifier les paramètres .............................................................. 7-64 7.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option ................................ 7-66 Configurer les options installées.................................................. 7-66 Collecte automatique des informations optionnelles................... 7-67 7.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................ 7-68 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................ 7-68 Rétablir les paramètres ................................................................ 7-69 Modifier les paramètres ............................................................... 7-69 Sommaire-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 8-3 Onglet Disposition .......................................................................... 8-3 Papier/qualité.................................................................................. 8-3 Avancé ............................................................................................ 8-4 Onglet Paramètres du périphérique................................................ 8-5 8.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition ........................... 8-6 Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-6 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/qualité....................... 8-7 Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-7 8.4 Avancé... ............................................................................................. 8-8 Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-8 8.5 Spécifier les périphériques............................................................. 8-10 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 8-10 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 9-3 Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression.......................................... 9-3 Boîte de dialogue Imprimer............................................................. 9-5 9.2 Disposition ......................................................................................... 9-8 Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) ......................................... 9-8 Format papier personnalisés .......................................................... 9-9 Options PostScript........................................................................ 9-10 9.3 Impression ....................................................................................... 9-11 Généralités (Paramètres de base)................................................. 9-11 Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) ......... 9-12 Options de finition......................................................................... 9-13 9.4 Options de réglage.......................................................................... 9-15 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 9-15 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10.1 Paramètres....................................................................................... 10-3 Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression........................................ 10-3 Boîte de dialogue Imprimer........................................................... 10-5 10.2 Disposition ....................................................................................... 10-8 Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) ....................................... 10-8 Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.2x/10.3x) .................................................................. 10-10 Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.4x)......... 10-11 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-9 Format papier............................................................................. 10-11 Marges de l'imprimante ............................................................. 10-11 10.3 Impression..................................................................................... 10-12 Copies et pages (Paramètres de base)...................................... 10-12 Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) ...... 10-13 Alimentation papier .................................................................... 10-14 Sécurité ...................................................................................... 10-15 Finition........................................................................................ 10-17 Image/Disposition ...................................................................... 10-18 Configuration.............................................................................. 10-19 10.4 Options de réglage ....................................................................... 10-20 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................ 10-20 10.5 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote .......................................... 10-21 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote .......................................... 10-21 Rétablir les paramètres .............................................................. 10-22 Modifier les paramètres ............................................................. 10-22 11 Divers réglages 11.1 Paramètres d'impression en mode Utilitaires ............................. 11-3 Sélections par défaut ................................................................... 11-3 Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires............................. 11-3 Paramètre PDL............................................................................. 11-5 Nombre de jeux............................................................................ 11-6 Direction original .......................................................................... 11-7 Paramètre de désynchronisation ................................................. 11-8 Modifier format papier................................................................ 11-10 Réglage des bannières .............................................................. 11-11 Densité Texte Numérotation Jeux.............................................. 11-13 Bac papier.................................................................................. 11-15 Format de papier par défaut ...................................................... 11-16 Impression recto-verso .............................................................. 11-17 Type de reliure ........................................................................... 11-18 Agrafer........................................................................................ 11-19 Perforation.................................................................................. 11-20 Bac page bannière ..................................................................... 11-21 Numéro de police....................................................................... 11-22 Jeu de symboles ........................................................................ 11-24 Taille caractères ......................................................................... 11-25 Ligne/Page ................................................................................. 11-27 Mappage CR (Retour chariot)/LF (saut de ligne)........................ 11-28 Erreur impression PS ................................................................. 11-30 Imprimer les rapports................................................................. 11-31 11.2 Réglages de l'imprimante en mode administrateur .................. 11-32 Sommaire-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur.............................. 11-32 Système prioritaire...................................................................... 11-34 Délai de connexion I/F ................................................................ 11-36 Capturer les données d'impression............................................ 11-37 11.3 Utiliser Web Connection ............................................................... 11-39 Configuration minimale requise .................................................. 11-39 Accéder à Web Connection........................................................ 11-39 Structure de page ....................................................................... 11-40 Fonction de cache des navigateurs Internet............................... 11-42 Dans Internet Explorer ................................................................ 11-42 Dans Netscape Navigator ........................................................... 11-42 Connexion et déconnexion......................................................... 11-43 Déconnexion............................................................................... 11-44 Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur public) ................. 11-45 Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur enregistré) ........... 11-47 Se connecter en mode Administrateur ....................................... 11-49 Mode Utilisateur.......................................................................... 11-52 Onglet Système .......................................................................... 11-53 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Consommables. 11-53 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac d'entrée...... 11-54 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac de sortie ..... 11-55 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Sommaire de configuration ............................................................................... 11-56 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Disque dur......... 11-57 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information sur interface............................................................. 11-58 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information administrateur.......................................................... 11-59 Onglet Système — Compteur..................................................... 11-60 Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne...................................... 11-61 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Modif. du mot de passe utilis. .................................................... 11-62 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Information utilisateur ................................................................. 11-63 Onglet Système — Inform. compte département....................... 11-64 Onglet Tâche............................................................................... 11-65 Onglet Tâche — Tâches en cours .............................................. 11-65 Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches............................................. 11-67 Onglet Impression....................................................................... 11-68 Onglet Impression — Réglage général ....................................... 11-68 Onglet Impression — Sortie rapport........................................... 11-69 Mode Administrateur .................................................................. 11-70 Fonctionnement de base ............................................................ 11-70 Onglet Système .......................................................................... 11-71 Onglet Système — Importer/Exporter ........................................ 11-71 Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Réglage manuel ................... 11-73 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-11 Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Param. régl. heure .............. 11-74 Onglet Système — Paramètres Machine................................... 11-75 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique ............................... 11-76 Onglet Système — Version ROM............................................... 11-77 Onglet Système — Compteur.................................................... 11-78 Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne ..................................... 11-79 Onglet Système — Entretien — Effacer la config. réseau ......... 11-80 Onglet Système — Entretien — Réinitialisation......................... 11-81 Onglet Système — Entretien — Formater ttes destinations...... 11-82 Onglet Système — Paramètres notification statut..................... 11-83 Onglet Système – Configuration rapport compteur total........... 11-86 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Enregist. utilis............................................................................. 11-88 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Perm. par Défaut Fonctions ....................................................... 11-90 Onglet Système — Enregistrement Compte.............................. 11-91 Onglet Système — Mot de passe de l'administrateur ............... 11-93 Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches ............................................ 11-94 Onglet Impression...................................................................... 11-95 Onglet Impression — Interface .................................................. 11-95 Onglet Impression — Paramètre Port RAW............................... 11-96 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Réglage général .. 11-97 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PCL 11-99 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PS 11-100 Onglet Lecture ......................................................................... 11-101 Onglet Réseau.......................................................................... 11-102 Onglet Réseau — Paramètre TCP/IP— Paramètre TCP/IP ..... 11-102 11.4 Gestion des tâches d'impression.............................................. 11-104 Spécification des opérations d'impression.............................. 11-104 Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)............................. 11-104 Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) ........................... 11-106 Stockage des tâches ............................................................... 11-107 Rappeler la tâche ..................................................................... 11-107 Impression sécurisée ............................................................... 11-108 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur ............................................. 11-109 Imprimer à l'aide du paramètre de suivi de volume................. 11-110 Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)............................. 11-111 Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) ........................... 11-112 Fonctions de travaux dans Web Connection........................... 11-113 Sommaire-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 12 Dépannage 12.1 Impossible d'imprimer .................................................................... 12-3 12.2 Impossible de définir les paramètres voulus ou impossible d'imprimer comme indiqué.................................... 12-5 13 Annexe 13.1 Spécifications .................................................................................. 13-3 13.2 Page de configuration..................................................................... 13-5 13.3 Liste des polices.............................................................................. 13-6 Liste des polices PCL ................................................................... 13-6 Liste des polices PS ..................................................................... 13-7 Page de test.................................................................................. 13-8 13.4 Polices d'écran ................................................................................ 13-9 Procédure d'installation des polices True type (Windows 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000) ................................................. 13-9 Procédure d'installation des polices True type (Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64) ................. 13-11 13.5 Glossaire ........................................................................................ 13-14 13.6 Index ............................................................................................... 13-19 1 Introduction Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-3 1 Introduction Merci d'avoir acheté le Develop ineo 750/600 Le ineo 750/600 est équipé d'un contrôleur d'impression intégré au copieur vous permettant d'imprimer directement à partir d'ordinateurs compatibles Windows ou d'ordinateurs Macintosh en installant le module IC-202 (puce de contrôleur). Ce manuel utilisateur décrit les fonctions d'impression, les opérations, l'utilisation et les précautions de sécurité du contrôleur d'impression. Avant d'utiliser cet appareil, lisez attentivement ce manuel pour garantir un fonctionnement efficace de l'appareil. Afin de garantir une utilisation en toute sécurité de cet appareil, lisez soigneusement les "Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation" du manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de copie] avant d'utiliser cet appareil. Les illustrations utilisées dans ce manuel utilisateur peuvent varier par rapport au modèle actuel. Marques commerciales et Copyright - Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation. - Novell et NetWare sont des marques déposées de Novell, Inc. - Microsoft, Windows et Windows NT sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. - IBM est une marque déposée de International Business Machines, Inc. - Apple, Macintosh et Mac sont des marques déposées de Apple Computer.Inc. - Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo PostScript sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Adobe Systems, Incorporated. - Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation. - PCL est une marque déposée de Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - Citrix, MetaFrame et MetaFrameXP sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux USA et dans d'autres pays. - Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. - En ce qui concerne le réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix Premier, Develop GmbH est membre du réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix. Le réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix est un programme qui, associé à une solution de Citrix, promeut et développe des solutions meilleures pour les clients. 1 Introduction 1-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) - Box Operator : Ce logiciel est en partie basé sur le travail du Independent JPEG Group. - Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. - RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque de fabrique de RSA Security Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. - RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque de fabrique de RSA Security Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-5 Déclaration OpenSSL Licence OpenSSL Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant des fonctions ou l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. Les noms "OpenSSL Toolkit" et "OpenSSL Project" ne doivent pas être utilisés pour exploiter ou promouvoir des produits dérivés de ce logiciel dans accord écrit préalable. Pour l'accord écrit, veuillez contacter openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Les produits dérivés de ce logiciel ne peuvent pas s'appeler "OpenSSL" et "OpenSSL" ne doit pas figurer dans leurs noms sans l'accord écrit préalable de OpenSSL Project. 6. Toute redistribution sous quelque forme que ce soit doit faire mention de la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR LE OpenSSL PROJECT "TEL QUEL" ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE SERA REJETEE. EN AUCUN CAS, LE OpenSSL PROJECT OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ETRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPECIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSECUTIFS (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNEES, DE BENEFICES OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS ET EN MATIERE DE RESPONSABILITE, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DELICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NEGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) EMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE 1 Introduction 1-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) LOGICIEL, MEME SI VOUS ETES AVERTIS DE L'EVENTUALITE D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Licence SSLeay d'origine COPYRIGHT © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) Tous droits réservés. Ce progiciel est une implémentation SSL écrite par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). L'implémentation a été rédigée en conformité avec le protocole SSL de Netscape. Cette bibliothèque est libre pour un usage commercial et non commercial si les conditions suivantes sont respectées. Les conditions suivantes s'appliquent à tous les codes trouvé dans cette distribution, qu'il existe sous forme de code RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., et pas seulement pour le code SSL. La documentation SSL fournie avec cette distribution est couverte par les mêmes termes de copyright à la différence que le détenteur est Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Le copyright est toujours celui d'Eric Young et an tant que tel, il est interdit de supprimer tout avis de copyright du code. Si ce progiciel est utilisé au sein d'un produit, Eric Young doit être cité comme étant l'auteur des parties de la bibliothèque utilisée. Cela peut se faire sous la forme d'un texte affiché au lancement du programme ou dans la documentation (en ligne ou sur papier) fournie avec le progiciel. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire,avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions. Cela peut se faire sous la forme d'un texte affiché au lancement du programme ou dans la documentation (en ligne ou sur papier) fournie avec le progiciel. ions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant les fonctions ou l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" Le terme ‘cryptographique' peut être ignoré si les routines de la bibliothèque utilisée ne sont pas cryptographiées. Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-7 4. Si vous incluez du code spécifique Windows (ou tout dérivé de ce dernier) du dossier apps (code d'application), vous devez ajouter une déclaration : "Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR ERIC YOUNG "TEL QUEL" ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE SERA REJETEE. EN AUCUN CAS, L'AUTEUR OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ETRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPECIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSECUTIFS (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNEES, DE BENEFICES OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS ET EN MATIERE DE RESPONSABILITE, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DELICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NEGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) EMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MEME SI VOUS ETES AVERTIS DE L'EVENTUALITE D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. La licence et les termes de distribution de toute version publiquement disponible ou dérivé de ce code ne peuvent pas être modifiés. C'est-à-dire qu'il n'est pas possible de se contenter de copier ce code pour l'insérer dans une autre licence de distribution [y compris la licence GNU Public Licence]. Tous les autres noms de produits mentionnés ici sont les marques commerciales ou les marques déposées de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Copyright © 2006 Develop GmbH. Tous droits réservés. Remarque - Toute reproduction partielle ou totale de ce manuel utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. - Develop GmbH ne saurait être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce manuel utilisateur. - Les informations figurant dans ce manuel utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. - Develop GmbH détient le copyright des pilotes d'imprimante. 1 Introduction 1-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1.1 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel Ce progiciel contient les programmes suivants fournis par Develop GmbH : logiciel inclus dans le système d'impression, données vectorielles lisibles par machine à codage numérique au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes polices"), logiciel supplémentaire installé dans le système d'un ordinateur à utiliser en relation avec le logiciel d'impression ("logiciel hôte") ainsi que les matériaux écrits explicatifs associés ("Documentation"). L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie au logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des copies du logiciel. L'octroi de licence du Logiciel est soumis aux termes du présent contrat. Develop GmbH vous accorde une sous-licence non exclusive d'utilisation du Logiciel et de la Documentation, sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. L'utilisation du logiciel d'impression ainsi que des programmes de polices d'accompagnement pour la mise en image sur les périphériques de sortie sous licence est strictement réservée à un usage professionnel en interne. 2. Outre la licence relative aux programmes de polices prévue dans la section 1 mentionnée ci-dessus ("Logiciel d'impression") l'utilisation des programmes de polices de caractères romans est autorisée pour la reproduction de graisse, de styles et de versions des lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Caractères") à l'écran et ce, à l'usage professionnel interne. 3. Vous êtes autorisé à réaliser une copie de sauvegarde du logiciel hôte sous réserve de ne pas installer ni utiliser cette copie de sauvegarde sur aucun ordinateur. Nonobstant les restrictions susmentionnées, l'installation sur un nombre illimité d'ordinateurs est strictement réservée à une utilisation associée à un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression exécutant le logiciel d'impression. 4. Vous pouvez concéder les droits inclus dans ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts du titulaire de licence dudit Logiciel et de ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de transférer au cessionnaire l'ensemble des copies dudit logiciel et de ladite documentation pour lesquels le cessionnaire est lié par les termes et modalités du présent contrat. 5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation. 6. Vous êtes tenu de ne pas altérer, démanteler, décrypter, rétroconcevoir ou décompiler le Logiciel. 7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de Develop GmbH et de son concédant de licence. Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-9 8. L'utilisation des marques commerciales doit être conforme aux pratiques acceptées et inclure l'identification du nom du détenteur de la marque commerciale. Les marques commerciales ne peuvent être utilisées que pour identifier les impressions produites par le Logiciel. Une telle utilisation de marque commerciale ne vous octroie aucun droit de propriété de ladite marque commerciale. 9. Vous ne pouvez pas louer, louer à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou copies du Logiciel non utilisées, ou le Logiciel contenu sur tout support non utilisé, sauf partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation selon les modalités susmentionnées. 10. EN AUCUN CAS, DEVELOP GmbH OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU RESPONSABLE DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES CONSÉCUTIFS, ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, EXEMPLAIRES OU PARTICULIERS, Y COMPRIS LA PERTE DE BÉNÉFICES OU DE REVENUS, MÊME SI DEVELOP GmbH EST AVERTI DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES, NI DE TOUT RECOURS DE TIERS. DEVELOP GmbH OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE REJETTE TOUTE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, ET SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES CONCERNANT LA COMMERCIALISATION, L'ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LE TITRE ET LA NONVIOLATION DES DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 11. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux gouvernementaux : le Logiciel est un "article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R.2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 12. Vous êtes tenu de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous aucune forme susceptible d'être en violation avec les lois et règlements en vigueur. 1 Introduction 1-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1.2 A propos de ce Guide de l'utilisateur Ce Guide de l'utilisateur contie d'utilisateur nt des informations sur l'utilisation des fonctions d'impression du contrôleur d'impression Develop. Pour des détails sur les fonctions de copie, de numérisation, de boîte et de fax, veuillez-vous référer aux guides respectifs. Ce Guide de l'utilisateur est destiné aux utilisateurs possédant déjà une connaissance de base des opérations liées aux ordinateurs et aux copieurs. Pour le système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et les opérations liées aux applications, veuillez-vous référer au manuel du produit correspondant. Composition du Guide de l'utilisateur Les guides d'utilisateur de cet appareil sont divisés par fonction et se présentent comme suit : Notations Captures d'écran de ce manuel utilisateur Sauf mention contraire, les fonctions du pilote d'imprimante sont décrites pour le pilote d'imprimante pour Windows XP. Guide de l'utilisateur Détails Guide de l'utilisateur IC-202 Le présent guide. Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme imprimante. Opérations Fax Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme télécopieur. Opérations Scanner Réseau Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme scanner. Opérations Boîte Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil. Nom du produit Description dans ce guide ineo 750/600 Copieur Copieur ou imprimante Contrôleur de réseau intégré Contrôleur de réseau Contrôleur d'imprimante, y compris cet appareil et ce système d'impression Système d'impression Microsoft Windows Windows Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-11 1.3 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à effectuer. 1 Introduction 1-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Stop] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. RÉGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 2 Présentation Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-3 2 Présentation 2.1 Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur Les CD-ROM du contrôleur sont les suivants : - CD-ROM du logiciel Utilisateur (Windows/Macintosh) - CD des utilitaires Chaque CD-ROM contient des contrôleurs d'imprimantes (pour Windows et Macintosh), des utilitaires ainsi que des polices d'écran et de la documentation, comme les manuels d'utilisateur et les notes de lancement. 2 Présentation 2-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2.2 Contrôleur d'impression Le contrôleur d'impression est un périphérique chargé d'exécuter des fonctions d'impression et d'impression réseau avec cet appareil. Rôle du contrôleur d'impression Le contrôleur d'impression a été intégré au copieur, ce qui vous permet d'imprimer en installant le module IC-202. Vous pouvez imprimer à partir des applications installées sur l'ordinateur relié au système d'impression. Quand vous utilisez cet appareil comme imprimante réseau, vous pouvez imprimer à partir des applications de l'ordinateur. Fonctions disponibles du contrôleur d'impression Le contrôleur d'impression permet les fonctions suivantes. - Impression à partir d'un ordinateur (avec le pilote d'imprimante PCL ou PS) - Support de protocoles réseau dont TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk et Bonjour/Rendez-vous - Impression directe sur un réseau utilisant l'impression SMB (Windows), LPR et IPP - Accès aux paramètres de cet appareil et du contrôleur d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur client sur le réseau (à l'aide d'un navigateur Internet) - Contrôle du nombre de pages imprimées (fonctions "Authentification utilisateur" et "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)") Système d'impression Machine Impression d'impression Ordinateur Le kit d'interface parallèle (en option) est installé. Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-5 Modes machine Les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante sont principalement définis à partir d'un ordinateur, toutefois, vous pouvez imprimer la liste des polices et les paramètres du contrôleur d'impression ainsi que les paramètres d'impression par défaut peuvent se régler à partir du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. En outre, vous pouvez utiliser les opérations de numérisation en changeant de mode. Mode Copie Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme copieur. Mode Fax Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme télécopieur. Mode Numérisation Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme scanner. Mode Boîte Cet appareil peut être utilisé pour archiver des travaux et comme dossier de documents pour envoyer des données à un ordinateur sur le réseau. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser cet appareil comme imprimante dans tous les modes. Modifiez les paramètres d'impression par défaut en mode Utilisateur. 2 Présentation 2-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Flux d'impression Quand vous utilisez ce système d'impression comme imprimante, le flux du processus principal est décrit ci-dessous. Les commandes d'impression émises par l'application sont réceptionnés par le pilote d'imprimante. Les données sont transférées à cet appareil via une interface parallèle (IEEE 1284) quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante locale, via une interface USB quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante USB ou via une interface Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX NetBEUI, AppleTalk ou Bonjour/Rendez-vous) quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante réseau. Les données sont ensuite envoyées au système d'impression qui se charge de la rastérisation d'image (conversion des caractères et des images de sortie en données bitmap). Et pour finir, ces données sont imprimées à partir de cet appareil. Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-7 2 Remarque Les interfaces Ethernet, USB et parallèle peuvent être utilisées simultanément. Pour utiliser les interfaces USB et parallèle, il faut installer le kit de connexion locale (EK-701) en option. Les fonctions de copie peuvent être utilisées pendant l'utilisation des fonctions d'impression. Pour utiliser cet appareil comme copieur, appuyez sur la touche [Copie] du panneau de contrôle. Quand une tâche d'impression est réceptionnée pendant la copie, les données sont stockées dans la mémoire de cet appareil. Une fois la copie terminée, la tâche d'impression est automatiquement imprimée. Ordinateur Application Application Application Pilote d'imprimante Pilote d'imprimante Pilote d'imprimante USB Système d'impression Impression Traitement d'image Traitement PDL (rastérisation) Utilisée comme imprimante locale Utilisée comme imprimante USB Utilisée comme imprimante réseau Interface parallèle (IEEE 1284) Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX ou AppleTalk) Disque dur Impression sécurisée Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur 2 Présentation 2-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2.3 Environnement d'exploitation La configuration système nécessaire pour utiliser ce système d'impression ainsi que les interfaces utilisées pour la connexion sont expliquées cidessous. Système d'exploitation compatible avec le pilote d'imprimante Ce système d'impression est équipé en fourniture standard du pilote d'imprimante PCL ou PostScript3 (PS;PPD PostScript). Pour utiliser ce système d'impression, vous devez installer le pilote d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur. Pilote PCL Compatible Windows - Windows 98 deuxième édition (identifié par Windows 98SE) - Windows Millenium Edition (identifié par Windows Me) - Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur (identifié par Windows NT 4.0) - Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur (identifié par Windows 2000) - Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur (identifié par Windows XP) - Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur) Pilote PS (PostScript3) Compatible Windows - Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur - Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur - Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur - Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur) - Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (identifié par Windows XP x64) - Windows Serveur 2003 x64 Editions (identifié par Windows Serveur 2003 x64) – Pour l'acquisition du pilote PS pour Windows XP x64/ Server 2003 x64, contactez le SAV. Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-9 Pilote PPD PostScript (PostScript3) Compatible Windows - Windows 98 deuxième édition - Windows Millennium Edition - Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur - Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur - Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur - Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur) - Windows XP Professional x64 Edition - Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Compatible Macintosh - Mac OS 9.2.x (identifié par Mac OS 9) - Mac OS X v10.2x/v10.3x/10.4x (identifié par Mac OS X) (Inclut Intel Mac (v10.4x)) Interfaces compatibles Les différentes interfaces pouvant être utilisées pour connecter ce système d'impression à un ordinateur sont décrites ci-après. Pour utiliser les interfaces USB et parallèle, il faut installer le kit de connexion locale (EK-701) en option. Interface Ethernet Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme imprimante réseau. Pour la connexion, un câble Ethernet (RJ45) est nécessaire. Supporte les normes 10Base-T et 100Base-TX. En outre, l'interface Ethernet supporte les protocoles TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, Raw, IPP, SMB), NetBEUI (SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), AppleTalk (EtherTalk) et Bonjour/Rendez-vous. Interface parallèle (en option : EK-701) Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme imprimante locale. Pour la connexion, il faut un ordinateur équipé de Windows et d'un câble parallèle IEEE 1284. Utilisez un câble parallèle avec un embout équipé d'un connecteur Amphenol mâle 36 broches. L'interface parallèle supporte les modes compatibles, nibble et ECP. 2 Présentation 2-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Interface USB (en option : EK-701) Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme imprimante réseau. L'interface USB peut se connecter à un ordinateur équipé de Windows ou à un ordinateur Macintosh. La connexion requiert un câble USB. Utilisez un câble USB type A (4 broches, mâle) ou type B (4 broches, mâle). Un câble USB de 3 m ou moins est recommandé. Les interfaces Ethernet, USB et parallèle peuvent être utilisées simultanément. Schéma de connexion Les câbles d'imprimante peuvent se connecter sur chaque port sur le côté de cet appareil. Machine (vue latérale) USB Câble Port Câble Port utilisateur parallèle parallèle Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-11 2.4 Installation du système Afin de pouvoir utiliser ce système d'impression, il faut d'abord l'installer. L'installation consiste à raccorder cet appareil à un ordinateur et à installer le pilote d'imprimante sur l'ordinateur utilisé. Pour installer le système d'impression Installer le système d'impression comme décrit ci-après. 1 Connectez cet appareil à un ordinateur. (Voir "Interfaces compatibles" à la page 2-9.) 2 Installez le pilote d'imprimante. (Voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-3 ou "Si vous utilisez Macintosh" à la page 3-15.) 3 Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, configurez le réseau. (Voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la page 4-3.) 4 Vérifiez l'installation en imprimant une page test. (Voir "Impression Test" à la page 5-5.) 5 Installez les polices d'écran. – Le CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur contient les polices Latin TrueType comme polices d'écran. – Voir "Polices d'écran" à la page 13-9 pour de plus amples informations sur l'installation des polices d'écran. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante peut varier en fonction de la méthode de connexion utilisée avec cet appareil en plus du système d'exploitation de l'ordinateur et du type de pilote d'imprimante utilisé. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur la connexion de cet appareil à un ordinateur, voir "Interfaces compatibles" à la page 2-9. 2 Remarque Pour mettre à jour un pilote d'imprimante existant, commencez pas supprimer le pilote d'imprimante existant. Pour plus de détails, voir "Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-14 et page 3-22. 2 Présentation 2-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-3 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3.1 Pilotes d'imprimante et systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Afin d'utiliser ce système d'impression, il faut d'abord installer le pilote d'imprimante. Le pilote d'imprimante est un programme qui contrôle le traitement des données pour la sortie. Installez le pilote d'imprimante sur l'ordinateur à partir du CD-ROM fourni. Les pilotes d'imprimante présents sur le CD et les systèmes informatiques d'exploitation compatibles sont énumérés ci-après. Installez le pilote d'imprimante requis. Langage de description de page Pilote d'imprimante Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles PCL PCL Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 PostScript 3 PS Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Windows XP x64, Windows Serveur 2003 x64 PPD PostScript Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Windows XP x64, Windows Server 2003 x64 Mac OS 9, Mac OS X 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3.2 Utilisé avec Windows La procédure d'installation pour le pilote d'imprimante Windows varie en fonction de la manière dont cet appareil est raccordé à l'ordinateur et en fonction du pilote d'imprimante utilisé. 2 Remarque Pour obtenir des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante dans un environnement réseau, voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la page 4-3. Comme il est nécessaire de spécifier à l'avance d'autres paramètres de réseau lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante via une connexion réseau, installez-le à ce moment avec une connexion locale. Pour installer le pilote d'imprimante sous Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP ou Windows Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64, connectez-vous avec un nom d'utilisateur autorisé par l'administrateur. Pour brancher cet appareil à un ordinateur par le biais d'une connexion parallèle ou USB, vous avez besoin du kit d'interface locale supplémentaire. Pilote d'imprimante Voir PCL PS "Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5 "Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000" à la page 3-8 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-6 "Installation à l'aide du câble USB" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 2000" à la page 3-12 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-13 PPD PostScript "Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000" à la page 3-8 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-6 "Installation à l'aide du câble USB" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 2000" à la page 3-12 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-13 Le pilote PS peut s'utiliser sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/ XP x64/Server 2003 x64. Pour l'acquisition du pilote PS pour Windows XP x64/Server 2003 x64, contactez le SAV. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-5 Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante 2 Remarque Pour l'impression IPP, il n'est pas nécessaire d'installer le pilote d'imprimante à ce moment car le paramétrage de l'impression IPP est effectué lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante. Pour de plus amples détails sur l'impression IPP, voir "Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64)" à la page 4-14. 2 Remarque Pour obtenir des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante dans un environnement réseau, voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la page 4-3. Comme il est nécessaire de spécifier à l'avance d'autres paramètres de réseau lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante via une connexion réseau, installez-le à ce moment avec une connexion locale. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] et ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 3 Pour Windows XP/XP x64, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante] dans le menu "Tâches d'impression". – Pour Windows Server 2003/Server 2003 x64, faites un double clic sur l'icône "Ajout d'imprimante". L'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante démarre. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Imprimante locale connectée à cet ordinateur". – Décochez la case "Détection et installation automatique de l'imprimante Plug and Play" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 La boîte de dialogue Sélectionner le port d'imprimante apparaît. Sélectionnez "LPT1" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Le port LPT1 est généralement le port parallèle utilisé. 7 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni]. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-7 8 Cliquez sur [Parcourir]. 9 En fonction de la langue, du système d'exploitation et du pilote d'imprimante que vous utilisez, spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM contenant le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Voir "Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur" à la page 2-3 pour le dossier contenant le pilote d'imprimante. – Si vous utilisez l'application Adobe PageMaker, copiez le fichier PPD du dossier "PPD_PageMaker" dans un dossier approprié. (Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel Adobe PageMaker. 10 Cliquez sur [OK]. – La liste "Imprimantes" apparaît. 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 12 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. – Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, effectuez un test d'impression une fois que vous avez spécifié les paramètres réseau. 13 Une fois l'installation terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée apparaît dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 14 Sortez le CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000 1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. La fenêtre Imprimantes apparaît. 3 Double-cliquez sur l'icône "Ajouter une imprimante". L'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante démarre. 4 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. 5 Sur l'écran de sélection de la connexion de l'imprimante, sélectionnez "Imprimante locale". Utilise les fenêtres de Windows 2000. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni]. 8 Cliquez sur [Parcourir]. 9 En fonction de la langue, du système d'exploitation et du pilote d'imprimante que vous utilisez, spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM contenant le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Voir "Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur" à la page 2-3 pour le dossier contenant le pilote d'imprimante. – Si vous utilisez l'application Adobe PageMaker, copiez le fichier PPD du dossier "PPD_PageMaker" dans un dossier approprié. (Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel Adobe PageMaker.) 10 Cliquez sur [OK]. La liste "Imprimantes" apparaît. 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 12 Indiquez le port de connexion. Sélectionnez "LPT1". 13 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. – Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, effectuez un test d'impression une fois que vous avez spécifié les paramètres réseau. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-9 14 Une fois l'installation terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée apparaît dans la fenêtre Imprimantes. 15 Sortez le CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Installation à l'aide du câble USB L'ordinateur personnel et le système d'impression peuvent être directement connectés par un câble USB pour l'impression. 2 Remarque Windows NT4.0 ne gère pas l'impression à l'aide d'un câble USB. Les descriptions données ici concernent le pilote PCL . Pour Windows 98SE/Me Lorsque vous utilisez un câble USB pour la première fois, installez le "support d'impression USB", puis le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Allumez le copieur. 2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. – Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur [Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation". 3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB. 4 La fenêtre de dialogue de l'Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à votre système. (Recommandé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Les écrans Windows 98SE servent ici d'illustration. 6 Sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et cliquez ensuite sur [Parcourir]. 7 Spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le fichier de pilote du "support d'impression USB" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Pour spécifier le dossier qui contient le fichier du pilote (en cas de pilote PCL: À l'ouverture du lecteur de CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" – "PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win9X_Me". Vérifiez que "Recherche du fichier de pilote Windows pour le système" est réglé sur "Support d'impression USB" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-11 8 L'installation démarre. Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du "support d'impression USB" est alors terminée. Installez ensuite le pilote d'imprimante. 9 La fenêtre de dialogue de l'Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Le nom à rechercher s'intitule "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1". 10 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à votre système. (Recommandé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 11 Sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et cliquez ensuite sur [Parcourir]. 12 Spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le fichier du pilote d'imprimante et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Le dossier est au même endroit qu'à l'étape 7. 13 Une zone de message apparaît avec le message "Windows a décelé un pilote mis à jour pour cet appareil...". Vérifiez que "le pilote mis à jour (recommandé)" est réglé sur "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PCL", sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 14 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 15 Pour changer le nom d''imprimante, tapez le nom de l'imprimante désirée. Pour la définir comme "Imprimante par défaut", sélectionnez "Oui" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Lorsque vous installez une imprimante pour la première fois, aucun écran de sélection n'apparaît. Elle automatiquement définie comme "Imprimante par défaut". 16 Pour imprimer la "page de test", sélectionnez "Oui (recommandé)" et cliquez sur [Terminer]. 17 Si vous avez installé le pilote d'imprimante et sélectionné "Oui (recommandé)" à l'étape 16, la page de test est imprimée. Si la page de test s'imprime correctement, cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows 2000 1 Mettez le copieur sous tension. 2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. – Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur [Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation". 3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB. 4 La boîte de dialogue de l'Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à mon système (recommandé)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 6 Cochez la case "lecteurs CD-ROM" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 7 La recherche d'un pilote d'imprimante est lancée. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Si la recherche ne donne aucun pilote (en cas de pilote PCL): Revenez à l'étape 6, cochez la case "Spécifier un emplacement" ouvrez le lecteur CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" – "PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win2000_XP" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 8 Le pilote d'imprimante est installé. Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-13 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Mettez le copieur sous tension. 2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. – Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur [Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation". 3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB. 4 La boîte de dialogue de l'Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté apparaît. Sélectionnez "Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (avancé)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Le nom à rechercher s'intitule "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1". 5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements", cochez l'option "Chercher les supports amovibles" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Un pilote d'imprimante est installé. Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation est terminée. – Si aucun pilote n'est installé (en cas de pilote PCL) : Revenez à l'étape 5, cochez la case "Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche", ", ouvrez le lecteur CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" – "PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win2000_XP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante S'il s'avère nécessaire de supprimer le pilote d'imprimante, par exemple, quand vous voulez réinstaller le pilote d'imprimante, suivez la procédure suivante pour supprimer le pilote. Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante manuellement 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Dans la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs), sélectionnez l'icône de l'imprimante que vous voulez supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Suppr] du clavier de votre ordinateur pour supprimer le pilote d'imprimante. 4 Redémarrez votre ordinateur. – Une fois que le pilote de l'imprimante a été supprimé, l'icône de l'imprimante va disparaître de la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs). La désinstallation de Windows 98SE/Me est terminée. Si vous utilisez Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, exécutez les étapes 5 à 8 ci-dessous. 5 Sélectionnez "Propriétés du serveur" dans le menu "Fichier" 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet "Pilotes" et sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante supprimé à l'étape 3. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer] pour supprimer le pilote d'imprimante. 8 Redémarrez votre ordinateur. – Une fois la suppression terminée, le nom du pilote d'imprimante disparaît de l'onglet "Pilotes". Maintenant la désinstallation est terminée. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-15 3.3 Si vous utilisez Macintosh La procédure d'installation du pilote d'imprimante Macintosh varie en fonction de la version du système d'exploitation Mac et du pilote d'imprimante utilisé. Veuillez-vous référer au tableau ci-dessous pour trouver la procédure d'installation adéquate du pilote d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur Macintosh. Installation du pilote d'imprimante Pour Mac OS X 1 Allumez l'ordinateur Macintosh. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur Macintosh. – Fermez toutes les applications en cours et susceptibles d'avoir démarré lorsque vous avez allumé votre ordinateur Macintosh. 3 Ouvrez le dossier "Driver — OS10_2_X" ou "Drivers — OS10_3_X" sur le CD-ROM. 4 Sélectionnez la version Mac utilisée et copiez le fichier pilote sur le bureau. Mac OS X 10.2 : GENERIC_75_BW-1_102.pkg Mac OS X 10.3/10.4 : GENERIC_75_BW-1_103.pkg 5 Double-cliquez le fichier copié sur le bureau. – Entrez le nom et le mot de passe requis de l'administrateur. – Pour connaître le nom et le mot de passe administrateur, demandez à votre administrateur réseau. – Pour quitter l'installation, cliquez sur [Annuler]. 6 Cliquez sur [Continuer] et suivez les instructions à l'écran jusqu'à ce que la boîte de dialogue Installation apparaisse. Syst. expl. Mac Pilote d'imprimante Voir Mac OS X PPD PostScript "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-15 Mac OS 9 PPD PostScript "Pour Mac OS 9" à la page 3-20 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7 Dans la boîte de dialogue Installation, cliquez sur [Installation]. – À partir de la deuxième installation du pilote d'imprimante, la touche "Installation" peut s'appeler "MÁJ(Mise à jour)". Le pilote d'imprimante est installé sur l'ordinateur Macintosh. Une fois l'installation terminée, un message s'affiche. 8 Cliquez sur [Fermer]. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. Ensuite, sélectionnez l'imprimante. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-17 Sélectionner une imprimante 2 Remarque Si la connexion se fait par AppleTalk, il est nécessaire de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres AppleTalk. Pour plus de détails sur la définition des paramètres AppleTalk, voir "Imprimer avec Macintosh" à la page 4-33. Si la connexion se fait par Bonjour sous Mac OS X 10.4, il est nécessaire de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres Bonjour. Pour plus de détails sur la définition des paramètres Bonjour, voir "Imprimer avec Macintosh" à la page 4-33. Si la connexion se fait par Rendez-vous sous Mac OS X 10.3, il est nécessaire de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres Bonjour. Pour plus de détails sur la définition des paramètres Bonjour, voir "Imprimer avec Macintosh" à la page 4-33. Pour Mac OS X Après avoir branché cette machine à un ordinateur Macintosh, elle peut être utilisée comme imprimante en la sélectionnant dans Centre d'impression ou l'Utilitaire de configuration de l'imprimante comme imprimante à utiliser. 1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications"—"Utilitaires" du "Disque dur". 2 Lorsque la boîte de dialogue Ajout d'imprimante apparaît, cliquez sur [Ajouter]. Lorsque la liste d'imprimantes apparaît, cliquez sur [Ajouter]. – Pour Mac OS X 10.4, passez à l'étape 3. – Pour Mac OS X 10.2 et Mac OS X 10.3, passez à l'étape 4. – Si des imprimantes utilisables ont déjà été configurées, la boîte de dialogue Ajouter imprimante n'apparaît pas. 3 Si cette machine apparaît comme imprimante avec une connexion Bonjour, sélectionnez "GENERIC" dans la liste déroulante "Imprimer avec", sélectionnez "GENERIC 75 BW-1 PS(P)" ou "GENERIC 60 BW- 1 PS(P)" dans la liste des modèles, et cliquez ensuite sur [Ajouter]. – Si l'imprimante sélectionnée est enregistrée dans la liste des imprimantes, cela indique que la procédure d'installation est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) – En cas de connexion AppleTalk, si cette machine n'apparaît pas comme imprimante, cliquez sur [Autres imprimantes] et passez ensuite à l'étape 4. 4 Sélectionnez la méthode de connexion et le nom de l'imprimante. – Pour spécifier une zone AppleTalk pour une connexion AppleTalk, sélectionnez "Zone locale AppleTalk". – Si "IPP" est sélectionné comme protocole dans Imprimante IP, la boîte de saisie du nom de la file apparaît. Sous Mac OS 10.3, il convient de laisser cette boîte vide. Sous Mac OS 10.4, entrez "ipp" dans la boîte texte du nom de la file. 5 Sélectionnez "GENERIC" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Modèle de l’imprimante". Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-19 6 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75 BW-1 PS(P)" ou "GENERIC 60 BW-1 PS(P)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Ajouter]. – L'imprimante sélectionnée est enregistrée sur la liste des imprimantes. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Mac OS 9 Après avoir branché cette machine, elle peut être utilisée comme imprimante en sélectionnant "Imprimante PostScript" sous "Sélecteur" et en spécifiant le fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante. Commencez par copier le fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante sur l'ordinateur Macintosh. 1 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante Macintosh dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur Macintosh. 2 Ouvrez le dossier "Driver — OS9_x — en" sur le CD-ROM. 3 Sélectionnez le fichier PPD "GENERIC75BW-1UVxxx.ppd" et copiezle dans le dossier "Printer descriptions" dans "System folder"— "Extensions" du "Harddisk". – Ensuite, sélectionnez une imprimante. Le pilote d'imprimante peut utiliser une imprimante LaserWriter Macintosh standard. 4 Dans le menu Apple, cliquez sur [Sélecteur] 5 Assurez-vous que "AppleTalk" est réglé sur "Activé" et cliquez ensuite sur l'icône [LaserWriter] 6 Dans la liste "Sélectionner une imprimante PostScript", cliquez sur l'imprimante compatible avec le système d'impression et cliquez ensuite sur [Créer]. – Si un autre fichier PPD a déjà été sélectionné, cliquez sur [Configurer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Sélectionner PPD] sur l'écran déjà affiché. L'écran de sélection du fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante PostScript apparaît. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-21 7 Sélectionnez le fichier PPD approprié et cliquez ensuite sur [Sélectionner]. L'écran de réglage pour ajouter des options apparaît. 8 Sélectionnez les options installées sur cette machine. 9 Cliquez sur [OK]. La fenêtre du sélecteur réapparaît. 10 Fermez la fenêtre du sélecteur. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante S'il s'avère nécessaire de désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante, suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer le pilote. 2 Remarque Fermez toutes les applications en cours et susceptibles d'avoir démarré lorsque vous avez allumé votre ordinateur Macintosh. Pour Mac OS X 1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications"—"Utilities" du "Disque dur". 2 Sélectionnez le nom de l'imprimante à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. L'imprimante sélectionnée est supprimée. 3 Fermez la liste des imprimantes. 4 Faites glisser le fichier suivant, situé dans "Library"—"Pritners"— "PPD"—"Contents"—"Resources" du "Disque dur" sur l'icône "Corbeille". – "GENERIC 75 BW-1.gz" – "GENERIC 60 BW-1.gz" 5 Supprimez les fichiers inutiles dans "Library"—"Printers". – Avec Mac OS 10.3/10.4 – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants dans "Library"—"Printers"— "GENERIC"—"Filter" vers la "corbeille". – pstokm750 – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants de "Library"—"Receipts" dans la "corbeille". – GENERIC_75_BW-1_103.pkg – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants présents dans "Library"— "Printers" — "GENERIC"— "PDE" dans la "corbeille". – GENERIC75BW-1 Finishing.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 ImageLayout.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Security.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Setup.plugin – Pour Mac OS 10.2 – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants dans "Library"—"Printers"— "Plugins PPD" sur l'icône "Corbeille". – GENERIC75BW-1 Finishing.plugin Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-23 – GENERIC75BW-1 ImageLayout.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Security.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Setup.plugin 6 Relancez l'ordinateur Macintosh. La procédure de désinstallation est terminée. Pour Mac OS 9 1 Faites glisser le fichier PPD "GENERIC75BW-1UVxxx.ppd", situé dans "System folder"—"Extensions"—"Printer descriptions" du "Disque dur" sur l'icône "Corbeille". Les fichiers associés au pilote d'imprimante sont supprimés. 2 Faites glisser l'"icône Imprimante du bureau" dans la "corbeille". 3 Relancez l'ordinateur Macintosh. La procédure de désinstallation est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-3 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4.1 Aperçu des fonctions réseau Fonctions réseau En connectant cet appareil à un réseau par l'intermédiaire du port Ethernet, ce système d'impression peut être utilisé comme imprimante réseau. Ce système d'impression supporte les normes 10Base-T et 100Base-TX. En outre, l'interface Ethernet supporte les protocoles TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, Raw, IPP, SMB), NetBEUI (SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), AppleTalk (EtherTalk) et Bonjour/Rendez-vous. 2 Remarque Lors de la configuration du réseau, le mot de passe administrateur est obligatoire pour accéder au mode Administrateur. Demandez le mot de passe administrateur à l'administrateur de cet appareil. Vous pouvez également configurer le paramètre réseau sur le panneau de contrôle du copieur. Système d'impression Cet appareil Ethernet Réseau Hub Le kit d'interface parallèle (en option) est installé. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Caractéristiques des fonctions réseau Ce système d'impression est équipé des fonctions réseau suivantes pour supporter de manière flexible divers environnements de réseau. - Sélection automatique de 10Base-T ou 100Base-TX (Fast Ethernet) - Supporte plusieurs protocoles réseau dont TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX et AppleTalk (EtherTalk) - Supporte l'impression SMB L'impression SMB est une méthode d'impression qui ne requiert pas de serveur d'impression spécifique. - Supporte l'impression Raw (excepté sous Windows NT4.0) - Supporte LPD/LPR sur TCP/IP dans Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 Vous pouvez imprimer avec LPD/LPR. Windows 98SE et Windows Me ne sont pas compatibles. – LPR (Line Printer Request) : ce système de requête d'impression peut être utilisé sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64. - Supporte Novell NetWare ServeurP et RImprimante (NImprimante) - Supporte les fonctions de serveur d'impression Novell NetWare et supporte le mode Bindery et le mode Novell Directory Service (NDS) - Acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP via DHCP Avec NetWare Les fonctions de serveur d'impression Novell NetWare 4.x-6 sont supportées. Vous pouvez connecter ce système d'impression à un réseau via Novell NetWare 4.x-6 comme système d'exploitation du serveur et envoyer les travaux d'impression du client au serveur d'impression (contrôleur réseau). Les trois modes sont supportés comme suit : - NImprimante - ServeurP - NDPS 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions NetWare, voir le manuel d'exploitation NetWare. Avec Macintosh Vous pouvez imprimer à partir de votre ordinateur Macintosh en utilisant AppleTalk ou Bonjour/Rendez-vous. Vous pouvez connecter ce système d'impression au serveur d'impression dans un environnement AppleTalk, Bonjour/Rendez-vous et envoyer des tâches d'impression de l'ordinateur Macintosh vers cette machine. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-5 Méthodes de connexion réseau que l'on peut sélectionner dans chaque système d'exploitation Windows Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres à spécifier pour l'impression en réseau. Les procédures de configuration varient selon la méthode d'impression réseau utilisée (impression SMB, Raw, LPR ou IPP). Sélectionnez la meilleure méthode d'impression réseau pour votre environnement Windows. Impression réseau à partir d'un système d'exploitation Windows *1 Pour exécuter l'impression Raw sous Windows 98SE/Me, l'application désignée sous le terme "Peer to Peer Tool" peut s'avérer nécessaire. Pour plus de détails, contactez le SAV. 2 Rappel Avant de configurer l'impression réseau, installez le pilote d'imprimante. Pour des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-3. Pour imprimer en réseau, changer de port d'imprimante du pilote d'imprimante installé et optez pour une connexion réseau, puis modifiez les paramètres sur cet appareil selon nécessité. Pour une connexion IPP, il faut d'abord installer le pilote d'imprimante. Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare Protocole utilisé 98SE Me NT 4.0 2000 XP Serveur 2003 XP x64 Server 2003 x64 Impression SMB TCP/IP, NetBEUI o o o o o o o o Impression Raw TCP/IP *1 *1 o o o o o Impression LPR TCP/IP o o o o o o Impression IPP TCP/IP o o o o o Version NetWare Protocole utilisé Emulation Mode Service NetWare 4.x IPX NDS/Bindery ServeurP/Imprimante NetWare 5.x/6 IPX NDS ServeurP TCP/IP NDPS(lpr) 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.2 Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil Servez-vous du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil pour assigner une adresse IP à cet appareil. 2 Rappel Quand vous spécifiez les paramètres réseau, suivez les instructions de l'administrateur réseau. Spécification de l'Adresse IP 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilities/Compteur] sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil, appuyez sur [Réglage administrateur] et tapez le mot de passe de l'administrateur. – Le mot de passe administrateur est obligatoire pour accéder au mode Administrateur. Demandez le mot de passe administrateur à l'administrateur de cet appareil. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau] puis sur [Paramètre TCP/IP]. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Adresse IP : Définissez l'adresse IP de cet appareil. Masque : Définissez le masque de sous-réseau pour le réseau auquel vous vous connectez. Passerelle par défaut : Définissez l'adresse de la passerelle par défaut pour le réseau auquel vous vous connectez. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-7 4 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). Après avoir éteint la machine, attendez au moins de 10 secondes avant de la remettre en marche. La configuration de l'adresse IP devient effective. ! Détails Bien que l'adresse IP soit saisie sans utiliser le serveur DHCP dans la procédure décrite ici, il est également possible d'affecter automatiquement l'adresse IP du serveur DHCP. Quand "Paramètre DHCP" est réglé sur "ON", les paramètres d'adresse IP, de masque de sous-réseau et d'adresse de passerelle sont automatiquement attribués par le serveur DHCP sur le réseau, il n'est donc pas nécessaire de les attribuer manuellement. Cependant, veuillez vous assurer des points suivants si vous réglez "Paramètre DHCP" sur "ON". Consultez l'administrateur réseau pour savoir si le serveur DHCP existe. Si le serveur DHCP n'existe pas, assurez-vous de spécifier les paramètres pour "Adresse IP", "Masque" et "Passerelle par défaut". Si les paramètres de l'adresse IP et d'autres éléments ont été assignés via le serveur DHCP, il se peut qu'ils aient été automatiquement modifiés. Si les paramètres de l'adresse IP et d'autres éléments ont été modifiés, si l'adresse IP a été utilisée pour définir une imprimante sur le réseau pour impression, il se peut que l'impression ne puisse pas se faire parce que cet appareil ne peut pas communiquer avec le réseau. Si "Paramètre DHCP" est réglé sur "ON", il est recommandé de définir l'adresse IP attribuée à cet appareil dans les paramètres de serveur DHCP. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.3 Accéder à Web Connection La définition de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil vous permet d'accéder à Web Connection. Servez-vous de votre navigateur Internet pour accéder directement à Web Connection. Pour accéder à Web Connection 1 Lancez le navigateur Internet. 2 Dans la barre "Adresse", tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil comme illustré ci-dessous et appuyez sur la touche [Entrée]. – http:/// Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ L'écran d'accueil de Web Connection apparaît. Pour de plus amples détails sur Web Connection, voir "Utiliser Web Connection" à la page 11-39. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-9 4.4 Impression SMB Vous pouvez utiliser l'impression SMB (impression Windows) pour imprimer directement sur le réseau Microsoft. Opérations sur cet appareil Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Spécifiez aussi les paramètres d'impression SMB dans Web Connection. 0 Vous pouvez également configurer l'impression SMB sur le panneau de contrôle. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur [Scanner réseau]" pour plus de détails. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode Administrateur. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre SMB] et ensuite sur [Réglage Impression] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Impression SMB : Définissez si vous voulez utiliser le service d'impression SMB. Sélectionnez [Oui]. Nom NetBIOS spécifiez le nom NetBIOS (jusqu'à 15 caractères alphanumériques). Nom service d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du service d'impression (jusqu'à 31 caractères alphanumériques). Groupe de travail : Spécifiez le nom du groupe de travail (jusqu'à 15 caractères alphanumériques). 6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). Après avoir éteint la machine, attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de la remettre en marche pour que le paramètre soit modifié. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-11 Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante Pour Windows 98SE/Me 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés] 3 Sous l'onglet Détails, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port]. 4 Sélectionnez "Réseau" et cliquez ensuite sur [Parcourir]. Dans la fenêtre de configuration réseau qui s'est ouverte, sélectionnez l'icône d'imprimante appropriée. Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs.]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur [Ajouter un port] sous l'onglet Ports, double-cliquez sur [Port local] ou sélectionnez [Port local] et cliquez sur [Nouveau port], puis tapez "\\\". – Tapez le même nom NetBIOS et le même nom de service d'impression que vous aviez saisis dans Web Connection. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Opérations sur cet appareil" à la page 4-9. 4 Cliquez sur [Fermer] pour appliquer le réglage. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.5 Impression Raw/LPR Ce modèle supporte les services d'impression Raw et LPR. Le service d'impression Raw est disponible sous Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 et le service d'impression LPR sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64. TCP/IP sert de protocole réseau. 2 Remarque Pour exécuter l'impression Raw sous Windows 98SE/Me, l'application désignée sous le terme "Peer to Peer Tool" peut s'avérer nécessaire. Pour plus de détails, contactez le SAV. Opérations sur cet appareil % Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. – Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Pour Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Sous l'onglet Ports, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port]. 4 Dans la liste des "Ports d'imprimantes disponibles", sélectionnez "Port standard TCP/IP" et cliquez sur [Nouveau port]. 5 Quand l'Assistant Ajout de port d'imprimante TCP/IP standard s'ouvre cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Dans la zone "Nom de l'imprimante ou adresse IP", tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "Personnalisé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Paramètres]. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-13 Réglage de l'impression Raw 1 Cochez la case "Raw", entrez le numéro de port défini dans la case "Paramètres Raw" et cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Cochez le paramètre de numéro de port dans "Numéro de port RAW" si nécessaire. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur ineo 750/600 [Opérations Scanner réseau]" pour de plus amples informations sur le "numéro de port RAW". 3 Cliquez sur [Suivant] et [Terminer] pour terminer cette étape. Réglage de l'impression LPR 1 Sélectionnez "LPR", tapez "Print" dans la case "Nom de file d'attente" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant], puis sur [Terminer] pour appliquer le réglage. Pour Windows NT 4.0 (lors du réglage de l'impression LPR) 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Sous l'onglet Ports, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port]. 4 Dans la liste "Ports d'imprimantes disponibles", sélectionnez "Port LPR" et cliquez ensuite sur [Nouveau port]. – Si "Port LPR" ne figure pas dans la liste, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Panneau de configuration] et cliquez sur [Réseau]. Puis,sous l'onglet Service, cliquez sur [Ajouter] et installez le service d'impression Microsoft TCP/IP. 5 Dans le champ "Nom ou adresse du serveur fournissant le lpd" de la boîte de dialogue Ajouter imprimante compatible LPR, tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil. 6 Dans le champ "Nom de l'imprimante ou de la file d'attente d'impression sur ce serveur", tapez "Print". 7 Cliquez sur [OK] pour appliquer le réglage. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.6 Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64) Le service d'impression IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) est supporté par défaut dans Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64. TCP/IP sert de protocole réseau. Opérations sur cet appareil Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Spécifiez aussi les paramètres d'impression dans Web Connection. (L'impression peut s'effectuer avec les paramètres par défaut.) 0 Vous pouvez également configurer l'impression IPP sur le panneau de contrôle. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]" pour plus de détails. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode administrateur. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-15 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre IPP]. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Paramètre IPP : Définir s'il faut effectuer l'impression IPP. Sélectionnez "Oui" ici. Nom de l'imprimante : Spécifiez le nom de l'imprimante (127 caractères alphanumériques max.). Position imprimante : Spécifiez l'emplacement de l'imprimante (127 caractères alphanumériques max.). Informations sur l'imprimante : Spécifiez les coordonnées du fabricant de l'imprimante (127 caractères alphanumériques max.). URL imprimante : affichage de l'URL de l'imprimante qui peut être utilisée pour l'impression IPP. Opération soutenue : Spécifiez les opérations compatibles IPP. Accepter IPP : Définir s'il faut utiliser la fonction de réception IPP. Système d'Authentification IPP : Spécifiez la méthode d'authentification, le nom de propriétaire, et le mot de passe pour la connexion IPP. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Installation du pilote d'imprimante Pour l'impression IPP, réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 2 Pour Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 3 Pour Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur l'icône "Ajouter une imprimante". Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante] dans le menu [Tâches d'impression]. L' "Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" démarre. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimante locale ou réseau, sélectionnez "Imprimante réseau" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue : Rechercher votre imprimante, sélectionnez "Vous connecter à une imprimante sur Internet ou sur votre réseau intranet". 7 Dans le champ "URL", tapez l'URL pour cet appareil au format suivant et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – http:///ipp Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ipp 8 Quand la boîte de confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur [OK]. 9 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni]. 10 Cliquez sur [Parcourir], spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. PCL driver :\User Software CD-ROM "Driver\Drivers" folder PostScript PPD Driver : User Software CD-ROM "Driver\Drivers" folder 11 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante figure dans la liste "Imprimantes" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-17 12 Sélectionnez s'il faut définir l'imprimante en tant qu'imprimante par défaut et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 13 Cliquez sur [Terminer] pour quitter l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante. Une fois les paramètres spécifiés pour l'imprimante, vous pouvez utiliser l'imprimante de la même manière qu'une imprimante locale par défaut. De même, si vous partagez l'imprimante dans Windows, elle peut être utilisée comme imprimante réseau par d'autres ordinateurs Windows sur le réseau. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.7 Imprimer avec NetWare Le contrôleur d'impression supporte les environnements suivants. Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare 2 Remarque Avant d'utiliser l'émulation bindery, vérifiez que l'émulation bindery est compatible avec le serveur NetWare. Pour le mode Imprimante distante avec l'émulation NetWare 4.x Bindery 1 À partir d'un ordinateur client, connectez-vous avec des autorisations de Superviseur pour accéder au serveur NetWare sur lequel ServeurP est installé. 2 Lancez Pconsole. 3 Dans la liste "Available Options", sélectionnez "Quick Setup" et cliquez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés. 5 Cliquez sur [Esc] pour quitter Pconsole. 6 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger PSERVER.NLM. – Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Version NetWare Protocole utilisé Emulation Mode Service NetWare 4.x IPX NDS/Bindery ServeurP/ NImprimante NetWare 5.x/6 IPX NDS ServeurP TCP/IP NDPS(lpr) Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-19 7 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionne le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau). Mode d'Impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "NImprimante/RImprimante". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Numéro d'imprimante : Spécifiez le numéro d'imprimante (0 à 255). Si vous spécifiez 255, le paramètre est "Auto". 8 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour afficher l'écran du serveur d'impression et vérifie ensuite que l'imprimante créée s'affiche comme étant "En attente de travail" pour l'imprimante connectée (0). Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-21 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression avec émulation NetWare 4.x BIndery Avant d'utiliser l'émulation bindery, vérifiez que l'émulation bindery est compatible avec le serveur NetWare. 1 À partir d'un ordinateur client, connectez-vous avec des autorisations de Superviseur pour accéder au serveur NetWare sur lequel ServeurP est installé. 2 Lancez Pconsole. 3 Dans la liste "Options disponibles", sélectionnez "Quick Setup" et cliquez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés. 5 Cliquez sur [Esc] pour quitter Pconsole. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionnez le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau.) Mode d'impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "ServeurP". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Mot de passe serveur d'impression : Uniquement à indiquer si le réglage s'effectue à partir du serveur NetWare. (affiché par "----".) Intervalle appel : Spécifiez "1". (Changer selon nécessité.) Paramètre Bindery/NDS : Sélectionnez "Param. NDS/Bindery". Nom serveur de fichiers : Spécifiez le nom du serveur de fichiers qui se connecte au serveurP. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-23 7 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 8 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger MONITOR.NLM. 9 Sélectionnez les informations de connexion et vérifiez que le PServer créé figure bien dans la colonne de connexion active. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour le mode imprimante distante NetWare 4.x (NDS) 1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un ordinateur client. 2 Lancez NWAdmin. 3 Sélectionnez l'organisation ou l'unité d'organisation du conteneur qui propose le service d'impression et cliquez sur [Print Services Quick Setup] dans le menu "Tools". 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés. – Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-25 5 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionne le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau). Mode d'Impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "NImprimante/RImprimante". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Numéro d'imprimante : Spécifiez le numéro d'imprimante (0 à 255). Quand vous spécifiez 255, le réglage est "Détect. auto". 6 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 7 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger PSERVER.NLM. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour afficher l'écran du serveur d'impression et vérifiez que "ineo 750/600" (imprimante créée) apparaît comme étant "En attente de travail" pour l'imprimante connectée (0). Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-27 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 (NDS) Pour utiliser le mode serveur d'impression, le protocole IPX doit être chargé sur le serveur NetWare. 1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un ordinateur client. 2 Lancez NWAdmin. 3 Sélectionnez l'organisation ou l'unité d'organisation du conteneur qui propose le service d'impression et cliquez sur [Print Services Quick Setup (non-NDPS)] dans le menu "Tools". 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et cliquez ensuite sur [Create]. – Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionnez le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau.) Mode d'impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "ServeurP". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Mot de passe serveur d'impression : Uniquement à indiquer si le réglage s'effectue à partir du serveur NetWare. (affiché par "----".) Intervalle appel : Spécifiez "1". (Changer selon nécessité.) Param Bindery/NDS : Sélectionnez "NDS". Nom du contexte DNS : Spécifiez le nom du contexte se connectant sur ServeurP. Nom arborescence DNS : Spécifiez le nom de l'arborescence à laquelle ServeurP se connecte. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-29 6 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 7 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger MONITOR.NLM. 8 Sélectionnez les informations de connexion et vérifiez que le PServer créé figure bien dans la colonne de connexion active. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour le service distribué d'impression NetWare 5.x/6 Novell (NDPS) Avant de configurer NDPS, vérifiez que le courtier et le gestionnaire NDPS ont bien été créés et chargés. De même, avant de démarrer la procédure suivante, vérifiez que le protocole TCP/IP a bien été défini dans le serveur NetWare, et vérifiez que l'adresse IP a bien été définie pour cet appareil et que ce dernier est allumé. 1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un ordinateur client. 2 Lancez NWAdmin. 3 Effectuez un clic droit sur le conteneur de l'organisation ou de l'unité d'organisation pour laquelle vous allez créer l'agent d'impression et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimante NDPS] dans le sous-menu "Créer". 4 Dans la case "NDPS Printer Name", tapez le nom de l'imprimante. 5 Dans la colonne "Printer Agent Source" sélectionnez "Create a New Pritner Agent" " et cliquez ensuite sur [Create]. 6 Vérifiez le nom de l'agent d'impression, puis dans la case "NDPS Manager name", parcourez les noms de gestionnaires NDPS et activez-en un. 7 Dans "Gateway Types", choisissez une "passerelle d'imprimante Novell" et activez-la. 8 Dans la fenêtre Configure Novell PDS for Printer Agent, sélectionnez "(None)" pour le type d'imprimante et "Novell Port Handler" pour le type de gestionnaire de port, puis enregistrez les paramètres. 9 Dans "Connection Type", sélectionnez "Remote LPR (on IP)" et activez le type voulu. 10 Entrez l'adresse IP définie pour cet appareil comme l'adresse d'hôte, tapez "Print" comme nom d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Finish] pour valider les paramètres. 11 L'écran d'enregistrement du pilote d'impression s'affiche. Sélectionnez "None" pour chaque système d'exploitation afin de conclure la procédure d'enregistrement. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-31 2 Remarque Pour configurer les droits d'utilisateur pour les files d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare, puis définissez les paramètres selon vos besoins. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) Configurer les paramètres d'un client (Windows) avec le serveur NetWare 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. – Si "Imprimantes et télécopieurs" n'apparaît pas dans le menu Démarrer, ouvrez le Panneau de configuration à partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionnez "Imprimantes et autres périphériques" et sélectionnez ensuite "Imprimantes et Fax". 2 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, double-cliquez sur l'icône [Ajouter imprimante]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante] dans le menu "Tâches d'impression". L'"Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" démarre. 3 Au paramètres de port, parcourez le réseau et définissez le nom de la file d'attente créée (ou le nom d'imprimante NDPS). 4 Sur la liste "Modèles d'imprimante", spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le pilote d'imprimante pour le système d'exploitation et le pilote d'imprimante à utiliser. – Pour Windows 98SE/Me Pilote PCL : User Software CD-ROM dossier "Driver\Drivers" Pilote PostScript PPD : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" – Pour Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003 Pilote PCL : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" Pilote PS : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" Pilote PostScript PPD : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" 5 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour achever l'installation. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-33 4.8 Imprimer avec Macintosh Cette section décrit les paramètres de cette machine ainsi que les paramètres réseau pour Macintosh. Spécifiez les paramètres du port réseau d'imprimante après avoir installé le pilote d'imprimante et avoir sélectionné une imprimante. Pour sélectionner une imprimante, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17. Opérations sur cet appareil Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Dans Web Connection, spécifiez les paramètres AppleTalk ou Bonjour. Spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk Lors de connexion de cet appareil à un ordinateur Macintosh utilisant AppleTalk, il faut spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode administrateur. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre AppleTalk] 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : AppleTalk : Définir s'il faut utiliser AppleTalk. Sélectionnez "ON" ici. Nom de l'imprimante : indiquez le nom de l'imprimante (31 caractères alphanumériques max.). Nom de zone : Spécifiez la zone connectée (31 caractères alphanumériques). 6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-35 Spécifier les paramètres Bonjour Si vous connectez cette machine à une ordinateur Macintosh par Bonjour/Rendez-vous, il faut spécifier les paramètres Bonjour. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode Administrateur. 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre Bonjour]. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Bonjour : Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser une connexion Bonjour/Rendezvous. Sélectionnez "Oui" ici. – Nom Bonjour : Spécifiez le nom Bonjour censé s'afficher comme nom de périphérique connecté (63 caractères alphanumériques et symboles max.). 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). 2 Remarque La connexion Bonjour est une fonction de Mac OS X 10.4, elle est l'équivalent de la connexion Rendez-vous de Mac OS 10.3 ou des versions antérieures. Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-37 Réglage de l'ordinateur Macintosh Utilisez l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté pour spécifier les paramètres TCP/IP et AppleTalk. 2 Rappel Pour les paramètres réseau, consultez votre administrateur réseau. Pour l'installation du pilote d'imprimante, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-3. Comme Bonjour (une fonction Mac OS X 10.4) est toujours activé, il est inutile de modifier les paramètres. Bonjour/Rendez-vous est une fonction Mac OS X. Pour Mac OS 9.2, connectez-vous avec AppleTalk. Pour Mac OS X 1 Dans le menu Apple, sélectionnez "Préférences système". 2 Cliquez sur l'icône "Réseau". 3 Dans "Afficher", sélectionnez "Ethernet intégré". 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet TCP/IP. 5 Sélectionnez les éléments dans "Configurer" qui correspond aux paramètres réseau pour l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté au réseau et réglez ensuite l'adresse IP et le masque de sous-réseau. 6 Si vous utilisez une connexion AppleTalk, cliquez sur l'onglet AppleTalk et vérifiez ensuite que la case "Make AppleTalk Active" (Activer AppleTalk) est cochée. 7 Cliquez sur la touche Fermer en haut à gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Le message "Appliquer les changements de configuration ?" apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. Les paramètres modifiés sont enregistrés. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Mac OS 9 1 Dans le menu Apple, pointez sur [Panneau de contrôle] et ensuite cliquez sur [AppleTalk]. 2 Dans la liste déroulante "Connect via", sélectionnez "Ethernet". 3 Dans le menu Apple, pointez sur [Panneau de contrôle] et ensuite cliquez sur [TCP/IP]. 4 Dans la liste déroulante "Connect via", sélectionnez "Ethernet". 5 Sélectionnez les éléments dans "Configurer" qui correspond aux paramètres réseau pour l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté au réseau et réglez ensuite l'adresse IP et le masque de sous-réseau. 6 Cliquez sur la touche Fermer en haut à gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Le message "Enregistrer les changements dans la configuration actuelle ?"apparaît. 7 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-3 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5.1 Opérations d'impression Pour Windows Les données peuvent être imprimées depuis une application. Les travaux d'impression sont spécifiés depuis le logiciel d'application. 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimer". 2 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante est bien sélectionné dans "Nom d'imprimante" ou "Sélection de l'imprimante". – Si l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionnée, cliquez pour sélectionner l'imprimante. 3 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. – La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Cliquez sur [Préférences] ou sur [Propriétés] pour modifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante selon vos besoins. – En cliquant sur [Préférences] ou sur [Propriétés] dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de chaque modèle dans la boîte de dialogue de pilote d'impression qui apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Configuration du pilote PCL" à la page 6-3"Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)" à la page 7-3 ou "Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)" à la page 8-3. 5 Cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-5 Impression Test L'impression est possible quand le pilote d'imprimante est installé et que les paramètres de réseau on été spécifiés. Pour vérifier si la connexion s'est effectuée correctement, vous pouvez imprimer la page de test standard de Windows. Imprimer une page de test depuis la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du pilote d'imprimante. 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Sous l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Imprimer une page de test] ou sur la touche [Impression Test]. La page de test est imprimée et la boîte de confirmation apparaît. 4 Vérifiez la sortie imprimée, puis cliquez sur [OK] et sur [Oui]. 2 Remarque Si la page de test ne s'est pas imprimée correctement, vérifiez que le pilote d'imprimante a bien été installé correctement et que les paramètres de réseau sont complétés. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Macintosh L'impression est possible quand le pilote d'imprimante est installé et que les paramètres de réseau on été spécifiés. Les travaux d'impression sont spécifiés depuis le logiciel d'application. Pour Mac OS X 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimer". 2 Vérifiez la sélection de l'imprimante. 3 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter. 2 Remarque Si le nom de l'imprimante ne figure pas sur la liste, sélectionnez l'imprimante dans Centre d'impression ou l'Utilitaire de réglage de l'imprimante. Pour plus de détails, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-7 Pour Mac OS 9 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimer". 2 Vérifiez la sélection de l'imprimante. 3 Sélectionnez "Généralités". 4 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter. 2 Remarque Si le nom de l'imprimante ne figure pas sur la liste, sélectionnez l'imprimante dans la fenêtre de choix. Pour plus de détails, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application. Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres en cliquant sur [Enregistrer les réglages]. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5.2 Réglage des fonctions d'impression Les fonctions de cet appareil comme le tri et le pliage peuvent être définies lors de l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur. En fonction du système d'exploitation installé sur l'ordinateur connecté, la procédure de réglage des fonctions de cet appareil peuvent varier. Liste des fonctions La liste des fonctions contient un récapitulatif des principaux réglages relatifs à l'impression et à la prise en charge par le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Remarque Les noms de fonction sur cette liste se basent sur ceux affichés par le pilote d'imprimante PCL sous Windows XP. En outre, les éléments et les valeurs de réglage affichés peuvent varier selon que les options sont installées ou que les paramètres sont disponibles. Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante PCL PS PPD Orientation Permet de spécifier l'orientation d'impression. o o o Format original Spécifie le format du document original. o o Format de sortie Spécifie le format de papier de sortie. o o o Agr./Réduction Imprime en format agrandi ou réduit. o o o Source papier Sélectionne la source papier pour impression. o o o Configuration du type de papier Spécifie le type de papier de la source papier. o o o Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure. o o o Type d'impression Sélectionne le type d'impression (recto, recto-verso ou livret). o o o Combinaison Imprime plusieurs pages sur une seule page. o o o Marge de fichier Définit des marges pour les trous de perforation et les agrafes. o Agrafer Agrafe les documents.*1 o o o Perforer Perfore les documents.*1 o o o Pliage Exécute le pliage.*1 o o o Agrafage central et pliage Exécute l'agrafage central et le pliage.*1 o o o Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-9 Type de sortie (Gestion des travaux) Pour l'impression non-conventionnelle, sélectionne le format de sortie spécial pour les documents confidentiels ou les données enregistrées dans une boîte. o o (Mac OS X seulement) Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. o o o Bac de sortie Sélectionne le magasin de sortie des pages imprimées. o o o Tri Spécifie s'il faut imprimer les copies multiples par jeux. o o o Décalé Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, décale la position de sortie de chaque jeu. o o o Sauter pages vierges N'imprime pas les pages vierges des données. o Couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture est jointe au document imprimé. o o o Authentification/ Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Effectue les opérations d'authentification utilisateur et de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.). L'impression s'effectue après la saisie de l'ID utilisateur enregistré et du mot de passe. o o (Mac OS X seulement) Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez insérer des feuilles de papier dans le document imprimé ou changer de magasin d'alimentation papier en cours d'impression. o o Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. o o o Dos Ajoute une page de dos. o o o Chapitre Spécifie toujours la page que vous voulez utiliser comme page de début de chapitre si vous imprimez recto-verso ou en mode livret. o o Combinaison Imprime un document de 2 pages sur la feuille de papier. o o o Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer. o o Superposition Imprime le document original sur le haut des données de forme créées séparément. o o Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée. o o Estampage numéro de distribution Imprime le numéro de la copie. o o Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de densité différente. o Densité d'impression Règle la densité d'impression. o o o Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins, les caractères en couleur, les images d'être imprimées trop clairs. o Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante PCL PS PPD 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) *1 Réglage en option. Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. o o o Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType par les polices de l'imprimante. o o o Sélection du mode (FAX) À définir pour transmettre un document par fax. *1 o Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante PCL PS PPD Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-11 Présentation des fonctions Ce chapitre présente un récapitulatif de chaque fonction. Orientation Vous pouvez spécifier "Portrait" ou "Paysage" comme orientation de la page à imprimer. Portrait Paysage Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition" à la page 8-6 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-8 Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-8 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Format des originaux et format de sortie Vous pouvez spécifier la format d'un document original et le format du papier de sortie. En spécifiant chaque format, vous pouvez spécifier le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. 2 Remarque Le pilote PPD PostScript pour Windows ne permet de spécifier que les formats de papier imprimé. Format original Format de sortie Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-8 Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-8 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-13 Zoom (agrandissement et réduction) Vous pouvez spécifier le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction à l'aide de valeurs numériques. Original Réduction Agrandissement Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-8 Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-8 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Magasin papier (Source papier) Vous pouvez sélectionner le magasin papier comme source papier pour l'impression. Quand vous changez de type de papier, vous pouvez sélectionner un magasin papier en fonction du type de papier. Magasin Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/ qualité" à la page 8-7 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Alimentation papier" à la page 10-14 Mac OS 9 "Généralités (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-11 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-15 Type de papier (Support) Vous pouvez spécifier le type de papier pour l'impression. 2 Remarque Avec le pilote PCL pour Windows, vous pouvez prédéfinir les paramètres de type de papier en spécifiant le type de papier du bac d'alimentation papier. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/ qualité" à la page 8-7 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Type d'impression (Impression recto-verso/Impression Livret) Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux côtés d'une page ou au format livret (deux pages en vis-à-vis ou reliées au centre). Cela s'avère pratique quand vous voulez relier des documents de plusieurs pages. La zone de reliure peut être spécifiée en indiquant la position de reliure. Impression recto verso Impression de livret Données Sortie sur Données Reliure à gauche/Reliure à droite Reliure en haut Sortie sur d'impression imprimante d'impression imprimante Données d'impression Sortie sur imprimante Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Finition" à la page 10-17 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-17 2 Remarque "Agrafage central et pliage" accessible en mode Livret peut uniquement être utilisé si le module de finition FS-602 est installé. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule page. Fonction bien pratique quand vous voulez réduire le nombre de pages imprimées. 2en1 4en1 6en1 9en1 16en1 Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition" à la page 8-6 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page)" à la page 10-13 Mac OS 9 "Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page)" à la page 9-12 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-19 Marge Décale la position d'impression à l'écran pour laisser un espace. Portrait Paysage à gauche (Marge) à droite (Marge) en haut (Marge) Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) Agrafage et perforation Les documents peuvent être agrafés ensemble ou des trous peuvent être perforés dans le document. En spécifiant la marge, vous pouvez spécifier la marge d'agrafage ou de perforation. 2 Remarque La fonction d'agrafage est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. La fonction de perforation est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. En outre, le kit de perforation ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z doit être installé. Agrafage Perforation Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Finition" à la page 10-17 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-21 Type de sortie (gestion des travaux) Vous pouvez sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui exige un mot de passe pour l'impression, ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents dans un dossier. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X "Sécurité" à la page 10-15 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Tri (assemblage) et classement (décalage) Vous pouvez imprimer l'ensemble des jeux du document le nombre de fois spécifié ou chaque page le nombre de fois spécifié. En spécifiant décalage, la position de sortie peut être décalée et sortie vers l'avant et vers l'arrière pour chaque copie. (Plusieurs sources de papier sont utilisées quand un module de finition de décalage est installé et quand aucun module de finition n'est installé.) Tri Décalé Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Copies et pages (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-12 et "Finition" à la page 10-17 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-23 Sauter pages vierges (Économiser papier) N'imprime pas les pages vierges des données. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Paramètres de page de couverture, de page de dos et d'intercalaire Une page de couverture et une page de dos peuvent être ajoutées ainsi que des intercalaires entre les pages. (Le paramètre d'intercalaire est uniquement disponible avec le pilote d'imprimante PCL et PS.) Couverture Dos Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 7-32 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-25 Couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture est jointe au document imprimé. Vous pouvez joindre du papier épais ou tout autre papier approprié à un document imprimé en guise de page de couverture. 2 Remarque Cette fonction en peut être utilisée que si le bac d'insertion en option (PI-501) est installé. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 7-32 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) Chapitre En impression Recto-Verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours être sorties face imprimée vers le haut. Impression Recto-verso normale Impression Recto-verso avec fonction Chapitre. Si une page spécifiée comme page d'ouverture d'un chapitre sort comme page de dos, insérez une page vierge pour décaler l'emplacement de la page spécifiée vers le recto de la feuille de papier suivante. Une page précise L'exemple est plié en long mais l'impression recto-verso peut aussi s'appliquer aux documents pliés côté court. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 7-32 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-27 Combinaison Deux pages d'un document peuvent être imprimées sur une feuille de papier (2 en 1) ou 1 page de document et sa copie peuvent être imprimées sur la même page (Répétition 2 en 1). Exemple : 2 pages A4 sont agglomérées sur un papier de format A3. 2 en 1 Répétition 2 en 1 Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 6-32 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 7-42 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pliage Le papier est plié est sorti sous cette forme. 2 Remarque Cette fonction peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de finition FS-602 (Pliage en trois, pliage en deux) en option ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z (pliage en Z) est installé. Pliage en trois Original Pliage en Z Pliage central Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 6-32 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 7-42 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-29 Décalage d'image La position d'impression est réglée. Exemple : quand les paramètres sont décalés de 100 vers la droite et de 300 vers le bas. (unité : 0,1 mm) Décalage vers la droite de 10 mm Décalage vers le bas de 30 mm Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 6-32 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 7-42 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) Superposition Imprime le document original sur le haut des données de forme créées séparément. Données de forme Données créées Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition" à la page 6-36 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition" à la page 7-51 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-31 Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane" à la page 6-40 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane" à la page 7-61 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) Réglage qualité Ajuste la qualité de l'image. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité" à la page 6-43 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité" à la page 7-55 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Image/Disposition" à la page 10-18 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-33 Utiliser polices d'imprimante (Remplacer polices) Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType par les polices de l'imprimante. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police" à la page 6-46 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police" à la page 7-64 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS 9 PostScript PPD "Options PostScript" à la page 9-10 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Spécifie quand cette machine fonctionne en mode Authentification/Suivi de volume. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Sécurité" à la page 10-15 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-35 Envoyer téléfax À définir pour transmettre un document par fax. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax" à la page 6-47 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows Les fonctions de cet appareil pouvant être utilisées lors de l'impression peuvent être spécifiées dans la boîte de dialogue du pilote d'imprimante que vous pouvez afficher depuis la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs). Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue de paramétrage du pilote d'imprimante affichés selon la procédure décrite ci-dessous s'appliqueront lors de l'impression à partir de n'importe quelle application. 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Pour Windows 98SE/Me, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Options d'impression]. Pour Windows NT4.0, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Document par défaut]. La boîte de dialogue de pilote d'imprimante apparaît. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-37 Pour les paramètres pouvant être spécifiés avec chaque pilote d'imprimante, voir les éléments suivants : - Pilote PCL : "Configuration du pilote PCL" à la page 6-3 - Pilote PS : "Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)" à la page 7-3 - Pilote PPD PostScript PPD : "Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)" à la page 8-3 Pilote PCL Pilote PS Pilote PPD PostScript 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Utilisez chaque onglet de la boîte de dialogue pour régler le pilote d'imprimante. Pour spécifier les paramètres personnalisés, cliquez Imprimer dans l'application et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences] de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression ne s'appliquent qu'au fichier actuel. Lors du paramétrage des options installées dans Windows NT 4.0/ 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-39 Pour Macintosh Les fonctions de cet appareil pouvant être utilisées pendant l'impression peuvent être spécifiées dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer ou dans la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression. Les paramètres ne peuvent s'appliquer que pendant l'utilisation de l'application. Quand vous quittez l'application, les paramètres par défaut sont réactivés. Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue d'impression % Ouvrez les données dans l'application "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimer]. Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression % Ouvrez les données dans l'application "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur [Format d'impression] ou sur [Réglage papier]. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-40 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour les paramètres pouvant être spécifiés avec chaque pilote d'imprimante, voir les éléments suivants : - OS X : "Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)" à la page 10-3 - OS 9 : "Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)" à la page 9-3 2 Remarque Le contenu de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer et de la boîte Format d'impression peut varier. Selon l'application, la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression peut être affichée en sélectionnant "Réglage papier" – "Options" du menu "Fichier". Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-41 Vérifiez le travail Vous pouvez vérifier la liste, l'historique ou d'autres conditions d'impression. Affichage de la liste d'impression 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran Liste Tâches apparaît et affiche la liste des tâches d'impression en cours. 2 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches]. La liste de l'historique d'impression est affichée en mode "Tous travaux". ! Détails Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Historique tâches], l'écran "Tous travaux" s'affiche en premier. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-42 IC-202 (Phase 2) Vérifier Réception/Boîte utilisateur L'historique est affiché si la BOÎTE est enregistrée depuis le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] du panneau de contrôle et sur [RX/Boîte utilisat.]. La liste de tous les travaux s'affiche. 2 La touche [Historique tâches] affiche la liste des boîtes enregistrées et des réceptions fax réalisées. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-3 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6.1 Paramètres Paramètres communs Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres communs et les boutons qui figurent sur tous les onglets. Bouton Fonction OK Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la boîte de dialogue et appliquer les paramètres modifiés. Annuler Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les paramètres modifiés et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Appliquer Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les paramètres modifiés sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. Aide Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher l'aide relative à chaque élément de la boîte de dialogue actuellement affichée. Enregistrer/ Rétablir réglage Cliquez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer les paramètres actuels et les consulter ultérieurement. Rétbl. par. déft. Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut des paramètres qui avaient été sélectionnés lors de l'installation du pilote. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Pour activer des options installées, vous devez spécifier les paramètres Options. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option" à la page 6-61. Onglet Configuration Afficher Quand "Papier" est sélectionné, un aperçu de la mise en page tel que spécifié dans le réglage actuel est affiché et vous pouvez consulter un aperçu de la tâche d'impression. Quand "Imprimante" est sélectionné, une figure de l'imprimante s'affiche avec toutes les options, comme les bacs d'alimentation papier installés sur cet appareil. Bouton Fonction Papier Imprimante Sous-menu Fonction Papier Spécifie l'orientation, le format papier, la source papier et le type de papier. Reliure Spécifie le format de pliage comme la position de reliure, l'impression recto-verso, l'impression livret, l'agrafage central et pliage, l'impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule page, la marge, l'agrafage ou la perforation. Sortie Spécifie le format de sortie comme la méthode de sortie, le nombre de copies, le plateau de sortie, le mode Tri ou décalage. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-5 Onglet Paramétrage par page Onglet Fonctions spéciales Onglet Superposition Onglet Filigrane Sous-menu Fonction Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Couverture avec bac d'insertion Régler si vous utilisez une couverture en papier épais. Chapitre Régler pour l'impression Recto-verso/Livret pour que certaines pages soient toujours sorties face imprimée vers le haut. Paramétrage par page Du papier vierge peut être inséré ou la source du papier peut être configurée pour chaque page en plus de l'insertion de feuilles de papier dans un document. Sous-menu Fonction Combinaison Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule page. Vous pouvez spécifier les détails dans Détails de combinaison. Pliage Plie les copies. Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer. Sous-menu Fonction Superposition Spécifie l'impression superposée. Sous-menu Fonction Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur le document en cours d'impression. Estampage numéro de distribution Imprime le numéro de la copie. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Qualité Onglet Police Onglet Fax Onglet Version Onglet Option Sous-menu Fonction Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de densité différente. Densité d'impression Règle la densité d'impression. Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins en couleur, les caractères en couleur, les images d'être imprimées trop clairs. Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. Sous-menu Fonction Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante Sélectionne l'utilisation des polices TrueType ou des polices de l'imprimante pour imprimer. Format de police à télécharger Sélectionne si les polices sont téléchargées sur l'imprimante en mode point ou vectoriel. Sous-menu Fonction Sélection du mode Choisissez l'impression ou l'envoi de fax. Mode Fax Spécifie la définition du Fax et les conditions d'émission. Page de garde Définit la page de garde du fax. Saisie directe Tapez l'adresse d'émission. Entrée au répertoire téléphonique Enregistrez l'adresse d'émission dans le répertoire téléphonique. Liste des destinataires Indication du correspondant distant ou enregistré dans le répertoire téléphonique. Sous-menu Fonction Version Affiche la version du pilote d'imprimante. Sous-menu Fonction Option Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil. Informations optionnelles Spécifie automatiquement les paramètres des options du pilote d'imprimante. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-7 6.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration Adapter l'impression au format papier Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire des documents créés lors de l'impression pour les faire correspondre au format de sortie papier. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir des zones de liste déroulante "Format original" et "Format de sortie", sélectionnez les paramètres voulus. – Vous pouvez aussi spécifier un taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction dans la boîte "Zoom". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Enregistrer un format personnalisé Vous pouvez spécifier et enregistrer à l'avance un format personnalisé suivant la procédure ci-après. 1 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Format de sortie", sélectionnez "Config. format personnal.". La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Liste des formats personnalisés : Sélectionnez le format pour le format personnalisé en cours de création. Nom du format personnalisé : Tapez le nom du format personnalisé en cours d'enregistrement. Format : Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du format personnalisé en fonction des unités de mesure choisies. 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-9 Configuration de la position d'impression Vous pouvez régler la position d'impression pour le papier large ou le format personnalisé de papier en sélectionnant "Config. position. impress.". 1 Cliquez sur [Config. position. impress.] dans "Format original" ou dans "Format de sortie" La boîte de dialogue Config. position. impress. apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez "En haut", "Au centre" ou "En bas". 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sélectionner la source papier Lors du changement de type de papier, vous pouvez l'enregistrer sur un magasin papier et vous pourrez sélectionner le magasin papier en fonction du type de papier désiré. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Source papier", sélectionnez le bac d'alimentation papier contenant le papier à utiliser. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-11 Spécifier la source du type de papier Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour attribuer un type de papier à un bac d'alimentation papier. 1 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier]. 2 Sélectionnez la "source papier" à changer et cliquez ensuite sur [Modifier]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre voulu dans la liste déroulante "Type de papier" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Si "Transparent" est sélectionné comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier des intercalaires sur transparent. Quand la case "Intercalaire sur transparent" est cochée, la boîte de dialogue Config. Intercalaire sur transparent apparaît pour vous permettre de spécifier les sources papier de l'intercalaire sur transparent. Vous pouvez aussi afficher la boîte de dialogue Config. Intercalaire sur transparent en cliquant sur [Paramètres]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-13 Spécifier l'impression recto-verso/livret Vous pouvez imprimer un document sur les deux côtés d'une page ou au format livret (deux pages en vis-à-vis). Cela s'avère pratique quand vous voulez relier des documents de plusieurs pages. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type d'impression", sélectionnez "Recto/verso" ou "Livret". 2 Remarque L'orientation de reliure peut se spécifier à partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Position de reliure". Quand le module de finition FS-602 en option est installé et que "Livret" est spécifié, vous pouvez sélectionner "Agrafage central et pliage" pour relier au centre d'une page. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page (N en 1) Vous pouvez imprimer des documents de plusieurs pages sur une seule page. Fonction bien pratique quand vous voulez réduire le nombre de pages imprimées. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Combinaison", sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page. Pour modifier les paramètres de bordure et d'ordre d'impression, sélectionnez "Détails" et modifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 2 Remarque Quand vous imprimez un travail comprenant plusieurs pages de différents formats et orientées différemment, il se peut que des images manquent ou se superposent lors de l'impression du document. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-15 Régler la marge Des marges sont ajoutées au document avant son impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Marge de fichier". 3 Pour régler la largeur de la marge, cliquez sur [Détails] et spécifiez ensuite les paramètres voulus dans la boîte de dialogue Détails de marge de fichier qui apparaît. Recto/Verso : Règle les valeurs de marge. En décochant la case à cocher "Même valeur pour le recto et le verso", vous pouvez spécifier des valeurs différentes pour les cotés recto et verso. Mode de décalage : Sélectionne le processus d'impression pour le document. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Agrafage Vous pouvez agrafer des documents de plusieurs pages. La fonction d'agrafage est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Agrafer". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, spécifiez le nombre d'agrafes et la position d'agrafage. 2 Remarque En fonction du paramètre sélectionné de position de reliure, différentes positions d'agrafage sont possibles. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4 ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504 ou 602. Perforer Vous pouvez perforer les documents imprimés. La fonction de perforation est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. En outre, le kit de perforation ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z doit être installé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Perforer". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, spécifiez le nombre de trous à perforer. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-17 Agrafage central et pliage Traitement du document imprimé avec la fonction Agrafage central et Pliage. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cochez la case "Agrafage central et pliage". 2 Remarque La fonction de pliage et d'agrafage central est uniquement disponible si le module de finition FS-602 est installé. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sélectionner le type de sortie Non seulement, vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour imprimer ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents dans le dossier des documents. 0 "Impression sécurisée" et "Enr. dns boîte utilis. (et imprim.)" doivent être réglés au préalable sur "Disque dur imprimante" avec l'onglet Option. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la méthode de sortie. Impression : imprime immédiatement. Impression sécurisée : enregistre le document à imprimer dans la boîte des documents classés de cette machine. Pour imprimer, il vous est demandé de saisir l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Sélectionnez quand vous imprimez des documents très confidentiels. (jusqu'à 100 documents) Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans une boîte de cet appareil. Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim. : Enregistre le document dans une boîte et l'imprime simultanément. Attente avec épreuve : après l'impression d'un exemplaire du document, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer. Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer les travaux d'impression volumineux. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-19 Impression sécurisée Si "Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné, saisissez l'ID et le mot de passe d'impression sécurisée dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Boîte ut. système] puis sur [Boîte RX sécurisé] en mode Boîte de cette machine. Après avoir saisi l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur, le document est accessible et peut être imprimé. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur % Quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim." est sélectionné, spécifiez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît pour saisir le nom de fichier et le numéro de la boîte utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. Attente avec épreuve % Lors de l'envoi d'une tâche d'impression, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après avoir imprimé un exemplaire du document. Le reste de la tâche d'impression est stocké dans l'appareil en tant que tâche d'impression. Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, vous pouvez imprimer la partie restante de la tâche d'impression après avoir vérifié les résultats d 'impression. Pour imprimer, affichez la liste des Tâches en attente de l'écran Liste Tâches sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil et appuyez sur [Libérer Tâch Att.]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification Si des paramètres d'authentification ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, il faut saisir un nom d'utilisateur. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Cochez la case à cocher "Authentification" et sélectionnez "Utilisateur destinataire" et saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil peut être utilisé sans nom d'utilisateur ni mot de passe. Pour les paramètres d'authentification, consultez l'administrateur de cet appareil. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, vous devez saisir un mot de passe de service pour imprimer une travail. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", puis saisissez le nom et le mot de passe du service. – Vous pouvez enregistrer un mot de passe par défaut plutôt que de saisir un mot de passe pour chaque travail. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Si une tâche d'impression est envoyée avec un nom de service ou un mot de passe ne correspondant pas à un service enregistré sur cet appareil, ou si un travail est envoyé sans cocher la case "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", une erreur va survenir. Vérifiez la liste des journaux à l'aide du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-23 6.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez les cases à cocher "Couverture" et "Dos". 3 Pour imprimer sur la page de couverture et de dos, sélectionnez "Imprimé". Pour n'ajouter qu'une page vierge, sélectionnez "Vierge". 4 Sélectionnez la Source papier contenant le papier chargé pour la page de couverture et la page de dos. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture peut être jointe au document imprimé. Définissez le papier épais ou tout autre type de papier pour le bac d'insertion. Le papier chargé dans l'introducteur de papes de couverture est joint au document imprimé comme page de couverture. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez les cases à cocher "Couv. avc bac ins." et "Dos avc bac ins." dans "Couvertures avec bac d'insertion". 3 Sélectionnez l'une des deux sources papier correspondant au papier utilisé comme page de couverture ou page de dos. 2 Remarque Une couverture avec bac d'insertion ne peut être jointe que si le bac d'insertion (PI-501) est installé en option. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-25 Impression de chapitres En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours sortir face imprimée vers le haut. Si une page spécifique devient le côté verso en mode d'impression Recto-verso, cette page est décalée vers le recto de la feuille suivante et imprimée. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez la case à cocher "Chapitre". 3 Indiquez les pages à sortir face imprimée vers le haut dans la zone de texte "Numéro de page". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer plusieurs pages La fonction "Paramétrage par page" s'avère bien pratique si vous voulez changer le source papier pendant une tâche d'impression quand vous imprimer plusieurs pages. Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez spécifier le type d'impression et la source papier pour chaque page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Nom de liste", sélectionnez le nom de la liste voulue. – Quand vous changez de nom de liste, cliquez sur [Modifier nom de liste...] après avoir sélectionné le nom de liste et appliquez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 4 Cliquez sur [Ajouter] et spécifiez le numéro de page, le type d'impression et la source papier dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 5 Cochez la case à cocher "Utilisation de papier à onglet" comme demandé et choisissez d'utiliser le papier à onglet pour le papier inséré. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-27 2 Remarque Voir "Utilisation de papier à onglet" à la page 6-28 pour de plus amples informations sur la configuration de l'Utilisation de papier à onglet. Pour une liste existante, cliquez sur [Modifier] pour modifier les paramètres de page sélectionnés ou cliquez sur [Effacer] pour les supprimer. Cliquez sur [+] ou [,] pour modifier le numéro de page. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) Utilisation de papier à onglet Le papier à onglet disponible dans le commerce peut être utilisé par la fonction Paramétrage par page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Cliquez sur [,] en regard du champ "Nom de liste" et sélectionnez un nom de liste à utiliser sur la liste qui s'affiche – La configuration de la liste sélectionnée s'affiche dans la zone de liste. – Dix types de nom de liste de "Liste 1" à "Liste 10" ont été préenregistrés. – Vous pouvez enregistrer 10 types de liste fixes. 4 Cliquez sur [Config. papier à onglet]. La boîte de dialogue de configuration du papier à onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-29 5 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Format" de la boîte "Papier" et sélectionnez un format à utiliser dans la liste affichée. – La valeur par défaut est A4 à onglet. 6 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Nombre d'onglets" de la boîte "Papier". Une liste apparaît. Sélectionnez sur la liste un nombre d'onglets à utiliser. – Vous pouvez directement saisir le nombre dans la boîte "Nombre d'onglets". – La valeur par défaut est 5. – Vous pouvez définir une valeur numérique comprise entre 2 et 15. 7 Définissez le "réglage position" nécessaire en spécifiant les champs "Espace avant onglets", "Espace après onglet", "Espace entre onglets" ou "Position du texte". – La plage de valeur numériques définissables varie en fonction des valeurs numériques dans "Nombre d'onglets". 8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Configuration du papier à onglet. Retournez à l'écran de "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre Propriétés. 9 Cliquez sur [Ajouter]. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page apparaît. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10 Sélectionnez "Numéro de page", "Type d'impression" ou "Source papier" selon nécessité. 11 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utilisation du papier à onglet". 12 Entrez votre texte dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères. 13 Cliquez sur [Détails]. – La touche [Détails] ne peut pas être utilisée si vous ne saisissez rien dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". La boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-31 14 Définissez les paramètres "texte sur onglet"-"Orientation", "Position" et "Paramétrage police"-"Nom de police", "Style" ou "Format" selon nécessité. 15 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page réapparaît. 16 Pour spécifier l'onglet pour lequel saisir le "Texte sur onglet", cliquez sur [,] du champ "Position" et sélectionnez un onglet à spécifier. – La valeur par défaut est Continuer page précédente. 17 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page. L'onglet "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre "Propriétés" réapparaît. Le paramètre figure dans la zone de liste. 18 Pour utiliser un autre papier à onglet, exécuter les étapes 9 à 16. – Si vous utilisez du papier autre que le papier à onglet, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23. 19 Confirmez le contenu de la liste. 20 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la fenêtre "Propriété". – Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 30 paramètres à chaque liste. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-33 Une image étalée sur deux pages est imprimée sur une feuille de papier de format double (combinaison) Le contenu de deux feuilles au format de sortie peut être collecté et imprimé sur une seule feuille de papier dont le format est le double de celui défini dans "Format de sortie". 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison". 3 Cliquez sur [,] pour cocher la case "Combinaison" et sélectionnez "2 en 1" ou "Répétition 2 en 1" dans la liste qui s'affiche. Si vous sélectionnez "2 en 1", l'image sur les 2 pages continues est collectée et imprimée sur une seule feuille de papier. Si vous sélectionnez "Répétition 2 en 1", deux exemplaires de la même page sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) Définir le pliage Le papier est plié et imprimé. Vous pouvez sélectionner Pliage en deux, Pliage en Z ou Pliage en trois. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Cochez la case à cocher "Pliage". 3 Cliquez sur [,] en regard de la case "Pliage". Sélectionnez "Pliage en deux", "Pliage en Z" ou "Pliage en trois" sur la liste affichée. 2 Remarque Certains des points peuvent ne pas apparaître en fonction du module de finition installé. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-35 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) Vous pouvez régler la position d'impression sur le document imprimé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Décalage d'image". 3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres]. 4 Réglez le décalage vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la droite et vers la gauche côtés recto et verso ou le décalage de gouttière par unités de 0,1 mm. 2 Remarque La fonction "Paramètres à utiliser" ne fonctionne pas. Seul un réglage côté pilote d'imprimante est possible. Cochez la case "Réglage verso auto" pour appliquer le même réglage que pour le recto. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition Imprimer ensemble des documents originaux différents (Superposition) Un document original peut être imprimé sur des données de superposition créées séparément. Cette fonction est bien pratique pour les pages de garde de fax et les formulaires de lettre. Vous devez pré-enregistrer les formulaires à imprimer. Pour plus de détails, voir "Créer une superposition" à la page 6-38. 1 Créez les données d'impression à partir de n'importe quelle application. 2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Sélectionnez "Imprimer superposition". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-37 6 Sur la liste, sélectionnez la superposition que vous voulez imprimer. – Lorsque seule la première page doit être imprimée en superposition, cochez la case "1ère page seulement". 7 Sélectionnez le nom de fichier et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau. 8 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'impression de la superposition est exécutée. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) Créer une superposition Pour utiliser Superposition, les données d'utilisation de la superposition doivent être préenregistrées. Pour enregistrer une superposition, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Créer superposition" et spécifiez le document que vous voulez enregistrer. 1 Créez les données de superposition à partir de n'importe quelle application. 2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Sélectionnez "Créer superposition". 6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir fichiers]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-39 7 Spécifiez l'emplacement de stockage des données de superposition et tapez le nom de fichier dans la case "Nom du fichier". 8 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. 9 Sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau. 10 Cliquez sur [OK]. Au lieu d'exécuter une tâche d'impression, les données de superposition sont enregistrées. L'extension de fichier est ".kmf". 2 Remarque Sous l'onglet Superposition, vous pouvez supprimer les données de superposition sélectionnées en cliquant sur [Supprimer fichier de superposition]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-40 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane Imprimer un filigrane Vous pouvez imprimer un texte donné en arrière-plan en tant que filigrane. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Filigrane". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, sélectionnez le filigrane que vous voulez imprimer. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres voulus pour "Saisir". Ecraser : L'arrière-plan du filigrane est imprimé en blanc. Transparent : L'arrière-plan du filigrane est transparent. 5 Cochez la case à cocher "1re page uniquement" si vous n'imprimez le filigrane que sur la première page. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-41 Modifier un filigrane Vous pouvez modifier les polices et la position du filigrane et vous pouvez en enregistrer un nouveau. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Filigrane". 3 Cliquez sur [Modifier]. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – [Ajouter]: cliquez dessus pour saisir un nouveau filigrane dans la case de texte filigrane. – [Effacer] : cliquez dessus pour effacer le filigrane sélectionné. – Paramétrage police : spécifie la police et la taille. – Angle du texte : spécifie l'angle d'impression du filigrane. – Position: spécifie la position du filigrane à l'aide des curseurs verticaux et horizontaux. – Densité du Texte : spécifie la densité du texte avec le curseur. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-42 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer le numéro du document Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, vous pouvez imprimer le numéro de chaque document. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Cochez la case "Estampage numéro de distribution". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Pages à imprimer : Spécifie les pages sur lesquelles la numérotation doit être imprimée. Numéro de départ : Spécifie le numéro de départ. 2 Remarque La case à cocher "Estampage numéro de distribution" n'est pas disponible si la case "Tri" n'est pas cochée sous l'onglet Configuration. Définissez la position et le format des caractères sur le panneau de contrôle du copieur. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-43 6.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de densité différente. En sélectionnant "Fin", vous augmentez la densité des points. "Grossier" est le réglage par défaut. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Cliquez sur [Fin] dans "Motif". Densité d'impression La sélection de la case à cocher "Economie Toner" ou "Brouillon" permet de réduire la consommation de toner ou imprime en plus clair. 0 Les cases "Economie Toner" et "Brouillon" dans "Densité d'impression" ne peuvent pas être cochées simultanément. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Pour réduire la consommation de Toner, cochez la case "Economie Toner". 3 Pour imprimer plus clair ou en mode Brouillon, cochez la case "Brouillon". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-44 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins en couleur, les caractères en couleur, les images d'être imprimées en clair. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Cochez la case "Imprimer avec noir" et sélectionnez soit "Texte et graphiques" ou "Tous". Sous-menu Fonction Texte et graphiques Les caractères et les images en couleur sont imprimés en noir. Tous Tous les objets, y compris les données d'image comme les images photographiques sont imprimées en noir à l'exception des zones blanches. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-45 Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Appuyez sur [,] en regard de "Lissage" et sélectionnez le type voulu dans la liste. Sous-menu Fonction Type 1 Processus convenant à l'impression des lignes diagonales des caractères normaux et des graphiques. Type 2 Processus convenant à l'impression des sections curvilignes des caractères normaux. Type 3 Processus convenant à l'impression des parties curvilignes des écritures ornementales et des caractères fins. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-46 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police Spécifier les paramètres Vous pouvez remplacer les polices TrueType utilisées dans Windows par les polices d'imprimante de cet appareil. L'utilisation des polices d'imprimante va réduire le temps d'impression, mais il risque d'y avoir une différence entre l'affichage à l'écran et les résultats d 'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet "Police". 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante". 3 Sélectionnez la police TrueType que vous voulez remplacer. 4 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Police imprimante à utiliser", sélectionnez la police d'imprimante pour remplacer la police TrueType. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Quand vous utilisez les polices TrueType, sélectionnez le type de police à télécharger sur l'imprimante à partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Format de police à télécharger". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-47 6.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax Envoyer un fax Vous pouvez envoyer par fax les données que vous avez créées. Pour utiliser la fonction de fax, vous devez installer le kit de fax en option sur cet appareil. De plus, vous devez activer le kit de fax sur l'onglet d'option correspondant après installation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-61. 1 Créez avec l'application de votre choix les données que vous voulez envoyer. 2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet "FAX". 5 Sous "Sélection du mode", sélectionnez "FAX". – Quand vous sélectionnez "Format personnalisé" dans la liste déroulante "Format papier" de l'onglet Configuration, la configuration de la fonction fax est impossible. – Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de fax de la machine, consultez le "Guide de l'utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations Fax]". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-48 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 Sélectionnez l'information et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. 7 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Résolution", sélectionnez le paramètre voulu. 8 Cliquez sur [Détails]. La boîte de dialogue "Détail Mode Fax" apparaît. 9 Pour imprimer un fichier après l'envoi d'un fax, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Imprimer fichier destinataire". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-49 10 Pour régler l'heure à laquelle le fax doit être envoyé, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Emission programmée" et spécifiez ensuite l'heure à laquelle vous voulez envoyer le fax dans les cases "Heure d'émission". – En cliquant sur [Retourner heure actuelle], l'heure actuelle réglée sur l'ordinateur s'affiche dans les cases "Heure d'émission". – Quand vous utilisez "Emission programmée", assurez-vous que l'heure définie sur l'ordinateur est synchronisée avec l'heure de cet appareil. Si l'heure d'émission est antérieure à l'heure actuelle de l'appareil, le fax sera envoyé le lendemain. 11 Lors de l'émission d'un fax confidentiel, sélectionnez les cases "Sousadresse" et "Envoyer ID" et tapez la sous-adresse et l'ID d'émission. Il est possible d'envoyer des communications confidentielles à un autre modèle de fax à l'aide de F codes. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 20 caractères (chiffres de 0 à 9) dans la case de texte "Sous-adresse". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 20 caractères (chiffres de 0 à 9, # et *) dans la case de texte "Envoyer ID". 12 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau. 13 Spécifier la destination du fax. – Vous pouvez tapez le destinataire du fax directement ou le sélectionner dans le répertoire téléphonique. – Pour effectuer la saisie directe du destinataire du fax, passez à l'étape 14. Pour sélectionner un destinataire dans le répertoire téléphonique, passez à l'étape 15. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-50 IC-202 (Phase 2) 14 Sous "Saisie directe", tapez les informations pertinentes dans les zones de texte "Nom" et "N° télécopie", puis cliquez sur [Ajouter destinataire]. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans la case de texte "Nom". – Vous pouvez saisir 38 caractères maximum (chiffres de 0 à 9, tirets (-), #,*, P et T) dans la case "N° télécopie". – Vous pouvez enregistrer 100 destinataires maximum dans la liste "Destinataires". Après avoir saisi les informations relatives au destinataire, sautez à l'étape 19. 15 Cliquez sur [Répertoire]. – Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de destinataires dans le répertoire, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire" à la page 6-57. La boîte de dialogue Répertoire apparaît. 16 Sélectionnez le destinataire ou le groupe auquel vous voulez envoyer le fax. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-51 17 Cliquez sur [Ajouter destinataire]. Le destinataire sélectionné s'affiche dans la liste "Destinataires". 18 Sélectionnez le destinataire et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Si vous sélectionnez un groupe, tous les membres du groupe s'affichent sur la liste "Destinataires". La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau. 19 Assurez-vous que le destinataire du fichier figure sur la liste "Destinataires". – Pour supprimer un destinataire, sélectionnez le destinataire à supprimer dans la liste "Destinataires", et cliquez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de modifier les paramètres des cases à cocher "ECM", "International" et "V.34". Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur "ineo 750/600 [Opérations Fax]". 20 Quand vous ajoutez une page de garde, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Page de garde". – Pour définir une page de garde de fax, voir "Créer une page de garde" à la page 6-53. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-52 IC-202 (Phase 2) 21 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau. 22 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Confirmation d'envoi de fax apparaît. 23 Cliquez sur [OK]. Le fax est envoyé au destinataire spécifié. 2 Remarque Quand une erreur d'émission de fax survient, un rapport d’émission est automatiquement imprimé. Si vous ne voulez pas que le rapport d'émission soit automatiquement imprimé, réglez "Rapport Emission" sur [OFF] sur l'écran Paramètres de rapport à partir du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-53 Créer une page de garde Vous pouvez créer une page de garde de fax et la joindre à votre message fax. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Page de garde" sur l'onglet FAX. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres]. La boîte de dialogue des Paramètres page de garde FAX apparaît. 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Style", sélectionnez le format de la page de garde. Styles proposés : de 00 à 03. 4 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Objet" et tapez le sujet de document à envoyer. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères dans la case de texte "Objet". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-54 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Sous "Coordonnées du destinataire", vous pouvez spécifier les informations du destinataire, comme le nom, pour la page de garde à ajouter. Les informations figurant sur la liste "Destinataires" de l'onglet FAX sont saisies sur la page de garde. – Standard: sélectionne les informations de destinataire standard. Sélectionnez "Standard" et, à partir de la zone de liste déroulante, le texte à saisir sur la ligne des informations du destinataire. Vous pouvez aussi saisir des caractères. – Détails: spécifiez séparément les informations de destinataire. Sélectionnez "Détails" et ensuite, sélectionnez les cases à cocher "Entreprise", "Service", "Nom" ou "N° télécopie" pour les informations à saisir sur la ligne d'informations du destinataire. Cliquez sur [Paramètres], pour sélectionner "Inclure coordonnées destinataires", "Changer chaque destinataire" ou "Inclure informations choisies" dans la boîte de dialogue des informations de destinataire. – La première page de garde de destinataire s'affiche en échantillon dans la boîte "Aperçu". – Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 pages de garde différentes si "Changer chaque destinataire" est coché. Quand vous envoyez 11 fax ou plus avec "Inclure coordonnées destinataires" ou "Changer chaque destinataire" coché, les informations spécifiées pour "Standard" apparaissent sur la ligne d'informations destinataire. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-55 – Si "Destination" n'est pas spécifié, "Inclure informations choisies" ne peut pas être sélectionné. – Selon le type de caractères saisis et les paramètres spécifiés avec "Style", il se peut que tous les caractères saisis ne s'affichent pas sur la page de garde. Après avoir saisi les informations, assurezvous que les informations s'affichent correctement dans l'image de la boîte "Aperçu". 6 Sélectionnez les cases "Entreprise", "Service", "Nom", "Téléphone", "N° télécopie" ou "E-mail" sous "Coordonnées de l'expéditeur" pour les informations que vous voulez indiquer sur la ligne des informations d'expéditeur et cliquez ensuite sur [Paramètres] pour entrer les principales informations à envoyer sur la page de garde. – Selon le type de caractères saisis et les paramètres spécifiés avec "Style", il se peut que tous les caractères saisis ne s'affichent pas sur la page de garde. Après avoir saisi les informations, assurezvous que les informations s'affichent correctement dans l'image de la boîte "Aperçu". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères pour chaque élément. Les informations d'expéditeur saisies apparaissent sur l'image de la boîte "Aperçu". 7 Pour saisir la date actuelle sur la page de garde, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Date". 8 Pour saisir le nombre de pages à envoyer, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Pages" et spécifiez le nombre de pages. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-56 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9 Pour écrire un message sur la page de garde, tapez le message dans la case de texte "Commentaire". – Si vous tapez plus de 25 caractères par ligne, il se peut que les caractères n'apparaissent pas correctement sur la page de garde. Contrôlez le texte sur l'image de la boîte "Aperçu" et appuyez sur la touche Retour pour ajuster le nombre de caractères par ligne. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 640 caractères dans la case de texte "Commentaire". 10 Pour insérer un logo d'entreprise des cartes ou d'autres images sur une page de garde, cochez la case "Image", cliquez sur [Parcourir] et spécifiez le fichier. – Vous pouvez ajuster la position de l'image en spécifiant des valeurs numériques dans les cases "X" et "Y" et vous pouvez ajuster la taille de l'image entre 50% et 800% en indiquant un taux zoom dans la boîte "Zoom". 11 Cliquez sur [Vérifier] pour contrôler les paramètres actuels. La boîte de dialogue Page de garde Fax apparaît et la page de garde est affichée dans une taille plus grande. Vérifiez le contenu de la page de garde en y apportant les modifications nécessaires. 12 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue de paramétrage de la page de garde fax apparaît de nouveau. 13 Sélectionnez le format de page de garde dans la zone de liste déroulante "Form page garde". 14 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau. 2 Remarque Pour effacer tous les paramètres modifiés, cliquez sur [Rétbl par déft] dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres page de garde FAX. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-57 Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire Vous pouvez enregistrer le destinataire du message fax dans le Répertoire. Enregistrer les informations de destinataire 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, cliquez sur [Répertoire] de l'onglet Fax. La boîte de dialogue Répertoire apparaît. 2 Cliquez sur [Personnel]. La boîte de dialogue "Entrée du répertoire" apparaît. 3 Entrez les informations appropriées dans les zones de texte "Nom", "N° télécopie", "Entreprise" et "Service". Vous pouvez saisir des titres dans la zone de texte "Nom". – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de modifier les paramètres des cases à cocher "ECM", "International" et "V.34". Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur "ineo 750/600 [Opérations Fax]". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans les cases de texte "Nom", "Entreprise" et "Service". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-58 IC-202 (Phase 2) – Vous pouvez saisir 38 caractères maximum (chiffres de 0 à 9, tirets (-), #,*, P et T) dans la case "N° télécopie". 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Le destinataire est enregistré et apparaît sur la liste "Destinataires". 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Lorsque son contenu est modifié, le répertoire téléphonique est réécrit. Pour préparer un nouveau fichier à partir d'une partie du répertoire, sélectionnez "Fichier" – "Ouvrir" ou "Fichier" – "Enregistrer sous" et enregistrez le nouveau fichier séparément. Pour ouvrir le répertoire téléphonique du nouveau fichier, sélectionnez "Fichier" – "Ouvrir" et sélectionnez le fichier du répertoire. L'extension des fichiers Répertoire est ".csv". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-59 Enregistrer un groupe Vous pouvez pré-enregistrer les destinataires auxquels vous voulez envoyer le même fax. Cela s'appelle un "Groupe". 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Répertoire, sélectionnez le destinataire à enregistrer dans le groupe. Le destinataire sélectionné est mis en évidence. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur le destinataire sélectionné, puis, dans le sous-menu "Ajouter au groupe", sélectionnez le groupe dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le destinataire. Le destinataire est copié dans le groupe sélectionné. 2 Remarque Dix groupes ont été créés. Vous ne pouvez ni ajouter ni supprimer de groupe. Vous pouvez enregistrer au total 100 destinataires dans l'ensemble des 10 groupes. Pour modifier le nom de groupe, effectuez un clic droit sur le nom du groupe dans l'arborescence des répertoires sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue et cliquez sur [Modifier]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-60 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour supprimer un destinataire dans un groupe, cliquez sur le groupe dont vous voulez supprimer un destinataire, effectuez un clic droit sur le destinataire dans l'arborescence des répertoires sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue et cliquez ensuite sur [Retirer du groupe]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-61 6.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option Vous pouvez spécifier les options installées sur cet appareil pour qu'elles puissent être utilisées par le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Remarque Si les options installées ne sont pas définies à partir de l'onglet Options, la fonction Option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le pilote d'imprimante. Lors de l'installation des options, assurez-vous d'effectuer les réglages corrects. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-62 IC-202 (Phase 2) Spécifier les paramètres 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PCL" et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Option. 4 Sélectionnez l'option installée à partir de la zone de liste déroulante. 2 Remarque Pour configurer automatiquement les options installées pendant la connexion au réseau, tapez le nom d'imprimante ou l'adresse IP de cet appareil dans la case "Nom d'imprimante ou Adresse IP" sous "Informations optionnelles" et cliquez ensuite sur [Collecter informations optionnelles]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-63 6.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote Pour les pilotes PCL, vous pouvez enregistrer les valeurs de paramètres du pilote modifié et les rappeler si nécessaire. Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote 1 Modifiez les paramètres du pilote à partir de l'onglet Configuration et de l'onglet Paramètre par page. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] et sélectionnez ensuite "Enregistrer paramètres actuels". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-64 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3 Tapez le nom de fichier dans la case de texte "Nom". 4 Tapez un message dans la case de texte "Commentaire" si nécessaire. 5 Spécifiez un dossier dans la case "Emplacement d'enregistrement" et cliquez sur [OK]. Les paramètres sont enregistrés dans une bibliothèque. 2 Remarque L'extension de fichier est ".ksf". Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 25 éléments dans la bibliothèque. Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans la case de texte "Nom". Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 512 caractères dans la case de texte "Commentaire". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-65 Rétablir les paramètres 1 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression et sélectionnez ensuite "Paramètre détaillé de restauration". La boîte de dialogue "Paramètre détaillé de restauration" apparaît. 2 Cochez la case de l'élément à activer. 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Sélectionnez "Rétablir paramètres enregistrés". 5 Sur la liste "Bibliothèque", sélectionnez le fichier de paramètres voulu. 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. Les valeurs de paramètres sont rappelées et la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression réapparaît. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-66 IC-202 (Phase 2) Supprimer les paramètres 1 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression et sélectionnez ensuite "Modifier bibliothèque". 2 Sur la liste "Bibliothèque", sélectionnez le fichier de paramètres à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur [Supprimer]. 2 Remarque Même si le fichier de paramètres est supprimé de la liste "Bibliothèque", il restera sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. En spécifiant le nom de fichier dans "Enregistrer fichier de paramètres dans bibliothèque", vous le sauvegardez sur la liste "Bibliothèque". 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-3 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7.1 Paramètres Paramètres communs Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres communs et les boutons qui figurent sur tous les onglets. 2 Remarque Le pilote PS peut s'utiliser uniquement sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64. Il ne peut pas être utilisé sous Windows 98SE/Me ni avec Mac OS. Bouton Fonction OK Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la boîte de dialogue et appliquer les paramètres modifiés. Annuler Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les paramètres modifiés et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Appliquer Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les paramètres modifiés sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. Aide Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher l'aide relative à chaque élément de la boîte de dialogue actuellement affichée. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Pour activer des options installées, vous devez spécifier les paramètres Options. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option" à la page 7-66. Enregistrer/ Rétablir réglage Cliquez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer les paramètres actuels et les consulter ultérieurement. Rétbl. par Déft Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut des paramètres qui avaient été sélectionnés lors de l'installation du pilote. Afficher Quand vous cliquez sur "Papier", un aperçu de la mise en page tel que spécifié dans le réglage actuel s'affiche et vous pouvez consulter un aperçu du tâche d'impression. Quand vous cliquez sur "Imprimante", une figure de l'imprimante s'affiche avec toutes les options, comme les bacs d'alimentation papier installés sur cet appareil. Bouton Fonction Papier Imprimante Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-5 Onglet Configuration Sous-menu Fonction Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. Orientation Spécifie l'orientation de l'image imprimée sur le papier. Format original Spécifie le format du document original. Format de sortie Spécifie le format de papier de sortie. Agrandit ou réduit automatiquement quand le paramètre Format original est modifié. Source papier Sélectionne la source papier pour impression. Configuration du type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier pour impression. Position de reliure Spécifie la position de reliure. Type d'impression Définir s'il faut imprimer uniquement sur une face (recto) du papier ou recto et verso. Agrafer Spécifie l'agrafage. Perforer Spécifie la perforation. Normal Disposition Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page. Livret L'impression est effectuée de manière à former un livret en pliant les documents en deux. Ajuster Une sélection est effectuée quand le Format original diffère du Format de sortie avec l'échelle affichée. Échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. Affiche L'impression est réalisée sur deux feuilles ou plus avec extension des images. Log/Phys L'impression est réalisée sans agrandissement ni réduction même si le Format original diffère du Format de sortie. Type de sortie Spécifie les méthodes de sortie, comme "Impression sécurisée" et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". Bac de sortie Sélectionne le magasin de sortie des pages imprimées. Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le bas. Tri Spécifie s'il faut imprimer les copies multiples par jeux. Décalé Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, décale la position de sortie de chaque jeu. Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Spécifie l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe pour "Authentification utilisateur" et le mot de passe et le nom de boîte pour "Impression sécurisée" et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Paramétrage par page Onglet Fonctions spéciales Sous-menu Fonction Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture est jointe aux documents imprimés. Chapitre En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, l'impression est réalisée de manière à ce qu'une page précise soit assurée de sortir orientée vers le haut, sans erreur. Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez spécifier la page pour modifier le type d'impression et la source du papier. Sous-menu Fonction Estampage numéro de distribution L'impression est réalisée avec un numéro de copie joint au document imprimé. Combinaison Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule page. Vous pouvez spécifier les détails dans Détails de combinaison. Pliage Plie les copies. (Pliage en Z, Pliage en 2, Pliage en 3 et Agrafage central et pliage) Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-7 Onglet PostScript Onglet Superposition Sous-menu Fonction Sortie Vous pouvez décider si l'impression est réalisée en tant que fichier d'imprimante ou EPS. Options filigrane En cas d'activation, un filigrane est imprimé sur l'original. Compression des travaux En tant que méthode de compression du travail d'impression, vous avez le choix entre "LZW" et "Flate". Compression des bitmaps En tant que méthode de compression de bitmap, vous avez le choix entre "RLE", "JPEG" et "LZW". PS marqué En cas d'activation, PS Marqué est activé. Protocole de sortie Spécifie le protocole d'envoi à l'imprimante. Niveau Gamma Réglage destiné à corriger la valeur gamma de l'imprimante. Imprimer les informations d'erreurs PostScript En cas d'erreur d'impression des informations sur l'erreur sont imprimées. Utiliser PostScript Pass-through Permet aux applications d'imprimer directement sans recourir à un pilote d'imprimante. Effacer mémoire par page Réglage destiné à effacer la mémoire de l'imprimante pour chaque page. Compatibilité Sélectionnez le type de sortie PostScript. Activer Lissage bitmap Lisse les points du bitmap. Sous-menu Fonction Superposition Créer une superposition. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Qualité Onglet Filigrane Onglet Option 2 Remarque Pour afficher l'onglet Option, sélectionnez "Démarrer" – "Imprimantes et télécopieurs" (ou "Démarrer" – "Paramètres" – "Imprimantes"), faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur "Propriétés". Sous-menu Fonction Rotation de l'image Définit les données d'impression par unités de 90 degrés dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre. Effets En cas d'activation, les données d'impression sont imprimées sous forme d'image miroir ou d'image en négatif. Image Règle la luminosité et le contraste de l'image. Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. Conversion monochromatique La conversion monochrome d'une image, spécifiez la méthode de conversion en cas de conversion par l'intermédiaire du pilote d'imprimante ou par le copieur. Economie Toner Réduisez la consommation de toner tout en maintenant la densité d'impression basse. Brouillon Une impression grossière est effectuée pour tous les éléments autre que les caractères. Sous-menu Fonction Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée. Sous-menu Fonction Option Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil. Informations optionnelles Entrez le nom de l'imprimante ou son adresse IP pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires. Mise à l'échelle pour les applications Le taux d'agrandissement/réduction défini au sein de l'application est verrouillé de la même manière que pour le pilote d'imprimante. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-9 7.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration Adapter l'impression au format papier Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire des documents créés lors de l'impression pour les faire correspondre au format de sortie papier. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir des zones de liste déroulante "Format original" et "Format de sortie", sélectionnez les paramètres voulus. 2 Remarque Si "Format original" et "Format de sortie" diffèrent, la "Mise en page" est automatiquement réglée sur "Ajuster" et Mise à l'échelle est affiché. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sélectionner une source papier Vous pouvez modifier la source du papier ou définir le type de papier comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez une source de papier à utiliser avec "Source papier". – Pour définir le type de papier pour la Source papier, procédez à l'étape suivante. 3 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-11 4 Sélectionnez une source de papier à modifier et cliquez sur [Modifier] et définissez le type de papier. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Utiliser les transparents Si vous imprimez sur du papier transparent, vous pouvez choisir d'insérer du papier vierge pour l'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Réglez la "Source papier" sur "Passe-copie". – "Intercalaire sur transparent" ne peut pas être défini si "Source papier" est réglé sur "Auto". Assurez-vous de bien régler sur "Passe-copie". 3 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier] et sélectionnez "Passe-copie". 4 Cliquez sur [Modifier]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-13 5 Sélectionnez "Transparent". 6 Cliquez sur [OK] pour réafficher "Configuration du type de papier". Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Intercalaire sur transparent" et cliquez sur [Paramètres]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7 Sélectionnez un magasin contenant le papier à insérer. 8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue "Configuration du type de papier". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-15 Paramètres format personnalisé Vous pouvez spécifier et enregistrer à l'avance un format personnalisé suivant la procédure ci-après. 1 Cliquez sur [Formats perso.]. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Nom : Tapez le nom à enregistrer et cliquez ensuite sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer le format irrégulier défini. – Format : Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du format personnalisé en fonction des unités de mesure sélectionnées. 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression Recto-verso/Livret Vous pouvez imprimer un document en mode Recto-verso ou Livret. Cette fonction est pratique pour relier un document de plusieurs pages. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez "Recto/verso" ou "Livret" dans "Type d'impression". 2 Remarque Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut (recto/verso uniquement)" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-17 Agrafage Des documents de plusieurs pages sont agrafés. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Agrafer". 2 Remarque Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut (recto/verso uniquement)" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure". L'option "Agrafer" n'est disponible que si le module de finition (excepté SF-601) est installé. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4 ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504 ou 602. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Perforation Perfore des trous sur le document imprimé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Perforer". 2 Remarque Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure". Pour utiliser la fonction "Perforer", le module de finition (à l'exception du SF-601) et le kit de perforation ou de pliage en Z doivent être installés. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-19 Impression en mode Disposition Un document de plusieurs pages peut être imprimé sur une feuille de papier. Cette fonction est pratique pour économiser le nombre de feuilles à imprimer. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Disposition] dans "Mise en page". 3 Sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une feuille dans la liste déroulante "Combinaison". – Pour modifier ou ajouter la "Position" ou la "Bordure", sélectionnez le paramètre voulu dans chacune des zones de liste déroulante. 4 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions avancées" et régler les différents points suivants de la boîte. – Type de disposition Spécifiez la disposition de la page. – Echelle bordures (case à cocher) Cochez cette case pour réduire aussi la ligne de bordure. – Format/Orientation différent Spécifie la méthode de sortie en cas de différences de format et d'orientation du papier. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Une fois les réglages terminés, cliquez sur [OK]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-21 Impression de livret L'impression d'un livret est réalisée en pliant les pages imprimées en deux. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Livret] dans "Mise en page". – "Gouttière" vous permet de laisser une zone blanche uniforme dans l'unité de points sur les 2 pages étalées après avoir été pliées. La plage admissible va de 0 à 150. – "Glissement" vous permet d'étaler ou de définir l'intervalle entre les pages au centre du papier dans l'unité de points pour la feuille intérieure quand elle est pliée. La plage de réglage oscille entre 0 et 20. – "Grouper par" sert à sélectionner un nombre de pages d'une unité formant un livret. Fonction pratique pour livrets comprenant un grand nombre de feuilles. 3 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions avancées" et régler les points suivants dans la boîte. – Remplir liasses Si une autre valeur que "Standard" ou "4" est réglée pour "Grouper par" et qu'il y a des pages partielles, de nombreuses pages vierges peuvent être générées en fonction du nombre de pages sorties. En gardant la case à cocher "Remplir liasses" sur Non, "Grouper par" est réglée sur "4" uniquement pour les pages partielles de manière à éviter les pages vierges inutiles. – Format/Orientation différent Spécifie la méthode de sortie en cas de différences de format et d'orientation du papier. 4 Une fois le réglage terminé, cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression en mode Zoom Vous pouvez imprimer avec des taux d'agrandissement variables sans changer le format de sortie. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [%Échelle] dans "Mise en page". 3 Régler le "Taux" en chiffres dans "%". La plage admissible va de 25 à 400. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-23 Imprimer une affiche L'image est agrandie et imprimée sur plusieurs feuilles. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Affiche] dans "Mise en page". 3 Sélectionnez le "Style poster" voulu dans la zone de liste déroulante. – Pour changer la "Position", choisissez une position dans la zone de liste déroulante "Position". 4 Si vous sélectionnez "Personnalisé" dans "Style poster", réglez le "taux" dans "Echelle (%)". La plage admissible va de 101 à 400. 5 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions avancées" et réglez les points suivants. – Superposition Réglez la quantité de recouvrement à la limite d'une page divisée. La plage admissible va de 0 à 150. 6 Une fois les réglages terminés, cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Changer le papier L'image est imprimée sans être agrandie ni réduite même si le format de sortie est différent. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Log/Phys] dans "Mise en page". 3 Sélectionnez un format de sortie dans "Format de sortie". – Pour modifier ou ajouter une "Bordure" ou une "Position", choisissez dans chaque zone de liste déroulante correspondante. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-25 Sélectionner le type de sortie Non seulement, vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour imprimer ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents dans le dossier des documents. 0 "Impression sécurisée" et "Enr. dns boîte utilis. (et imprim.)" doivent être réglés au préalable sur "Disque dur imprimante" avec l'onglet Option. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la méthode de sortie. – Impression : Imprime immédiatement. – Impression sécurisée : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans la boîte des documents classés de cet appareil. Pour imprimer, il vous est demandé de saisir l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Sélectionnez quand vous imprimez des documents très confidentiels. (jusqu'à 100 documents) – Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans une boîte de cette machine. – Enr. dns boîte utilis. imprim. : Enregistre simultanément le document dans une boîte. – Attente avec épreuve : après impression d'un exemplaire du document, la machine s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer. Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer les travaux d'impression volumineux. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression sécurisée % Si "Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné, saisissez l'ID et le mot de passe d'impression sécurisée dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Boîte ut. système] puis sur [Boîte RX sécurisé] en mode Boîte de cette machine. Après avoir saisi l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur, le document est accessible et peut être imprimé. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-27 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur % Quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim." est sélectionné, spécifiez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît pour saisir le nom de fichier et le numéro de la boîte utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) Attente avec épreuve % Lors de l'envoi d'une tâche d'impression, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après avoir imprimé un exemplaire du document. Le reste de la tâche d'impression est stocké dans l'appareil en tant que tâche d'impression. Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, vous pouvez imprimer la partie restante de la tâche d'impression après avoir vérifié les résultats d 'impression. Pour imprimer, affichez la liste des Tâches en attente de l'écran Liste Tâches sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil et appuyez sur [Libérer Tâch Att.]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-29 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification Si des paramètres d'authentification ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, il faut saisir un nom d'utilisateur. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Sélectionnez "Authentification" et sélectionnez ensuite "Utilisateur destinataire". 4 Tapez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil peut être utilisé sans nom d'utilisateur ni mot de passe. Pour les paramètres d'authentification, consultez l'administrateur de cet appareil. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-31 Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, vous devez saisir un mot de passe de service pour imprimer une travail. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Sélectionnez "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C)" et tapez le nom et le mot de passe du service. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez les cases "Couverture" et "Dos". Pour imprimer sur la page de couverture et de dos, sélectionnez "Imprimé". Pour n'ajouter qu'une page vierge, sélectionnez "Vierge". 3 Sélectionnez une source de papier dont le papier est défini pour être utilisé comme "Couverture" ou "Dos". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-33 Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture peut être jointe au document imprimé. Définissez le papier épais ou tout autre type de papier pour le bac d'insertion. Le papier chargé dans l'introducteur de papes de couverture est joint au document imprimé comme page de couverture. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez les cases à cocher "Couv. avc bac ins." et "Dos avc bac ins." dans "Couvertures avec bac d'insertion". Sélectionnez une source de papier correspondant au papier utilisé comme page de couverture ou page de dos. 2 Remarque Une couverture avec bac d'insertion ne peut être jointe que si le bac d'insertion (PI-501) est installé en option. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression de chapitres En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours sortir face imprimée vers le haut. Si une page spécifique devient le côté verso en mode d'impression Recto-verso, cette page est décalée vers le recto de la feuille suivante et imprimée. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez la case "Chapitre". 3 Indiquez les pages à sortir face imprimée vers le haut dans la zone de texte "Numéro de page". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-35 Imprimer plusieurs pages La fonction "Paramétrage par page" s'avère bien pratique si vous voulez changer de magasin papier pendant une tâche d'impression quand vous imprimer plusieurs pages. Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez spécifier le type d'impression et le magasin papier pour chaque page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Cliquez sur [Ajouter] et spécifiez le numéro de page, le type d'impression et la source papier dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 4 Cochez la case à cocher "Utilisation de papier à onglet" comme demandé et choisissez d'utiliser le papier à onglet pour le papier inséré. 2 Remarque Voir "Utilisation de papier à onglet" à la page 7-38 pour de plus amples informations sur la configuration de l'Utilisation de papier à onglet. Pour une liste existante, cliquez sur [Modifier] pour modifier les paramètres de page sélectionnés ou cliquez sur [Effacer] pour les supprimer. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) Enregistrer/Charger la configuration Vous pouvez enregistrer la configuration comme fichier de définition (xml) et charger le fichier de définition. Enregistrer la configuration 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Suivez la procédure de Paramétrage par page. 4 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer sous]. 5 Tapez le nom du fichier et enregistrez le fichier. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-37 Charger la configuration 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Cliquez sur [Charger]. 4 Le fichier de définition est chargé. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) Utilisation de papier à onglet Le papier à onglet disponible dans le commerce peut être utilisé par la fonction Paramétrage par page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Définissez le paramétrage par page ou chargez le fichier de définition. – Voir "Charger la configuration" à la page 7-37 pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du fichier de définition. 4 Cliquez sur [Config. papier à onglet]. La boîte de dialogue de configuration du papier à onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-39 5 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Format" de la boîte "Papier" et sélectionnez un format à utiliser dans la liste affichée. – La valeur par défaut est A4 à onglet. 6 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Nombre d'onglets" de la boîte "Papier". Une liste apparaît. Sélectionnez sur la liste un nombre d'onglets à utiliser. – Vous pouvez directement saisir le nombre dans la boîte "Nombre d'onglets". – La valeur par défaut est 5. – Vous pouvez définir une valeur numérique comprise entre 2 et 15. 7 Définissez le "réglage position" nécessaire en spécifiant les champs "Espace avant onglets", "Espace après onglet", "Espace entre onglets" ou "Position du texte". – La plage de valeur numériques définissables varie en fonction des valeurs numériques dans "Nombre d'onglets". 8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Configuration du papier à onglet. Retournez à l'écran "Paramétrage par page". 9 Cliquez sur [Ajouter]. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page apparaît. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-40 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10 Sélectionnez "Numéro de page", "Type d'impression" ou "Source papier" selon nécessité. 11 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utilisation du papier à onglet". – Cette étape n'est pas nécessaire si le texte de l'onglet ne doit pas être imprimé. Dans un cas pareil, passez à l'étape 17. 12 Entrez votre texte dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères. 13 Cliquez sur [Détails]. – La touche "Détails" ne peut pas être utilisée si vous ne saisissez rien dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". La boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-41 14 Définissez les paramètres "texte sur onglet"-"Orientation", "Position" et "Paramétrage police"-"Nom de police", "Style" ou "Format" selon nécessité. 15 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page réapparaît. 16 Pour spécifier l'onglet pour lequel saisir le "Texte sur onglet", cliquez sur [,] du champ "Position" et sélectionnez un onglet à spécifier. – La valeur par défaut est Continuer page précédente. 17 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page. L'onglet "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre "Propriétés" réapparaît. Le paramètre figure dans la zone de liste. 18 Pour utiliser un autre papier à onglet, exécuter les étapes 9 à 16. – Si vous utilisez du papier autre que le papier à onglet, voir Paramétrage par page. 19 Confirmez le contenu de la liste. 20 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la fenêtre "Propriété". – Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 30 paramètres à chaque liste. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-42 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales Imprimer le numéro du document Chaque document est numéroté lors de l'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Estampage numéro de distribution". 3 Réglez chaque point comme suit. – Pages à imprimer Sélectionnez soit "Toutes les pages" ou "1re page uniquement" comme page à imprimer avec un numéro. – Numéro de départ Définissez le chiffre du numéro de départ. 2 Remarque "Estampage numéro de distribution" ne peut s'utiliser que si "Tri" a été réglé sur l'onglet "Configuration". Le disque dur imprimante doit être installé au préalable avec l'onglet Option pour l'"Estampage numéro de distribution". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-43 Imprimer 2 pages sur du papier deux fois plus grand Un document de 2 pages peut être imprimé sur une feuille de papier. Dans ce cas, le format du papier de sortie est deux fois plus grand que le format original. Par exemple, quand le "Papier de sortie" a été réglé sur A4, le format du papier de sortie est A3. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison (pas de réduction)". 3 Sélectionnez les points suivants. – 2 en 1 2 pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier. – Répétition 2 en 1 Une page et sa copie sont imprimées sur une feuille de papier. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-44 IC-202 (Phase 2) Définir le pliage Le papier est plié est sorti dans cet état. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Cochez la case à cocher "Pliage". 3 Sélectionnez les points voulus. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-45 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) La position d'impression sur le papier de sortie peut être réglée comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case "Décalage d'image". 3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres]. 4 Réglez le décalage vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la droite et vers la gauche côtés recto et verso et réglez le décalage de gouttière par unités de "0,1mmm". 2 Remarque La fonction "Paramètres à utiliser" ne fonctionne pas. Seul un réglage côté pilote d'imprimante est possible. Sélectionnez la case "Réglage auto verso". Le verso peut être réglé de la même manière que le côté recto de la feuille. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-46 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet PostScript Impression d'un travail Définir s'il faut sortir ce travail vers l'imprimante ou sous forme de fichier PostScript Encapsulé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "Vers l'imprimante" ou "PostScript encapsul." dans Sortie. 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez "PostScript encapsul.", vous devez définir le nom de fichier. Cliquez sur et définissez un nom de fichier. Si vous ne définissez pas le nom de fichier ici, il vous sera demandé de saisir un nom de fichier à chaque fois que vous imprimerez un document. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-47 Compression d'un travail Définir s'il faut comprimer ou non le travail comme suit. Les données d'impression sont comprimées afin d'améliorer la vitesse d'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "LZW" ou "Flate" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Compression des travaux" sous Paramètres. – Si vous sélectionnez "Flate", vous pourrez sélectionner le type de compression Flate dans la zone de liste déroulante "Compression Flate". Compression des bitmaps Définir s'il faut ou non utiliser la compression des bitmaps. L'utilisation de cette fonction pour l'impression de données d'image améliore la vitesse d'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "RLE", "LZW" ou "JPEG" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Compression des bitmaps" sous Paramètres. – Si vous sélectionnez "JPEG", vous pourrez sélectionner le type de compression JPEG dans la zone de liste déroulante "JPEG". Utiliser le mode PS marqué Définir s'il faut utiliser ou non le mode PS marqué. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Si vous utilisez le mode PS marqué, cochez la case "PS marqué" sous Paramètres. Définir le protocole de sortie Définir le protocole de sortie comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "Binaire pur" ou "ASCII" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Protocole de sortie" sous Paramètres. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-48 IC-202 (Phase 2) Régler la valeur gamma Définir la valeur de correction gamma comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Définir la valeur de correction gamma à partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Niveau Gamma" sous Paramètres. – La plage admissible va de 0,000 à 2,000. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-49 Configurer les options Définir les détails de PostScript comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Cliquez sur [Options PostScript]. 3 Définir chaque point comme souhaité. – Imprimer les informations d'erreurs PostScript. En cochant cette case, les informations d'erreur sont imprimées dès qu'une erreur d'imprimante survient. – Utiliser PostScript Pass-through Lorsque cette case est cochée, une application gérant le PostScript (applications Adobe, Quark Xpress, etc.) prépare les données graphiques de façon à conserver la qualité des dessins d'origine. Toutefois, il est impossible d'utiliser la fonction pour le traitement d'images (Disposition, Livret, etc.). Lorsque la case est décochée, les données graphiques sont préparées côté pilote d'imprimante. Toutefois, si les données sont imprimées avec une application gérant le PostScript, la qualité des dessins risque d'en être altérée. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-50 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Voir les pages suivantes pour de plus amples informations sur les paramètres Superposition et Filigrane. Effacer mémoire par page Si vous cochez cette case, la mémoire d'imprimante de chaque page sera effacée. Compatibilité Sélectionnez "Optimisation pour vitesse" et d'autres types de sortie PostScript dans la zone de liste déroulante. Lissage bitmap Cochez cette case pour les lisser les points des bitmaps. Sous-menu Description Superposition "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition" à la page 7-51 Filigranes "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane" à la page 7-61 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-51 7.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition Créer Superposition Pour utiliser Superposition, les données destinées à la superposition doivent être enregistrées au préalable. Pour enregistrer la Superposition, préparez la Superposition pour le document à enregistrer dans "Créer superposition". 1 Préparez les données de superposition avec le logiciel d'application requis. 2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier". 3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" dans "Sélectionner imprimante" et cliquez sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Cliquez sur [Créer superposition]. La boîte de dialogue "Créer superposition" apparaît. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-52 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 Tapez le "Nom du fichier". 7 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. – Après avoir cliqué sur [Enregistrer], vous devez attendre que la création de la superposition soit terminée. La touche "Créer superposition" se transforme en "Annuler création de superposition". Pour annuler la création de superposition, cliquez sur [Annuler création de superposition]. 8 Confirmez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue "Imprimer" réapparaît. 9 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'impression n'a pas lieu et la superposition est enregistrée. L'extension devient "EPS". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-53 Ajouter Superposition Vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers de superposition à la liste selon la procédure suivante : 1 Préparez les données de superposition avec le logiciel d'application voulu. 2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier". 3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" dans "Sélectionner imprimante" et cliquez sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Cliquez sur [Ajouter superposition]. La boîte de dialogue "Charger fichier pour superposition" apparaît. 6 Sélectionnez un fichier approprié et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-54 IC-202 (Phase 2) – Le nom de fichier sélectionné apparaît sur la liste dans Superposition. Effacer Superposition Supprimez un fichier de la liste Superposition comme suit. 0 Si vous supprimez un fichier, il n'est pas seulement supprimé de la liste mais le fichier lui-même sera supprimé. 1 Préparez les données pour la superposition avec le logiciel d'application voulu. 2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier". 3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" comme "Imprimante sélectionné" et cliquez sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Sélectionnez un nom de fichier à supprimer et cliquez sur [Supprimer superposition]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-55